A Foodcentric Life

  • Easy Summer Grilling
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Easy Summer Grilling
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Easy Summer Grilling
    • Meet Chef Sally
    • Recipe Index
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Carrot Ginger Juice Recipe

    05/07/2018 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    carrot celery morning glow juice

    Ready to get your morning glow on? This refreshing carrot ginger juice recipe is a vibrant, nutrient-packed way to start your day. Made with red or orange carrots, fresh ginger, lemon, and celery, it's loaded with antioxidants, natural detoxifiers, and immune-boosting benefits. Drink it first thing in the morning-about 20 minutes before breakfast-to help your body absorb all that goodness. It's the perfect jumpstart for your digestion, skin, and energy. Time to glow from the inside out!

    morning glow carrot celery juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    When I found red carrots at the market I thought of juice! Not just for salads, soups, stews and for snacking, carrots make delicious, health-filled juice. Seriously, I crave this juice in the morning. It's easy to drink a 16-20 ounce bottle because it tastes fantastic and you feel so good afterwards. Drinking fresh, organic juice floods your body with powerful nutrition.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • Colorful and nutritious - Use any carrots you like, but the deeper the color, the more nutrients they contain.
      Ginger adds a kick - Fresh ginger gives this juice bold flavor and anti-inflammatory benefits.
      Simple and accessible - Made with just a few ingredients you can find at any grocery store year-round.
    • Homemade is healthiest - Avoid store-bought juices with extra additives, sugars, and that are pasteurized.

    Another way to enjoy carrots, try this creamy butternut squash and carrot soup.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Buy organic if possible, but if you can't get organic carrots, the good news is carrots are not on the EWG Dirty Dozen List. Just be sure to wash them well with a produce wash.

    bunches of red carrots | afoodcentriclife.com
    • Carrots: Any type of carrot will work-orange, yellow, red, even purple. Red and purple carrots tend to have more antioxidants, but all varieties are nutritious and taste great in this juice.
    • Celery: Celery is the backbone of many of my juice recipes, including this one. It adds hydration, a clean flavor, and blends well with the sweetness of the carrots and apple.
    • Apple: A tart green apple like Granny Smith adds just the right touch of sweetness and balances the earthy vegetables.
    • Ginger: Use fresh ginger root for a bold, zesty flavor and natural anti-inflammatory benefits. A little goes a long way, so adjust to taste.
    • Lemon: A splash of fresh lemon juice lifts the flavor and adds its own dose of vitamin C and brightness to the mix.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    If you love to juice, please read my guide on The Best Healthy Juice When Juicing with Vegetables for more information.

    Recipe Instructions

    Prep the ingredients and process according to your juicer's manufacturer's directions. I do not peel my lemons as some recipes do because there is terrific nutrition in the lemon peel (D-limonene).

    Serving Suggestions

    When you're done juicing, store your carrot ginger juice in glass bottles or jars. For both, fill them to the very top before capping to reduce oxygen exposure and protect nutrients. If you are a little short on juice, fill with fresh filtered water.

    One of my favorite side dishes is carrots roasted with honey and good dose of fresh chopped thyme.

    Health Benefits of Carrot Ginger Juice

    Carrots get their color from antioxidants called carotenoids, one of which is beta-carotene, the precursor to vitamin A. Drinking carrot juice may protect against cancer, support good eye health, fight against cardiovascular disease, help wound healing, help blood pressure and immune function, and defend against cognitive decline - all from the humble carrot.

    Celery is anti-inflammatory, helps lower blood pressure, and helps your body stay hydrated, says Cleveland Clinic. All from the wonderful vegetable that you thought was boring. When buying celery, choose organic only, as celery is on the Dirty Dozen list for highest pesticide residues.

    To finish up my carrot ginger juice, I add ginger and lemon for flavor, zing, digestive support, anti-inflammatory benefits and more. One Granny Smith apples adds a bit of sweet-tartness amd more antioxidant punch.

    morning glow carrot celery juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Recipe FAQs

    Is this juice good for digestion?

    Yes. Ginger and lemon both support healthy digestion, and celery adds natural hydration and a mild diuretic effect. Drinking it on an empty stomach can help your body absorb the nutrients more effectively.

    Can I prep this juice ahead of time?

    Fresh juice is best consumed right after making it, but you can store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 24 hours. Shake before drinking, as separation is natural.

    Is this juice good for immunity?


    Definitely. Carrots are rich in beta-carotene (a form of vitamin A), while ginger and lemon provide antioxidants and immune-boosting compounds that can help support your body's natural defenses.

    Can I make this without a juicer?

    If you don't have a juicer, you can use a high-speed blender. Just blend the ingredients with a splash of water, then strain the mixture through a fine mesh sieve or nut milk bag to remove the pulp. You will get more nutrition and better quality juice with a juicer, so I recommend you invest in a juicer if yoou juice on a regular basis. They come in all price ranges.

    More Juice Recipes

    For more delicious healthy juice recipe check out the juice recipes index page. There are super smoothie recipes too!

    • Detoxing green juice in a glass with a straw.
      How to Make a Detox Green Juice
    • watermelon cucumber juice
      Watermelon Cucumber Juice
    • A glass of bright green cabbage juice on a brown cutting board with vegetable bowl behind.
      Cabbage Juice
    • glass of deep ruby red beet juice with vegetables behind.
      Beet Juice Recipe

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this carrot ginger juice recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. They really help other readers. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating!

    📖 Recipe

    morning glow juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Carrot Ginger Juice

    Sally Cameron
    A healthy way to get your morning glow on, with carrots, celery, apple, ginger and lemon. Use red carrots if you can get them, if not, the standard orange carrots will do. Organic is best for juicing but organic celery is a must as it's on the Dirty Dozen list. Wash your produce as soon as you get it home to save time.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Drinks, Juices
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2 16-ounce (1 quart)
    Calories 208 kcal

    Equipment

    • an electric juicer

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ - 2 pounds red or orange carrots 8-10 large carrots
    • 1 head celery 8-10 ribs
    • 1 tart green apple cored
    • 1 lemon
    • 1 inch fresh ginger root

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Chop produce into the appropriate size for your juicer, then juice according to the manufacturers directions.
    • Strain if desired. Serve immediately or chill.

    Notes

    How you cut up your produce for juicing will depend on the brand of juicer. I use  Tribest Green Star Elite, I cut my apple and lemon into about 8 pieces for juicing. Follow the directions for your juicer for best results. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 208kcalCarbohydrates: 51gProtein: 4gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 0.2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.5gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 253mgPotassium: 1327mgFiber: 14gSugar: 27gVitamin A: 56984IUVitamin C: 54mgCalcium: 140mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Smoked Queso Dip with Real Cheese

    05/13/2025 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Cast iron pan of cheesy queso dip with cilantro, tortilla chips, and jalapeno garnish.

    Skip the processed shortcuts-this smoked queso dip is made with real cheese and real ingredients (no Velveeta). Whether you smoke it on a pellet grill or bake it in the oven, it turns out creamy, smoky, and loaded with flavor. It's a crowd-pleaser for parties and game day, and I've included oven and crockpot directions so it's easy to serve warm.

    A cast iron skillet filled with melted bright orange queso dip with jalapenos, cilantro, and chips.

    This smoked queso dip recipe serves comes together with a simple mix of cheeses, canned tomatoes, spices, jalapeños, and optional add-ins like sausage. No smoker? No problem. The oven version is just as creamy and melty. While cast iron is ideal for heat retention and presentation, a disposable aluminum pan works great for potlucks, tailgates, or easy cleanup. It's the perfect cheese dip for your next party!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • No Velveeta cheese, no junk - just real cheese and bold, smoky flavor.
    • Smoker, oven, or crockpot - for grilling outdoors or keeping it indoors.
    • Perfect for entertaining - ideal for a backyard barbecue, game day, potlucks, and casual get-togethers.
    • Small-batch friendly - fits perfectly in a 10 ½-inch cast iron skillet.
    • Make ahead or take it on the go - serve it hot, reheat it later, or travel with a disposable aluminum pan.

    Need another great party dip? Try this roasted red bell pepper hummus.

    Smoked Queso Dip Ingredients

    Ingredients for smoked queso dip in prep bowls on a kitchen counter.
    • Cream cheese - Full-fat for best flavor and creaminess.
    • Smoked gouda - Adds smoky depth and a smooth, melty texture.
    • Sharp cheddar cheese - For classic queso flavor and richness.
    • Tomatoes - A can of Rotel tomatoes (diced tomatoes with green chiles) or fire-roasted diced tomatoes.
    • Jalapeños - Fresh jalapeños for mild to medium heat, or use other types of peppers like Fresno, serrano, or red jalapeños if you want more heat and spice.
    • Garlic - Use fresh garlic for bold flavor or garlic powder if you want it to melt in smoothly without any texture. Both work.
    • Smoked paprika - Adds smoky flavor and deep color.
    • Onion powder - For background savory depth.
    • Chili powder - Use pure ancho chili powder or regular chili powder blend.
    • Evaporated milk - Gives the dip a creamier, smoother texture and helps stabilize the cheese as it melts-especially helpful if you plan to reheat it or keep it warm for a while. I've made it with whole milk too and evaporated milk works better.
    • Pre-cooked chicken sausage - Chop and stir in; no need to brown or drain. Adds protein and heartiness.
    • Liquid smoke - Optional for the oven version but fine for the smoked version too.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper.

    Chef's tip: Skip the fake cheese. Velveeta isn't real cheese-it's an ultra-processed food, a blend of whey, oils, emulsifiers, and preservatives designed to mimic cheese. This recipe is real queso dip with real cheese for bold flavor. You won't miss the orange block!

    This homemade salsa verde made with tomatillos and chilies is another great dip for chips!

    Substitutions and Variations

    Smoked cheese dip? Yes please. Since getting my pellet grill years ago, there's nothing better!

    • Other cheeses - Monterey Jack cheese or pepper Jack cheese are great swaps.
    • Canned green chiles - For more chile flavor, add a small can of green chiles. 
    • Hot sauce or chipotle powder for more heat.
    • Swap sausage for chorizo, browned ground beef or turkey, or black beans.
    • Stir in cilantro or scallions before serving
    • Cumin - Adds warm, earthy depth if desired.

    Make a batch of this easy smoked salsa on your pellet grill too! It's delicious and versatile.

    Chef's tip: Skip the pre-grated cheese. Pre-grated cheese is coated with anti-caking agents and starches that prevent clumping and interferes with smooth melting. For the best texture and flavor, grate your cheese fresh. Use a box grater or food processor, or chop by hand into small cubes.

    Recipe Instructions

    Grate the cheeses or chop into cubes and chop the sausage (if using). Seed and chop the jalapenos fine. Preheat your pellet grill to 250°F and make sure the hopper is full.

    Ingredients for smoked queso dip in a cast iron skillet on a grill.
    1. Add all of the prepped ingredients to a 10 ½" cast iron skillet and place on the pellet grill at 250°F.
    Melted cheesy queso dip on a the grill of a smoker almost ready.
    1. Smoke for 1 ½ - 2 hours stirring every 30 minutes as cheese melts.

    Chef's tip on pellets: I use either pecan pellets made from real pecan shells or this pure hardwood blend of hickory, cherry, maple, and apple-no fillers, just clean, natural wood. Both give amazing depth to the smoked queso without overpowering the cheese.

    Other Cooking Methods for Queso DIp

    Oven Method

    • Option 1 - Melt everything together on the stovetop over medium-low heat, then transfer the skillet to a 350°F oven for 15-20 minutes until bubbling hot.
    • Option 2 - Bake the assembled skillet in the 350°F oven for about 35-45 minutes, stirring halfway through until hot and bubbly.
    • A charcoal grill works too-set it up for indirect heat and monitor the temp as it cooks low and slow.

    Gas Grill

    You can also make smoked queso dip on a gas grill using indirect heat-just keep the temperature around 250°F. You can use a higher temperature, such as 350°F, adjusting cook time to 45 minutes of cooking time as for the oven method. For delicious smoky flavor, add a smoker box with soaked wood chips.

    Slow Cooker (Crockpot)

    1. Combine ingredients: Add all queso ingredients to a small slow cooker (2-4 qt).
    2. Heat on LOW: Cover and cook on LOW for 1½-2½ hours, stirring every 20-30 minutes, until fully melted and smooth. (Avoid HIGH if your slow cooker runs hot-cheese can scorch.)
    3. Adjust texture: If it's too thick, stir in a splash of milk (or a little broth) until pourable.
    4. Keep warm: Switch to WARM for serving. Stir occasionally. If it thickens as it sits, add another splash of milk and stir.
    Cast iron pan of cheesy queso dip with cilantro, tortilla chips, and jalapeno garnish.

    Serving Suggestions

    Keep smoked queso dip warm on the stovetop over low heat, or transfer to a small slow cooker or crock pot set to warm for gatherings. Serve with crisp tortilla chips, crackers, and fresh-cut veggies.

    Leftover smoked queso dip lasts up to 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container, and can be made ahead. Note - this does not freeze well.

    How to Reheat Smoked Queso Dip

    If you make smoked queso dip ahead of time, be prepared-it will firm up into a solid block of cheese in the fridge. Real cheese naturally thickens as it cools, so for the best texture, serve it fresh and warm, or keep it in a small slow cooker.

    Using evaporated milk in the recipe helps it stay creamier a bit longer, especially when reheated. You can stir in a little more as needed if the dip thickens too much after chilling. Here's how to bring it back to creamy, melty perfection:

    For a full batch, oven method

    • Preheat oven to 300°F.
    • Transfer queso to a baking dish or back to your cast iron skillet.
    • Stir in a little extra evaporated milk to thin it and get creaminess back.
    • Cover with foil and heat for 20-25 minutes, stirring halfway through.

    For smaller portions/leftovers:
    Reheat gently on the stovetop in a small pan over low heat. Add a splash of milk and stir until smooth.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make smoked queso without Velveeta?


    Absolutely! This recipe skips the processed cheese and uses real cheddar, smoked gouda, and cream cheese for a creamy, flavorful dip-no Velveeta needed. Skip the ultra-processed fake stuff.

    Do I need a smoker to make smoked queso dip?


    Nope! While the smoker adds amazing depth, you can also make this dip in the oven or on the stovetop, then finish it in the oven to heat through. Directions for both are included in the recipe.

    Can I make this ahead of time?

    Yes! You can prep all the ingredients ahead and refrigerate until ready to cook. Leftovers reheat well too-just warm slowly on the stovetop or in a slow cooker, adding a splash of milk if needed.

    What's the best cheese for smoked queso?

    A mix of sharp cheddar and smoked gouda works beautifully. Cheddar adds that classic queso punch, while gouda brings meltability and natural smoke flavor. Monterey Jack or pepper Jack also work well as variations.

    More Dip Recipes

    For more easy and delicious dip recipes, try these! The smoked salmon dip is a reader favorite with more than 11,000 shares!

    • Creamy salmon dip on an appetizer tray with crackers and cucumber chips.
      The Best Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe
    • Easy Green Goddess Dip (and dressing)
    • Close up of creamy basil and avocado dip in white bowl.
      Avocado Dip with Yogurt and Fresh Basil

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this smoked queso dip, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. They really help other readers. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating!

    📖 Recipe

    Cast iron pan of cheesy queso dip with cilantro, tortilla chips, and jalapeno garnish.

    Smoked Queso Dip with Real Cheese

    Sally Cameron
    This creamy, smoked queso dip skips the Velveeta and delivers bold flavor with real cheese and customizable add-ins. Made right in a cast iron skillet on your pellet grill-or in the oven-it's perfect for parties, BBQs, and game day. No fake cheese, just real flavor. Serve with tortilla chips, veggies, or crackers.
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer, Dip
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 to 10, Yield 4 cups
    Calories 271 kcal

    Equipment

    • 10 ½" Cast iron skillet or small aluminum disposable pan, to hold 1 quart

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ounces sharp cheddar cheese grated by hand, not pre-grated
    • 8 ounces smoked gouda cheese grated by hand
    • 10 ounce can rotel tomatoes with chilies drained partially
    • 4 ounces full fat cream cheese
    • 1-2 jalapeno peppers seeded and chopped fine
    • 3 garlic cloves chopped fine or zested
    • ½ teaspoon smoked paprika or regular paprika
    • ½ teaspoon chili powder or ancho chili powder
    • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ cup evaporated milk plus more for thinning if needed
    • 6 ounces pre-cooked chicken sausage (optional) chopped fine or food processor
    • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh cilantro optional garnish
    • ¼ - ½ teaspoon liquid smoke for the oven version

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep the ingredients

    • Chop or grate the cheddar cheese and smoked gouda by hand or with a box grater or in a food processor with the grating disc. Chop the sausage finely (if using), or in the food processor. Finely chop or zest the garlic. Chop the top off the jalapenos, slice lengthwise, and remove seeds and white membrane. Partially drain the can of tomatoes.

    Assemble the dip

    • In a 10½-inch cast iron skillet, combine all ingredients: cream cheese, grated cheeses, tomatoes, jalapeños, garlic, spices, and sausage (if using). Add the little milk or half and half to help the melting process.

    Smoke it: pellet grill method

    • Preheat your pellet grill to 250°F and make sure the hopper is full. Place the skillet directly on the grates. Smoke for 1½ to 2 hours, stirring every 30 minutes, until everything is melted, smoky, and bubbling.

    Bake it: oven method

    • Option 1: Melt everything together in the skillet on the stovetop over medium-low heat, then transfer to a 350°F oven for 15-20 minutes.
      Option 2: Place the assembled skillet directly in a 350°F oven for 35–40 minutes, stirring halfway through.

    To serve smoked queso dip

    • Serve hot with tortilla chips, crackers, or fresh-cut veggies. To keep warm, leave on low heat on the stovetop or transfer to a small slow cooker.
      Leftover queso dip lasts up to 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container, and can be made ahead. Reheat on the stove on low heat, stirring so it does not scorch, adding evaporated milk to thin as needed and get it back to as creamy as you desire.

    Notes

    Variations
    • Other cheeses - Monterey Jack or pepper Jack are great swaps.
    • Canned green chiles - For even more chile flavor (mild and flavorful).
    • Hot sauce for more heat (can stir in a the end).
    • Swap cooked chorizo, browned ground beef or dark turkey, or even crisp crumbled bacon for the cooked chicken sausage links. 
    • For a vegetarian option, add black beans. 
    • Spice - Add a little chipotle powder for smoky heat.
    For a bigger crowd
    This recipe is easy to scale up for a larger crowd—just double the ingredients and use a large foil pan or 9x13" baking dish to feed a big group, or to be sure to have leftovers.
    Note on salt & pepper
    With the saltiness of the cheese and sausage, you likely won’t need added salt. Black pepper is optional—add to taste before serving, if desired.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 271kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 15gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 76mgSodium: 562mgPotassium: 163mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 727IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 374mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Caesar Salad Dressing Without Anchovies

    09/30/2022 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A bowl of homemade caesar dressing with spoon.

    Forget store-bought Caesar dressings-grab your blender and whip up this rich, creamy homemade Caesar salad dressing without anchovies in just 2 minutes! It's always a hit, and not just for Caesar salads either. It adds a burst of flavor to grilled veggies, sandwiches, and more. You can easily skip the anchovies and still create a fantastic, flavor-packed dressing. Say goodbye to the bottle and bring new life to your Caesar salads with this easy, delicious recipe!

    Caesar dressing in a glass bowl with spoon.

    Caesar salad dressing is known for its bold, creamy flavor-but you don't need anchovies to make it great. This Caesar salad dressing without anchovies is rich, tangy, and takes just a minute to make in the blender. It's perfect for classic romaine, but also works beautifully on other greens or drizzled over steamed vegetables. Homemade beats bottled every time.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Caesar Dressing Ingredients

    Caesar salad dressing ingredients in small bowls.
    • Lemon juice - Use fresh lemon juice for the brightest flavor.
    • Egg yolk - Just the yolk is needed; it helps emulsify the dressing for a creamy texture.
    • Dijon mustard - A classic Caesar ingredient and a natural emulsifier that adds subtle heat and tang.
    • Anchovy paste (optional) - I can't stand anchovies on a Caesar salad, but you would be surprised how much depth of flavor anchovy paste in a tube adds with no fishiness. I know, you're skeptical, It's ok to pass!
    • Garlic - Fresh is best for bold flavor-grate it finely or smash into a paste.
    • Balsamic vinegar - Not traditional, but adds depth and a slightly sweet, rich note.
    • Worcestershire sauce - A Caesar essential that brings savory, umami flavor.
    • Extra virgin olive oil - The base of the dressing; choose a smooth, good-quality oil.
    • Parmesan cheese - Adds salty, nutty flavor and body to the dressing.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's tip on gluten-free worcestershire: Lea and Perrins Original, Wizard's Classic, and French's are all gluten, even if the bottle does not say so. When in question, call the company's customer service line.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Instead of Parmesan cheese try Mexican Cotija. It's salty and crumbly so be careful with extra salt.
    • Don't like olive oil? Avocado oil works. For a neutral tasting, healthy oil that is not vegetable oil, try this cultured oil. It's become a favorite alongside olive oil. Another option, use half olive oil and half of another oil.
    • Don't like Dijon? Use your favorite mustard, but it will taste different.
    • Try using lime juice for lemon. Limes are more acidic.
    • Too thick? Use water or more lemon juice.
    • Can't get Romaine? Try kale leaves, arugula, spinach, or thinly sliced Napa cabbage.

    Chef's tip: Remember the lettuce and dressing rule: sturdy leaves for sturdy, creamier dressing, light dressing (like fluid vinaigrettes) for lighter, softer leaves.

    A bowl of caesar dressing with spoon.

    Ingredient Tips

    Chef's Tip: Using a raw egg yolk? If your egg is clean, fresh, uncracked, and you're not in a high-risk group, it's generally safe. For extra peace of mind, look for pasteurized eggs-they've been gently heated to kill potential bacteria. I personally use raw yolks and have never had an issue. Always buy eggs from a refrigerated case, check them before using, and store them in the fridge right away. The only exception? Unwashed farm-fresh eggs, which still have their natural protective bloom. For the food safety rules and who is at risk read about consuming raw egg yolk. They say 1 in 20,000 eggs have the bacteria but do what is safest for your family.

    How to Make Caesar Dressing

    You can make Caesar salad dressing without anchovies either in a blender or by hand. It is much easier and faster with a blender. An emulsion blender works too. Use a tall narrow container to make the dressing for best emulsification.

    Blender Method

    Blender with dressing ingredients.

    Add the lemon juice egg yolk, mustard, anchovy paste (if using), garlic, vinegar, and Worcestershire sauce to the blender and puree on lowest speed for a few seconds.

    Next, with the blender running on low, begin to drizzle the oil slowly through the center opening of the lid, lid on, to reduce splattering. When most of the oil is added, turn the

    Making dressing in a blender.

    Caesar Salad Dressing by Hand

    You can make Caesar dressing by hand but it might not be as creamy. First stabilize a bowl in a curled up kitchen towel. You'll need to use both hands making the dressing.

    Place the egg yolk, mustard and lemon juice in a medium bowl and whisk strongly until smooth. Next, begin to very slowly drizzle the oil into the bowl whisking constantly. As the dressing thickens (begins to emulsify) you can add the oil a little faster.

    When all of the oil is added, whisk in the Parmesan cheese unti smooth, taste and adjust with more lemon, salt and pepper.

    Caesar salad closeup.

    Serving Suggestions

    To make a Caesar salad, chop crisp Romaine lettuce crosswise into ribbons or chop into bite-size pieces and drizzle with the dressing. You can also buy hearts of Romaine, leave the leaves whole, and serve it as a salad to be cut up by the diner.

    • Add croutons and grated or shaved Parmesan. For a main dish salad, add grilled shrimp or chicken.
    • For a Mexican twist, toasted pumpkin seeds are a terrific and tasty garnish, along with chopped fresh cilantro.
    • Add finely sliced red onions, corn kernels, or thin strips of bell peppers for color and creativity.
    • Instead of croutons, crush tortilla chips over the top or use these homemade tortilla strips.
    • Homemade garlicky, gluten-free croutons are the best and super easy to make,
    Caesar salad  in bowl with homemade dressing on side.

    Storage

    Store dressing in a sealed jar or airtight container with lid. Keeps for 2-3 days because of the raw egg yolk. If you have a blender, it's easy to make a fresh batch to be safe. If it is older than that, toss it and make fresh.

    Recipe FAQs

    What can I do if my Caesar dressing is too thick?

    Thin it down with a little water or more lemon juice, but add a little at a time so you don't make it too thin.

    Can I make Caesar dressing without anchovies?

    If the mere mention of anchovy makes you run for the hills, you have two options for your Caesar dressing. Sure, you can skip it and the dressing will still taste great, or do what I do. Use just a little anchovy paste in a tube. I am not an anchovy lover at all, but a small bit of the paste adds a depth of flavor and that umami-ness to the Caesar dressing. And the best part? You won't taste the anchovy.

    Can I make a dairy-free Caesar dressing?

    Yes, either use a vegan-parmesan or use nutritional yeast, which gives foods a savory cheesy flavor without the cheese. Find it on health most markets and online. Nutritional yeast is a deactivated yeast powder that has a bright yellow color, so it adds a golden hue to your dairy-free Caesar dressing as well.

    More Terrific Salad Dressing Recipes

    Within these salad recipes are easy and delicious vinaigrettes. Find more on the salads recipe index page.

    • chinese chicken salad
      Healthy Chicken Salad Recipe with Ginger Salad Dressing
    • Fennel orange salad with avocado, pomegranate seeds, and orange slices on a plate.
      Fennel Orange Salad with Orange Vinaigrette
    • Chicken blueberry salad
      Blueberry Vinaigrette
    • grilled fig salad
      Fig Salad with Goat Cheese and Balsamic Vinaigrette

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this Caesar salad dressing without anchovies, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A bowl of homemade caesar dressing with spoon.

    Homemade Mexican Caesar Salad Dressing

    Sally Cameron
    Classic and creamy with a hint of lemon, this homemade Caesar dressing is easy to make and beats anything from a bottle. Use for a Caesar and other salads too!
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Dressing
    Cuisine Mexican
    Servings 6 ¾ cup yield
    Calories 179 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 tablespoons fresh squeezed lemon juice
    • 1 large egg yolk
    • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • ½ teaspoon anchovy paste in a tube optional
    • 1 garlic clove finely chopped
    • 1 teaspoon worcestershire
    • ½ teaspoon balsamic vinegar
    • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoon finely grated Parmesan cheese or Mexican Cotija
    • 1 pinch sea salt
    • 1 pinch white pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place the lemon juice egg yolk, mustard, anchovy paste, garlic, vinegar, and Worcestershire sauce in a blender and puree on lowest speed for a few seconds to blend.
      With the blender top on and the center top removed, slowly stream the oil into the blender until dressing is creamy and emulsified. Increase the speed as you go. Add the Parmesan and puree until creamy.
      If the dressing gets too thick, add either a little more lemon juice or warm water to make it the consistency you prefer.
      Taste and adjust the salt and pepper if desired.

    Notes

    Dressing will keep up to 2-3 days in the refrigerator well chilled and covered, but no longer because of the raw egg yolk. Better to make in small batches and keep it fresh (and safe). 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tablespoonsCalories: 179kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 1gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 14gCholesterol: 32mgSodium: 54mgPotassium: 22mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 0.3gVitamin A: 55IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 27mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Lemony Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

    05/27/2023 by Sally Cameron 8 Comments

    Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.

    The perfect Mediterranean pasta salad for summer barbecues and picnics with beautiful colors and incredible flavors. Sweet grape tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, meaty Greek olives and artichoke hearts, plus tangy feta cheese. Top it all off with a zesty lemony vinaigrette with fresh herbs. Make it a gluten-free pasta salad or dairy-free if desired, and make it ahead! Packs great for picnics and summer entertaining.

    Colorful Mediterranean pasta salad in a large white serving bowl.

    Who doesn't love a good summer pasta salad? This Mediterranean pasta salad is much like a Greek salad with many of the same elements. I think you'll love it.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Packed with the colors and flavors of Mediterranean cuisine.
    • Great for barbecues, summer cookouts, and as a picnic salad.
    • Make ahead and dress when ready to serve.
    • Cold pasta salad is refreshing in summer months.

    Another terrific summer salad to try is this cold lentil and quinoa salad.

    Pasta Salad Ingredients

    Dressing and salad ingredients for Mediterranean pasta salad.

    Pasta Salad

    • Pasta: Gluten-free or regular pasta. Use a short pasta such as elbows, bows (farfalle), mini penne, rotini pasta or corkscrew (fusilli). Here's my favorite GF pasta.
    • Cucumber: I like the sweet little Persian cucumbers but an English cucumber works too.
    • Tomatoes: Grape tomatoes or cherry tomatoes, even sun-dried tomatoes work.
    • Cheese: A good tangy Greek feta cheese (or goat cheese) is super in this pasta salad (optional). Skip for dairy-free or use a dairy-free cheese. Cube or crumble.
    • Olives: Buy pitted briny olives kalamata olives or green olives if you prefer.
    • Artichoke hearts: Get the canned ones packed in water and drain. Chop if large.
    • Onion: Use a red onion for nice color; shallots works too if you are not crazy about red onion. To tame red onion, chop rinse in cold water, and dry, then add.
    • Herbs: Chopped fresh parsley lends more color and fresh garden flavor.
    • Nuts: Buttery pine nuts add a nice crunch and flavor. Skip for nut-allergies.

    If you like grape tomatoes and cherry tomatoes, try this cherry tomato tart or these roasted grape tomatoes. And for another classic pasta salad, try this Best Ever Macaroni Salad from my friend Laura.

    Chef's Tip: To easily slice fresh tomatoes, use a small serrated knife called a tomato knife. It makes slicing so easy and clean. And it's useful for many other things.

    Lemon Herb Vinaigrette Dressing

    Homemade dressing is the best for this pasta salad (or any salad in my opinion).

    • Olive oil: Plain extra virgin olive oil or lemon olive oil.
    • Lemon juice: Only fresh lemon juice will do here for that bright lemony flavor (zest before juicing).
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh mint and thyme or oregano, chives for garnish.
    • Dijon mustard: Just a little for more Mediterranean flavor and it's an emulsifier.
    • Seasonings: Salt, black pepper and red chili flakes if you like.
    • Honey: Optional, just a small amount if the vinaigrette is too tangy for you.

    Use extra chopped mint and oregano to mix in fresh before serving, and the lemon zest from juicing.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's Tip: Fresh basil leaves are terrific in this Mediterranean pasta salad. Choose large leaves from a bunch, stack them together and roll like a cigar, the thinly slice crosswise into ribbons. It's called a chiffonade. Add them just before serving for best flavor and color (instead of wilted basil).

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add chopped salami or ribbons of prosciutto.
    • Add garbanzo beans for more protein and crunch.
    • Add fresh baby spinach leaves or fresh arugula.
    • Change up the dressing with this easy homemade Italian salad dressing.
    • Switch out the fresh herbs, try dill.
    • Swap red wine vinegar for lemon juice in the vinaigrette.
    • Add chopped bell pepper or raw chopped zucchini for more fresh vegetables.

    For another terrific pasta salad, try this Caesar pasta salad with chicken.

    Chef's tip: Should you seed cucumbers? It depends on the cucumber variety you're using. If you buy the mini or Persian cucumbers, you can skip seeding. If you buy the long English cucumbers, slice them lengthwise into quarters, then lay the pieces with the seeds up and slice out the seedy centers with a sharp knife. If you have field cucumbers with the tougher nubby skin, scrub the wax off or peel them first and do the same as the English cucumber. Less seeds equals less watery cucumbers and final dish.

    Recipe Instructions

    Pouring dry pasta into a large pot of boiling water to cook.
    Step 1: Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Add the pasta to the boiling water, cooking until just al dente. Test it near the end of cooking. You want tender pasta but not too soft.
    Drained butterfly pasta in a strainer on a gray towel.
    Step 2: Drain and rinse pasta briefly with cold water and drain well. Toss with a little extra virgin olive oil. Cool pasta to make the pasta salad.
    Dressing ingredients of fresh herbs and olive oil in a jar.
    Step 3: Make the dressing. For a creamier dressing, do it in a blender or add all ingredients to a bowl and whisk well (be sure your herbs are chopped fine).
    Bright green emulsified pasta salad dressing after blending.
    Step 4: Creamy green vinaigrette done in the blender.
    Prepping veggies for pasta salad: tomatoes, olive, cucumbers, feta cheese on a black cutting board.
    Step 5: Prep the vegetables. Rinse and drain the artichokes hearts, halve the tomatoes, leave the olives halve or halve them, crumble the feta, and slice or chop the cucumbers.

    Mixing pasta salad in a large steel bowl with dressing.
    Step 6: Complete your Mediterranean pasta salad. Add the cooled pasta to a large bowl along with all of the vegetables, olives, cheese, fresh herbs, and nuts and toss with 3 tablespoons of the dressing. Gently toss the pasta mixture. Add more dressing as needed.

    Serving Suggestions

    This Mediterranean pasta salad is terrific on it's own and the perfect side dish for grilled chicken, shrimp, burgers or this recipe for baby back ribs started in the oven and finished on the grill. It's super versatile and always welcome. Serve chilled.

    For an all-in-one main dish pasta salad recipe toss together with cubed chicken. For a tuna pasta salad, add low mercury, safe catch canned tuna.

    White bowl of colorful farfalle pasta salad with serving utensils.

    Chef's Tip: You'll savor the flavors of Mediterranean pasta salad more at room temperature than cold. It's about how our tastebuds work. Cold foods need more seasoning for us to taste them, and warm or hot foods taste more fully flavored with less. Taste and season appropriately.

    Picnic Tips

    Whether you are picnicking in your back yard, park or at the beach, this tasty pasta salad recipe is good to have in your pocket for fun-filled summer opportunities to get outside and enjoy.

    • Pack Mediterranean pasta salad family style in one large airtight container with a tight lid or in individual portioned containers that you can eat right out of. Small ones fit onto a picnic basket easier and each person had their own portion.
    • Pack extra lemony vinaigrette in a smaller container.
    • Pack your picnic protein separately.
    • Remember those handy cleanup towelettes, plenty of napkins, and trash bags to carry home.
    • For an easy picnic dessert, try these bite-sized chocolate bark bites or gluten-free decadent chocolate brownies (gluten-free!).

    Recipe FAQs

    Why do you rinse pasta for pasta salad?

    Rinsing pasta for pasta salad in cold water stops the cooking process so you don't end up with mushy, over-cooked pasta. Rinsing removes some of the starch leaving the pasta loose and not clumpy. You don't want a sticky pasta salad. For hot dishes, do not rinse pasta.

    How do you cool pasta down for pasta salad?

    Cool pasta for pasta salad by briefly rinsing under cold water after draining. Shake the colander to remove some of the water and pour into a large flat casserole dish or a large bowl. More surface area means faster cooling and pasta that doesn't stick together.

    Should you put olive oil on pasta after cooking?

    If cooking pasta for a pasta salad, just a very small amount of olive oil after cooking and draining pasta keeps it from sticking together. So yes, but just a little.

    More Great Summer Salad Recipes

    For more cool summer recipes to get you through a the summer, take a look at the salads recipe category. You can't beat a cool entree salad like this grilled shrimp salad with a raspberry vinaigrette on a hot day.

    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
    • White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.
      Easy Coleslaw Recipe and Dressing
    • leafy green and berry salad
      Strawberry Goat Cheese Salad

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this Mediterranean pasta salad, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.

    Mediterranean Pasta Salad

    Sally Cameron
    This pasta salad is bursting with colors, flavors, and a lemon-herb vinaigrette. It packs easy for a picnic at the park or beach. Team it with grilled chicken breast or grilled shrimp, burgers or ribs. Skip the cheese for dairy-free.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Main Course, Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American, Mediterranean
    Servings 6
    Calories 337 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot to cook pasta

    Ingredients
      

    Lemony Vinaigrette (makes extra, 1 cup total)

    • ¾ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • ¼ cup + 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice zest before juicing, use to garnish
    • 2 tablespoon fresh finely chopped thyme or oregano
    • 2 tablespoon fresh finely chopped mint
    • 1 teaspoon smooth Dijon mustard
    • 2 large garlic cloves zested or chopped fine
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 pinch red chili flakes optional
    • ½ teaspoon honey if the dressing is too tart, optional

    Pasta Salad

    • 8 ounces gluten-free pasta (or wheat) elbow, bows, mini penne, rotelle
    • 3 small Persian cucumbers seeded, quartered and diced
    • 18-20 small grape or cherry tomatoes halved, about 6 ounces
    • 6 ounces Greek feta cheese crumbled
    • 20 pitted Greek Kalamata olives halved or left whole
    • 1 15-ounce can artichoke hearts packed in water rinsed, drained, halved if large
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped parsley
    • ¼ cup pine nuts
    • ¼ small red onion or use a shallot

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make the dressing

    • Make the vinaigrette in a blender so it emulsified and a little creamy. Alternatively whisk all ingredients together in a bowl or place in a jar with a tight lid and shake well. Taste and add a little honey if it's too tart, then set aside to dress the pasta salad.

    Cook pasta

    • Bring a large pot of water with a tablespoon of salt to a boil. Add the pasta and cook according to package directions. Check 1 minute before the end of the package timing. You want al dente pasta, not overly cooked pasta. Drain immediately, rinse with cold water briefly, and toss with a little vinaigrette or olive oil. Cool pasta to make the pasta salad.

    Make the pasta salad

    • When the pasta is cool, add the cucumbers, tomatoes, feta, olives, artichoke hearts, and pine nuts. Toss with another 2-3 tablespoons of the vinaigrette. Chill until ready to eat.

    Garnish

    • To garnish at serving, sprinkle with a little more chopped herbs (chopped mint is lovely), and more pine nuts if needed. Use the lemon zest from the dressing for more color and lemony flavor.

    To Make ahead

    • Cook the pasta, toss with a little oil, cool and refrigerate. Do all of the prep work, making the dressing and slicing vegetables, crumbling cheese. Keep them separate and refrigerated, then toss the salad together before serving for the freshest salad. Serve with extra dressing.

    Notes

    Pasta salad absorbs dressing. Serve extra at the table for those who want more, and take extra on a picnic.
    To tame red onion for a pasta salad, rinse the chopped or slice onion in cold water and dry. It really helps, or use shallot (more mild). 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 337kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 8gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gCholesterol: 17mgSodium: 519mgPotassium: 224mgFiber: 2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 567IUVitamin C: 16mgCalcium: 117mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon

    08/09/2024 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    Broccoli bacon salad

    Crunchy broccoli salad is a summer favorite salad that might just get the vegetable non-eaters in your house to enjoy their vegetables. Crisp broccoli, salty bacon, sweet dried cranberries, crunchy nuts and seeds, plus a creamy tangy dressing. It's great for summer lunches and dinners and easily prepped ahead for a fast and cool side dish for summer meals.

    Vivid green broccoli salad with bacon, red onions, raisin, and walnuts in white bowl.

    Broccoli is one of those dependable vegetables that's always around, and here's a way delicious to get more of it into your diet. With great flavors, textures, and colors, this crunchy broccoli salad recipe is a crowd pleaser. Steaming the broccoli briefly makes the broccoli florets more tender than in a raw broccoli salad. If you've never made one, I hope you'll try this easy broccoli salad recipe. It's also called a broccoli crunch salad. 

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • A crunchy vegetable salad is a tasty way to get more veggies into your diet.
    • Easy to prep ahead and enjoy during the week.
    • Nice for summertime served chilled.
    • Great flavors, colors, and textures to make it a hit. 

    For another summer side dish with bacon, try this sweet corn succotash with bacon.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Broccoli salad ingredients

    • Broccoli: Choose heads of fresh broccoli and trim them yourself for the right sized florets. In a hurry, buy bagged florets but results are better if you do it yourself.
    • Bacon: Crispy bacon is a nice counterpart to the crunchy broccoli, or skip for keeping it plant-based.
    • Dried fruit: Provides a nice sweet-tart addition to the salad, choose dried cranberries or raisins.
    • Nuts: Chopped crunchy walnuts give the salad added texture and healthy fat too.
    • Seeds: Pumpkin seeds are packed with nutrition as well as great flavor.
    • Onion: Red onion is standard and adds nice color, but you can swap for shallot or even green onion or chives if preferred.

    Salad dressing ingredients

    • Mayonnaise: Many off-the-shelf brands contain not-so-good ingredients like GMO soy oil. I prefer the soy-free version of this brand for it's light clean flavor. It's egg-free too. Find it in the refrigerated dairy area of your market, or use your favorite brand.
    • Sweetener: Honey or maple syrup add a little sweetness.
    • Vinegar: Apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or white vinegar all work.

    Please see recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper. 

    For a different dressing option, try this coleslaw dressing recipe with horseradish and Dijon mustard.

    Chef's tip: Can I use frozen broccoli for broccoli salad? Fresh is best for this salad as frozen broccoli has a lot of moisture and is not as crisp. If frozen broccoli is the only option, cook it according to package directions until just tender and plunge into an ice bath immediately. When chilled, drain well and proceed with the recipe. The texture may be a little different but the flavors will still be terrific.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Dried fruit: For a lower-sugar option to cranberries or raisins, try Golden Berries. They are lower in sugar with a sweet-tart taste. They are also known as poha berries or pichu berries. Good in crunchy homemade granola too.
    • Nut and seed options: Try cashews, slivered almonds, shelled hemp seeds, pine nuts, or shelled sunflower seeds. Macadamia nuts are delicious too.
    • For vegans and vegetarians: Skip the bacon and use a plant-based (egg-free) mayonnaise.
    • Not a mayonnaise fan? Make the dressing with plain Greek yogurt. 

    For a sweet way to use dried cranberries, make chocolate bark in bite-sized cups.

    Chef's tip on buying broccoli: There can be a lot of waste buying broccoli heads due to the heavy stems. Buying broccoli for these photographs I had 30% waste. If you want to try to use the stems versus toss them (or compost them), peel stems with a vegetable peeler, chop and freeze to use in soups such as this creamy broccoli soup.

    How to Make Crunchy Broccoli Salad

    You need about 3 good sized heads of broccoli as there is waste with the stems. If buying bagged florets, you need a pound.

    Raw broccoli florets in a glass bowl with a green striped towel.
    Step 1: Trim thick broccoli stems and cut the florets into small pieces. You should have 8 cups of florets, about a pound. 
    Bright green steamed broccoli florets in a steaming basket.
    Step 2: Briefly steam the broccoli until crisp tender when pierced with the tip of a sharp paring knife.
    Bright green broccoli in an ice bath bowl of ice and water after steaming.
    Step 3: Shock broccoli ice water to stop the cooking process and keep the florets bright green and crisp. Dry on a clean kitchen towel.
    Mayonnaise, vinegar, and honey in a glass bowl with a stainless steel whisk.
    Step 4: Whisk together mayo, vinegar, and honey in a small bowl for the creamy dressing. 

    While the broccoli is briefly steaming then chilling, start cooking the bacon. Either chop the bacon strips crosswise into pieces before frying or fry the strips whole, then chop or crumble.

    Cooking bacon pieces in a black iron skillet golden brown.
    Step 5: Fry bacon pieces or strips until crisp and browned.
    Draining crisply cooked bacon on paper towels.
    Step 6: Drain bacon on layers of paper towels on a baling sheet or plate.

    Chef's tip on red onions: If you find red onions too strong, after chopping, add them to a small bowl of ice water and soak for a few minutes, then drain and dry before using. This helps to temper the bite of red onions.

    Serving Suggestions

    All of the components for a crunchy broccoli salad are easily prepped ahead and refrigerated until serving time. I do them ahead and package individually, then toss to serve and add the dressing. It's a good meal prep vegetable salad, just package the dressing in small separate containers.

    If you don't think you'll eat the whole batch, dress only what you'll need and refrigerate the rest in an airtight container for up to 4 days.

    Crunchy broccoli salad is great with just about anything such as grilled steaks, burgers, these oven baby back ribs, and grilled lemon chicken.

    Broccoli Bacon Salad in a white bowl for serving.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I make the broccoli tender but still crunchy?

    To keep the broccoli tender but crunchy, steam or boil it briefly then immediately shock it in ice water, drain and dry. Shocking in ice water, also called an ice bath, stops the cooking process and keeps the broccoli crisp and bright green. The culinary technique is called blanching. Watch the timing on cooking the broccoli. It's done when you can just pierce it with the tip of a sharp paring knife. You want it crisp tender, not soft.

    What are some variations of broccoli salad?

    To keep broccoli salad interesting, try these fun ideas. Add small cubes of cheddar cheese, vary the dried fruit swapping raisins for dried cranberries or golden berries, use different nuts and seeds, add grated carrot for color, or finely chopped red bell peppers.

    Can I make a broccoli salad vegan?

    To make a broccoli salad vegan, skip the bacon and use a vegan mayonnaise. Add nuts and seeds for more texture and interest. For more color, add grated carrot or red or orange bell peppers.

    More Great Vegetable Side Dishes

    Versatile, there are so many ways to prepare them. Hot or cold, salads or sides, try some of these side dish recipes to change things up. You might find some new favorites. Check out the vegetable recipes index page for more inspiration.

    • roasted broccoli
      Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon
    • broccoli cabbage slaw
      Broccoli Slaw Recipe with Creamy Apple Cider Dressing
    • Summer vegetable medley
      Easy Sautéed Mixed Vegetables Recipe
    • A bowl of burnished roasted Brussels sprouts glazed with Balsamic.
      Brussels Sprouts with Balsamic Vinegar

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    Let me know if you made this broccoli salad by adding a comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    Originally published in August 2019

    📖 Recipe

    Crunchy Broccoli Bacon Salad

    Sally Cameron
    Crunchy broccoli bacon salad with sweet dried cranberries, crunchy walnuts and pumpkin seeds, plus a creamy dressing. Great for summer lunches and dinners. See notes at end for special dietary needs.
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 3 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 335 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Dressing

    • ¾ cup Vegenaise or mayonnaise
    • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup
    • 2 teaspoons apple cider vinegar white vinegar or red vinegar

    Salad

    • 4 slices bacon
    • 2 heads broccoli crowns about 1 ½ pounds
    • ⅓ cup dried cranberries raisin or goldenberries
    • ¼ cup chopped walnuts
    • 2-3 tablespoons red onion chopped or sliced thin
    • 2 tablespoons pumpkin seeds raw or toasted

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep Ahead Directions (optional)

    • To prep ahead: trim, steam and chill broccoli, refrigerate. Fry the bacon, drain and chop, refrigerate. Chop the onion, refrigerate. Make the dressing and refrigerate. Toss before serving

    To Make and Serve

    • Whisk the dressing ingredients together until smooth in a medium bowl and set aside to toss the salad. Fry the bacon until crisp, drain on paper towels and chop. While the bacon is cooking, start on the broccoli.
    • Fill a large bowl half full with ice and cold water for an ice bath. Trim broccoli florets into bite-sized pieces for 8 cups florets. See post photo for help. Save broccoli stems for another use. In a medium pot add a vegetable steam basket and enough water to come to the bottom of the basket. Cover with a lid and bring to steaming over medium high heat. Add the broccoli and steam for 2 minutes. Immediately remove the broccoli to the ice bath to stop the cooking process and retain the bright green color.
    • To serve, add the bacon, broccoli, and all other ingredients to the bowl with the dressing and toss gently to coat. Serve immediately or refrigerate for an hour before serving. Salad is best dressed and served close to serving time to maintain crispness. Leftovers will hold up to two days well covered but the broccoli will not be as crisp.

    Notes

    Substitutions:

    • Dried fruit: For a lower-sugar option to cranberries or raisins, try Golden Berries. They are much lower in sugar with a pleasant sweet-tart taste. They are also known as poha berries or pichu berries.
    • Nut and seed options: Try cashews, slivered almonds, shelled hemp seeds, pine nuts, or shelled sunflower seeds. Macadamia nuts are delicious too.
    • For vegans: Skip the bacon and use a plant-based mayo such as Vegenaise.
    • For vegetarians: Skip the bacon.
    • Not a mayonnaise fan? Make the dressing with plain Greek yogurt.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 335kcalCarbohydrates: 24gProtein: 8gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 1mgSodium: 229mgPotassium: 696mgFiber: 6gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 1263IUVitamin C: 181mgCalcium: 100mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Boston Baked Beans from Scratch

    06/19/2023 by Sally Cameron 17 Comments

    A gray pot of savory sweet dark brown baked beans with a wooden spoon.

    If you've never made Boston baked beans from scratch, you're in for a treat. Sweet, savory, and packed with rich, smoky flavor from bacon and molasses, this classic American side dish is slow-cooked comfort at its best. It takes time-but most of it is hands-off-and the deep flavor is absolutely worth it. Soak your beans the night before, and get ready for the best baked beans you've ever had. Short on time? I've got a shortcut using canned beans that still delivers fantastic, rich flavor.

    A gray dutch oven filled with deep brown Boston baked beans.

    Making baked beans from scratch takes longer than starting with canned beans, but the work is spread out: soaking, simmering and finally baking. Much of the time is hands off. I think the results are worth it. Nothing beats homemade baked beans from scratch.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Boston Baked Beans Recipe Highlights

    • Classic American side dish - perfect for summer cookouts and BBQ's.
    • Easily made vegetarian - just skip the bacon for a meatless version.
    • Step-by-step instructions - walk you through the process with ease.
    • Canned bean shortcut included - for those days when time is tight.

    For a quick and easy three-bean salad, try this recipe or this summer white bean salad. Both use pantry staple canned beans and are made in minutes.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for Boston baked beans ready to go on the counter.

    I've taken a few liberties with the traditional recipe, like using Dijon mustard versus dry mustard, and adding smoked paprika (it's optional), but what amazing depth of flavor these baked beans have.

    • Dried beans: Use dried beans, not canned (unless you're using the shortcut). Navy beans are the classic for baked beans, but see notes below for options
    • Oil: olive oil is my go-to but avocado oil works fine.
    • Bacon: Use thick sliced bacon (versus traditional salt pork or ham bone).
    • Onion: yellow or brown onions add sweetness, moisture, and flavor.
    • Garlic: adds that savory pungency to soups, stews, and definitely baked beans.
    • Molasses: a must for Boston baked beans! Provides sweetening and a rich, deep color for classic baked beans. I use what is labeled unsulphured molasses but if you read the ingredient list it says blackstrap.
    • Sugar: light brown sugar or use golden monk fruit blend to reduce sugar.
    • Ketchup: I use unsweetened ketchup. Here is my go-to clean ketchup brand.
    • Mustard: dry ground mustard is traditional but I use Dijon.
    • Vinegar: use apple cider vinegar for balancing the sweetness.
    • Paprika: not a traditional ingredient but I like adding smoked paprika (optional).
    • Bay leaf: adds a subtle depth of flavor for pot beans, soups, stews, dried or fresh.

    Additionally: for the simmering phase of the baked beans you need another onion (actually half of one), a celery rib, carrot, bay leaf, thyme sprigs, and garlic cloves for flavoring. This is optional but adds flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for all measurements including salt and black pepper.

    Chef's note on time: Wonder why baked beans need hours in the oven, even when you start with canned beans? It's not about cooking them until tender-the beans are already soft. The long, slow baking time is what develops deep, complex flavor and a rich, glossy sauce. As they bake, the sugars in the molasses and ketchup caramelize, the acidity mellows, and the sauce thickens into that classic, sticky consistency you just can't get on the stovetop. If you have the time, it's worth every minute.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • To substitute dry mustard, use 1 teaspoon instead of 1 tablespoon of Dijon.
    • Dried bean options: Substitute dried Great Northern beans or cranberry beans for navy beans. Another option, try these heirloom bean varieties: Marcella bean, Alubia Blanca, or Yellow Eye bean.
    • Canned bean options: Navy beans, great northerns beans, or borlotti beans (Italian name for cranberry beans).
    • Omit the bacon for vegetarian or vegan Boston baked beans, and use olive oil to saute the onion instead of bacon fat.
    • Add ginger; it's a flavorful addition to baked beans. I use the jarred ginger puree, or use finely grated or zested fresh ginger root. Saute it with the onions.
    • For more of an entree, add browned ground beef or turkey. Chopped cooked chicken sausage is good too.
    • Add a splash of good Balsamic vinegar.

    Chef's Tip: Why soak beans? Soaking hydrates the beans, softens the thick outer skins, helps beans cook more evenly, speeds up the cooking process. Adding kosher salt (which is brining) while soaking improves the flavor further and seasons the beans more evenly. Most beans are better with soaking and brining. Soaking and brining also minimizes burst beans. Here's a good reference article.

    How to Make Boston Baked Beans From Scratch

    Start here if using dried beans

    Rinsed navy beans soaking in water in a clear container with a lid.
    1. Rinse beans in cold water and soak overnight. Use double the water as beans. Add 1 tablespoon of kosher salt per quart of water.
    Soaked small white beans drained in a silver colander.
    1. Drain beans and rinse well, discarding the salty brining water.
    Soaked beans in a pot with aromatics for flavoring, ready to cook.
    1. Add the soaked beans to a large heavy pot like 5 ½ quart Dutch oven with a tight fitting lid. Cover with a few inches of water. Bring to a boil, boil 10 minutes.
    Simmered beans ready for baking in a Dutch. oven
    1. Turn the heat down and simmer beans until tender, about 1 hour. Add hot water from a tea kettle as needed. You want tender beans for baking. Remove the vegetables and drain saving the cooking liquid (bean broth).

    Start here if using canned beans.

    Note: Omit bacon step for vegans or vegetarians and use olive oil to cook onion and garlic.

    Raw bacon cooking in a Dutch oven.

    Step 1: Chop bacon crosswise into pieces and add to the same pot.

    Golden, cooked bacon strips in a heavy pot.

    Step 2: Cook bacon until crisp and golden. Drain the bacon from the fat, reserving the bacon fat.

    Cooking onions in bacon fat in a heavy pot on the stovetop.

    Step 3: Add 2 tablespoons of bacon fat back to the pot. Add chopped onion and cook until soft and golden; add the garlic and cook 1 minute.

    Pouring red ketchup into brown molasses and beans in a pot.

    Step 5: Stir in the paprika, brown sugar and vinegar and stir until sugar is melted.

    Navy beans ready for baking covered in molasses sauce.

    Step 6: Stir in the beans, bacon, cover the pot with the lid and bake beans for approximately 3 hours t 325°F.

    Baked beans after 1 hours of baking with a crust.

    Step 7: Every hour, stir in a little bean broth (or water) when the level is low, as beans cook down and concentrate. Keep them a little juicy.

    Beans finished baking, now a deep rich brown color.

    Step 8: The finished beans, creamy, saucy and richly flavored. Save extra bean broth.

    Chef's Tip: Discard the soaking water or not? There is conflicting advice on which is best. Some reports advise saving and cooking with the soaking water as it contains nutrients and starches. Other reports advise discarding the soaking water and cooking with fresh water to improve digestibility. I recommend discarding soaking water and starting with fresh. It's a must if you add salt to your soaking water (brining).

    A gray pot of savory sweet dark brown baked beans with a wooden spoon.

    How to Quick Soak Dried Beans

    If you forgot to soak your dried beans overnight, use the quick soak method to get them ready for cooking. Rinse the beans well with cold water in a colander discarding any broken beans.

    Place beans in a large heavy pot such as a Dutch Oven and cover with fresh water by several inches. Add a tablespoon of salt. Bring beans to a boil and cook for 2 minutes. Turn off heat, cover the beans and let stand on the stove for 1 hour. Drain and proceed with the recipe.

    Chef's Note: shortcut soaking and simmering steps with a pressure cooker or Instant Pot. Start with un-soaked dried beans and using this time table, pressure cook the beans until tender, then continue with cooking the bacon and baking.

    Serving Boston Baked Beans

    What do you eat with baked beans? They are the perfect side dish for burgers, hot dogs, or my favorite, baby back ribs with homemade sauce. Here are a few side dishes for your summer barbecue menu:

    • Mediterranean potato salad.
    • Fresh homemade coleslaw (light on the mayo).
    • Summer green bean salad with corn and tomatoes.
    • A big green salad.
    • Corn on the cob.

    If Boston baked beans are a bit sweet for you, add a little more apple cider vinegar. If they need a bit more sweetness, add a little New England maple syrup. It's a nice compliment to the molasses and brown sugar in the recipe. 

    A small bowl of deep brown Boston baked beans with a blue checked towel and spoon.

    Re-heating Tips

    If making the beans a day or two ahead, cool the beans (to 70°F minimum) and refrigerate covered. They firm up a lot when they get cold, so they will need a little water to get creamier. Leftover baked beans re-heat well. 

    Oven heating for a whole pot: if needed, stir in a a little saved bean broth or water if you want them juicier and heat in a 325°F oven for approximately 1 hour or until the beans reach a minimum 165°F measured with a digital thermometer. This works well for a whole pot.

    For stovetop heating: stir in a little saved bean broth or water, cover and use low heat, stirring occasionally until hot. Take care that the bottom does not scorch. 

    For microwave heating: portions may also be microwaved, covered, on 70% power.

    Freezing

    If you're going to the effort, consider making the full batch and freezing leftovers in individual portions (like in Souper Cubes). Baked beans freeze beautifully for up to 3 months and reheat well for quick sides on busy nights.

    Recipe FAQs

    What makes Boston baked beans different?

    What makes Boston baked beans different is the use of molasses, according to this historic website. Molasses is a thick, dark brown syrup, a result of the sugar refining process. It adds a rich, sweet depth of flavor and gorgeous color to Boston baked beans. Molasses is why brown sugar is brown in color.

    What kind of beans are Boston baked beans made of?

    The traditional dried bean for Boston baked beans is the navy bean, but other small white beans work as well. Great Northern beans are the perfect swap, but pinto beans, and cranberry beans (borlotti beans) work beautifully.

    Why are my Boston baked beans hard?

    Your beans might be hard no matter how long you've cooked them due to several factors. It could be the beans are old and dried out or were improperly stored. Old beans can mean hard beans.

    If you're concerned about the beans being old, use this bean softening trick; add ¼ teaspoon of baking soda to the soaking water. Don't use too much because you don't want mushy beans.

    It could be the hard or chlorinated water. Use filtered water versus tap water as minerals like calcium can prevent beans from softening. Hard water can make for hard beans. Chlorinated water can also be a culprit.

    More Terrific Summer Side Dish Recipes

    Need more ideas for summer menus? Here are a few for the grill and side dishes too. For more inspiration see the side dishes category. For a mulit-purpose grilling and dipping sauce, try this homemade hoisin sauce (gluten-free too).

    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
    • Bright colored avocado , black bean, and corn salad with tomatoes and jalapenos in a white bowl.
      Avocado Corn and Black Bean Salad
    • White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.
      Easy Coleslaw Recipe and Dressing
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Lemony Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make Boston Beaked Beans from Scratch, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A gray pot of savory sweet dark brown baked beans with a wooden spoon.

    Boston Baked Beans from Scratch

    Sally Cameron
    Start the night ahead by soaking beans or use the Quick Soak method in notes at the end. For a vegetarian or vegan version skip the bacon and saute in olive oil. Don't be overwhelmed by the length of this recipe. It's harder to explain than do! For a shortcut with canned beans see the recipe notes at the end.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 3 hours hrs
    Dried bean soaking (optional) 12 hours hrs
    Total Time 15 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 9 to 10
    Calories 485 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large heavy pot or large Dutch oven 5 ½ quarts with lid
    • Colander

    Ingredients
      

    Basic bean soaking

    • 1 pound dried small white beans such as navy beans see notes below on bean options, for shortcut use 4-15 ounces cans of beans.
    • 1 ½-2 quarts filtered water enough to cover the beans by 4 inches for soaking
    • 1-2 tablespoons kosher salt for brining 1 tablespoon per quart of water

    Bean pre-cooking (aromatics)

    • ½ onion yellow or brown
    • 1 carrot peeled and cut in half crosswise
    • 1 rib celery cut in half crosswise
    • 2 garlic cloves peeled and smashed
    • 1 bay leaf
    • 2 fresh thyme sprigs sub sage leaves or rosemary

    Baked beans

    • 6 ounces thick cut bacon chopped crosswise into strips
    • 1 ½ cups chopped onion, yellow or brown 1 large onion
    • 2-3 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • ⅓ cup light brown sugar or golden monk fruit blend
    • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
    • 2 teaspoons regular or smoked paprika optional
    • 1 ½ teaspoons sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ½ cup unsulphured blackstrap molasses
    • 1 ½ cups unsweetened ketchup
    • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard sub 1 teaspoon dry mustard
    • 1 bay leaf

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Soak the beans (the night ahead)

    • Place dry beans in a colander, rinse well with cold water and remove any broken beans. Place beans in a large container and cover with double the amount of cold water. Add 1 tablespoon of kosher salt per quart of water (brining). Cover beans and refrigerate 12 hours or overnight. Before cooking, drain beans and rinse well. Discard soaking water. To quick soak, see notes below.

    Pre-cook the beans

    • In a large heavy pot such as a 5 ½ quart Dutch Oven, add the soaked, drained beans and enough fresh filtered water to cover by several inches. Bring to a boil, boil 10 minutes, skimming any foam that develops. Turn the heat down to medium-low, add the aromatics and simmer until tender, approximately 1 hour.
      Check the beans occasionally to make sure they are covered with water. As needed, add hot filtered water from a tea kettle. When beans are tender, drain the beans, saving the bean broth, and continue with the recipe.

    Start the beans

    • Pre-heat the oven to 325°F degrees. Fry the chopped bacon in the same pot until crisp and browned. Remove bacon to paper towels reserving the bacon fat. Add 2 tablespoons bacon fat back to the pan and cook the onion until soft and lightly golden, 8-10 minutes, over medium-low heat. Add garlic and cook another minute.
    • Add the brown sugar, vinegar, salt, pepper and paprika and stir until sugar is melted. Stir in the molasses, then the ketchup and mustard until smooth.
      Gently fold in the beans until coated. Add the bay leaf and bacon. Top the pot with the lid.

    Bake the beans

    • Bake for 3 hours, checking each hour and adding a little of the reserved bean broth or water if needed. At 2 ½ hours test beans for doneness. If they are not totally tender, bake for another 30 minutes. When beans are done, save and refrigerate 2 cups of extra bean broth for re-heating, to make the beans juicier if needed.

    Serving and Storing

    • Serve baked beans hot or warm and re-heat well if you have leftovers, and will keep up to 4 days in the refrigerator. Extra freezes well in an airtight container for up to 3 months.

    Notes

    Dried beans that work for baked beans: Navy Beans, Great Northern Beans, Cranberry Beans, pinto beans and heirloom dried beans such as Ayocote Blanco, Alubia Blanca beans or Yellow Eye Beans.
    To quick soak beans, rinse dried beans with cold water in a colander and check for any broken beans or debris. Place beans in a large heavy pot such as a Dutch Oven and cover with fresh water by several inches. Bring beans to a boil and cook for 1-2 minutes. Turn off heat, cover the beans and let stand on the stove for 1 hour. Drain and proceed with the recipe.
    Canned beans shortcut:
    To save time, swap the dried beans for 4 -15-ounce cans of beans, drained and rinsed. Use navy beans, great northern, or borlotti. Add them to the pot at the step where the cooked beans go in the full recipe. Bake uncovered at 325°F for about 1 hour, stirring occasionally. Check for consistency and flavor—add a splash of liquid if they look dry, or bake a little longer to thicken if needed.
    Yield Note:
    This recipe makes a generous batch—about 9 to 10 servings—using 1 pound of dried beans. It’s perfect for parties, BBQs, or meal prep. You can easily cut the recipe in half if you're cooking for a smaller group.
    Freezer Tip:
    If you’re going to the effort, consider making the full batch and freezing leftovers in individual portions. Baked beans freeze beautifully for up to 3 months and reheat well for quick sides on busy nights.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 485kcalCarbohydrates: 83gProtein: 17gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.03gCholesterol: 12mgSodium: 3727mgPotassium: 1268mgFiber: 16gSugar: 29gVitamin A: 1398IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 193mgIron: 5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten-Free Banana Muffins (Dairy-Free)

    04/24/2025 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    Banana muffins studded with mini chocolate chips wrapped in muffin papers.

    These gluten-free banana muffins are tender, moist, and full of real banana flavor-everything you want in a great banana muffin. They're also naturally dairy-free, and you can add chocolate chips (as pictured) or keep them classic. Blend the bananas for an extra-smooth batter, then stir everything together by hand in one bowl. They're quick to make, bake up fast, and freeze beautifully.

    Banana chocolate chip muffins on a small plate with muffins in tulip paper wraps behind.

    Whether you're baking for weekday breakfasts, lunchbox treats, or stocking the freezer, these moist gluten-free banana muffins are a delight-sweet but not too sweet, light yet satisfying. Blending the bananas in a blender makes prep easier than using mashed bananas, and they freeze beautifully for make-ahead convenience

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Gluten-Free Banana Muffins

    • Easy breakfast or snack - Perfect with coffee or on the go.
    • Great for special diets - Naturally gluten-free and dairy-free.
    • Freezer-friendly - Bake once, stash extras for busy mornings.

    For more gluten-free muffins, try these tender carrot cake muffins (dairy-free too).

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for chocolate chip banana muffins on a marble counter.
    • Gluten-free flour blend - I use King Arthur Measure for Measure; xanthan included. Other GF blends will probably work, I just have not tested them. For GF blends that have no xanthan gum, add ¼ teaspoon.
    • Baking soda - Leavening agent, helps muffins rise and brown.
    • Baking powder - Leavening agent, aluminum-free for clean taste; for a lighter, fluffier crumb.
    • Ripe bananas - Ripe bananas with brown spots add natural sweetness, moisture.
    • Golden brown sugar - Adds rich flavor and keeps the muffins soft and tender.
    • Eggs - Bind the batter and provide structure.
    • Vanilla extract - Rounds out the flavors, pairs perfectly with banana and chocolate.
    • Melted coconut oil - For moist, dairy-free muffins; avocado oil is a good substitute.
    • Mini chocolate chips (optional) - Add sweetness in every bite and distribute evenly; use dairy-free if needed, and semisweet or dark chocolate.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and sea salt.

    Need another muffin recipe? Try these GF zucchini muffins!

    Chef's tip on how to ripen yellow bananas: Place bananas in a paper bag with an apple, another ripe banana, or an almost ripe avocado, and loosely fold the top. The ethylene gas speeds ripening more naturally.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use flax egg if you're egg sensitive.
    • To reduce sugar and net carbs, use golden monk fruit/allulose blend (this is usually how I bake them and they are terrific).

    For an easy chocolate chip meringue cookie, try these old fashioned Forgotten Cookies.

    Chef's tip on choosing bananas: Use ripe bananas that yield to gentle pressure and have plenty of brown spots. It does make a difference in banana muffins, as I've tested for banana ripeness. The riper they are, the sweeter and more flavorful your muffins will be. Just don't go too far-overripe bananas that are completely black and totally squishy can make the batter too wet and affect the texture.

    How to Make Gluten-Free Banana Muffins

    Pre-heat oven to 350°F and line a muffin pan with paper liners or spray them with avocado oil. I used these cute tulip cupcake paper liners that give the muffins a bakery look.

    Photos showing the first four steps of making chocolate chip banana muffins.
    1. Add bananas, brown sugar, eggs, vanilla, oil to a blender.
    2. Puree briefly until smooth on low to medium speed.
    3. Whisk dry ingredients until blended.
    4. Pour wet ingredients into dry and stir banana mixture until smooth with a flexible spatula. Fold in chocolate chips. Rest batter 15 minutes.
    Chocolate chip banana muffin batter portioned into baking cups.
    Muffins finished baking and cooling on a wire rack on the counter.

    5. Portion banana muffin batter into paper baking cups, using a ¼ cup measure or a #16 disher/scooper. Sprinkle extra chips on top if desired.

    6. Bake muffins for 25-28 minutes until a toothpick or cake tester comes out clean. Remove to a wire rack and allow to cool.

    Chef's tip: rest your gluten-free batter. Resting gluten-free muffin batter for 15-20 minutes before baking gives the flours-especially rice flour, sorghum, or other whole-grain and starch-based blends-time to fully hydrate. This improves texture, reduces grittiness, and helps create a more tender, cohesive crumb. It's worth the extra few minutes.

    Serving Suggestions

    Gluten-free banana muffins are great for a quick breakfast on the go or a morning or afternoon snack. Pack a couple for travel or a lunchbox. These muffins are nice with coffee or tea, spread with a little almond butter for extra protein. Of course sweet butter or coconut butter is good too!

    For storing and freezing, see the recipe card notes.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make these muffins without eggs?

    For egg-free banana muffins try an egg replacer. Texture may be slightly different. For chia eggs, use 1 T chia + 2 T water per egg and let stand to gell for 10-15 minutes. For flax eggs, use 1 T ground flax meal with 3 T warm water per eggs, let it stand 5-15 minutes.

    Can I make banana muffins with no added sugar?

    Yes, for no sugar banana muffins, use golden monk fruit/allulose blend instead of brown sugar.

    Can I use regular-sized chocolate chips?

    Yes, though mini chips distribute more evenly. Use what you prefer.

    More Baking Recipe

    Love to bake? Try some of these easy baking recipes that taste so good no one will ever know they are gluten-free. Have extra chocolate chips? Make a batch of the peanut butter oatmeal protein balls, a no-bake recipe.

    • A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.
      Gluten Free Cornbread (no flour)
    • A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.
      Easy Gluten-Free Pumpkin Bread Recipe
    • Gluten Free Strawberry Muffins
    • Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.
      Fudgy Gluten-Free Chocolate Brownies

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these gluten-free banana muffins, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. They really help other readers. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating!

    📖 Recipe

    Banana muffins studded with mini chocolate chips wrapped in muffin papers.

    Gluten-free Banana Muffins (Dairy-Free Option)

    Sally Cameron
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Course Breakfast, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12
    Calories 301 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender
    • Medium mixing bowl
    • Standard size muffin pan

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ cups + 2 tablespoons gluten-free flour blend 8 ounces King Arthur Measure for Measure
    • 1 ¼ teaspoons baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder aluminum free
    • ¼ teaspoon fine sea salt
    • 3-4 ripe bananas 1 ½ pounds
    • 2 large eggs
    • ⅔ cup golden brown sugar OR golden brown monk fruit blend
    • ½ cup neutral healthy oil (not vegetable oil, note below) or melted coconut oil
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract

    Options

    • ½ cup mini chocolate chips plus extra for top if desired

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Start here

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. Line a muffin pan with paper liners or skip the paper liners and spray with avocado oil.

    Mix dry ingredients

    • Add the flour, baking soda, baking power, and salt together in a medium mixing bowl and whisk to blend.

    Mix the wet ingredients

    • Add the bananas, eggs, sugar, oil, and vanilla to a blender, and briefly blend on low to medium speed just until smooth (15 seconds). Do not over-blend.
      Add the wet mix to the dry ingredients in the bowl and fold together with a flexible spatula until smooth, then blend in the chocolate chips if using.
      Rest the batter to rehydrate for 15-20 minutes.

    Portion muffins

    • Portion the muffin batter between the wells of a 12-cup muffin pan. For equal portions use #16 disher/scooper or a ¼ cup measure. Sprinkle extra chocolate chips on top if desired.

    Bake muffins

    • Bake muffins until they are light golden brown on top and a toothpick or cake tester come out clean or with few moist crumbs when inserted into the center of a muffin, 26-28 minutes. They should feel firm on top with little give. Ovens vary so go by the toothpick test.
      Cool muffins a few minutes in the pan then remove to a wire cooling rack.

    Notes

    Storing and Freezing

    Muffins store on the kitchen counter in an airtight container or zip bag for up to 4 days. Freeze leftover muffins for up to 2 months. Thaw at room temp or warm gently before enjoying.
    Healthy oil
    If you have standard vegetable oil in your pantry, toss it. I use this healthy vegetable oil replacement all of the time! You have to order it online but it is worth it. 

    Substitutions

    • Skip the chocolate chips for simple gluten-free banana muffins.
    • If your GF flour does not contain xanthan gum, add ¼ teaspoon.
    • To reduce the carbs and sugar, use golden monk fruit/allulose blend. Carbs per muffin is then 28 grams - 4 grams of fiber = 24 grams net carbs. They taste the same and know one will know the difference, it's how I usually make them. 

      Egg Sensitivities

      • For a flax egg:  1 T flax seeds + 3 T water blend in blender 1 minute. For a chia egg, 1 T chia + ⅓ cup water, let stand 15 minutes. For the two eggs, double these quantities, then add to the blend where you would add the eggs.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1Calories: 301kcalCarbohydrates: 45gProtein: 5gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 32mgSodium: 218mgPotassium: 134mgFiber: 4gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 81IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 63mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
      A batch of chocolate chip banana muffins in tulip baking papers on a cooling rack.

      Garlic Roasted Tomatoes with Thyme

      09/08/2023 by Sally Cameron 12 Comments

      A white bowl of red and gold roasted cherry tomatoes with fresh thyme leaves.

      Sweet, jammy, and full of rich, garlicky flavor, these easy garlic roasted tomatoes with thyme are a summer staple. Just toss cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes with olive oil, garlic, and herbs, then roast until caramelized and bursting with flavor. Ready in about 30 minutes, they're incredibly versatile-perfect for tossing with pasta, piling on toast, or spooning over grilled meats. Once you make a batch, you'll want them on hand all season long. Scroll down for 10 delicious ways to use them.

      A bowl of colorful oven roasted tomatoes with thyme leaves and golden crostini.

      Roasting transforms tomatoes from bright and juicy to deep, jammy, and intensely flavorful. The heat concentrates their natural sweetness, while garlic, olive oil, and plenty of fresh thyme infuse every bite with rich, savory depth. It's one of the simplest-and most delicious-ways to use sweet summer tomatoes, and once you try garlic roasted tomatoes you'll never look at raw tomatoes the same way again.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Perfect for tomato season - A simple way to use cherry or grape tomatoes at their peak.
      • Big flavor, minimal effort - Just olive oil, garlic, and herbs.
      • Versatile - Toss with pasta, spoon over toast, add to bowls or salads.
      • Freezer-friendly - Make a big batch and save some for winter.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Simple ingredients for simply fantastic flavor-filled garlic roasted tomatoes.

      Ingredients for roasted cherry tomatoes on the counter in glass bowls.
      • Tomatoes - Cherry and grape tomatoes are ideal for roasting; they caramelize beautifully and hold their shape. Roma (plum) tomatoes work too, but may require a longer roast time. Always choose ripe tomatoes for the best flavor.
      • Olive Oil - Use a good-quality, fruity extra virgin olive oil to coat the tomatoes and help them roast evenly.
      • Garlic - Fresh garlic cloves are best. Use a microplane to grate the garlic finely so it melts into the mixture without any sharp bites.
      • Herbs - Fresh thyme is my go-to, but rosemary works well too.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper.

      For more tomato recipes try this roasted tomato sauce or this tomato chutney recipe.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For a South of France twist, add a teaspoon of dried Herbs de Provence to the mix.
      • No fresh herbs? Use ⅓ the amount of dried herbs, or about 2 teaspoons. Add the dried herbs to the olive oil and let them stand for a bit to soften and rehydrate before mixing.
      • Use mixed colored tomatoes like yellow, red, orange, and purple.

      Recipe Instructions

      Line a half sheet baking tray with parchment or foil to start, then prep your ingredients. Note: smaller tomatoes roast faster so watch your timing.

      Cutting cherry tomatoes in half for roasting on cutting board.
      Step 1: Halve the tomatoes.
      Chopping fresh thyme leaves on a cutting board.
      Step 2: Chop the thyme leaves.
      Zesting garlic fine into a bowl of cherry tomatoes for roasting.
      Step 3: Add thyme, finely chop or zest garlic, add oil, salt.
      A glass bowl filled with colorful cherry tomatoes tossed with herbs and garlic.
      Step 4: Mix gently.
      A baking tray of fresh cherry tomatoes ready for the oven.
      Step 5: Arrange tomatoes cut side up on aluminum foil or parchment paper lined sheet pan in a single layer and roast.
      Cherry tomatoes after roasting on baking tray, browned and jammy.

      Chef's Tip: Baking parchment paper is an indispensable kitchen tool. Find it at the grocery store in rolls or buy packages of pre-cut sheets at cooking stores and online. Use the heavier rolled parchment for making chicken baked in parchment and the thinner pre-cut sheets to line baking sheets for recipe such as these roasted cherry tomatoes.

      10 Ways to Use Garlic Roasted Tomatoes

      What dishes can I use garlic roasted tomatoes in? Here are 10 things to do:

      • Top roasted halibut or any grilled fish for a rich, savory finish
      • Add flavor to boneless, skinless chicken breasts with a spoonful on top
      • Stir into risotto or quinoa for a burst of color and richness
      • Stuff into portobello mushrooms with goat cheese for a meatless main or appetizer
      • Spread on toasted baguette with soft goat cheese and finish with balsamic or Parmesan
      • Toss with pasta and zucchini noodles for an easy, elegant meal
      • Spoon into omelets or use as an omelet filling for a savory upgrade
      • Top green beans or roasted asparagus with a few spoonfuls for a colorful side
      • Use as a pizza topping with mozzarella and fresh basil
      • Swap them for bell peppers in this summer corn succotash recipe.

      Garlic roasted tomatoes will last a week in the refrigerator in an airtight container or freeze in a flat layer in a freezer bag with the air pressed out. Be sure to label and date.

      Zucchini noodles with roasted tomatoes in a bowl.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I roast different types of tomatoes?

      Yes, you can roast different types of tomatoes. Choose tomatoes that are of uniform size for even roasting. The larger the tomatoes and the juicier they are, the longer it will take. Cherry tomatoes and grape tomatoes work very well.

      What's the best temperature and cooking time for garlic roasted tomatoes?

      I've found that the best temperature for oven roasted tomatoes is between 375°F and 400°F. Factors in timing include the size of the tomatoes, the juiciness of the tomatoes, and whether you are using convection mode or standard mode in your oven. Check them as they roast and follow your nose. When you smell them they are likely done or close to being done. Check them at 20 minutes (for cherry and grape varieties) and go from there depending on how jammy you want the tomatoes.

      What dishes can I use garlic roasted tomatoes in?

      Here are 10 ways to use oven roasted tomatoes. 1) Toss with pasta 2) Fold into and omelet or serve with scrambled eggs 3) Stuff portobello mushroom caps (sans gills) with goat cheese and oven roasted tomatoes 4) Serve over roasted or grilled vegetables such as asparagus or zucchini 5) Stir into Risotto or rice 6) Spread on crisp crostini as an appetizer 7) Top a pizza 8) Top baked or roasted fish like salmon, halibut or cod. 9) Give delicious life to plain boneless skinless chicken breasts 10) Swap them for fresh tomatoes in many dishes for more depth of tomato flavor.

      What's the difference between oven roasted tomatoes and dried tomatoes?

      The short answer is temperature and timing. Oven roasted tomatoes are usually baked at temperatures between 375°F - 400°F for around 25 minutes depending on the size of the tomatoes. Oven-dried tomatoes are baked or dried at a very low temperatures such as 250°F for much longer times, often a couple of hours. And the results are different too; different texture and flavor. Both delicious and super usable in tons of recipes.

      More Easy Summer Recipes

      While summer is still here, try these terrific summer recipes or check out the Labor Day recipe ideas category.

      • Golden brown chicken on a rotisserie grill with silver meat forks.
        Rotisserie Chicken on a Grill
      • A sour cream and honey fruit dip surrounded by fresh fruit on an oval platter.
        5-Minute Fruit Dip
      • Tomato and cucumber salad, with red onion, feta, and garbanzo beans with greek dressing.
        Cucumber Tomato and Feta Salad (Greek Salad)
      • A glass bowl of strawberry cheesecake ice cream with strawberry sauce and buttered graham crumbles.
        Strawberry Cheesecake Ice Cream

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make garlic roasted tomatoes, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A white bowl of red and gold roasted cherry tomatoes with fresh thyme leaves.

      Garlic Roasted Tomatoes

      Sally Cameron
      While cherry tomatoes are at their summer peak, roast some with herbs, garlic and olive oil. See recipe notes for the many ways to use them. Servings vary with how you are using them.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 25 minutes mins
      Total Time 35 minutes mins
      Course Appetizer, condiment, Side Dish
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6
      Calories 45 kcal

      Equipment

      • Half sheet baking pan
      • Parchment paper or use foil

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ½ pounds organic sweet cherry or grape tomatoes halved
      • 1 tablespoon olive oil
      • 2-3 large garlic cloves finely chopped
      • 2 tablespoons fresh chopped thyme leaves
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
      • 2 pinches fresh black pepper

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Pre-heat oven to 400 degrees. Cover a rimmed baking sheet with parchment or foil. Toss halved tomatoes with oil, garlic, thyme, salt and pepper. Spread tomatoes on the baking sheet cut side up and roast for about 25 minutes until shriveled and edges are just starting to turn a bit brown.
        Timing will depend on your oven, how juicy the tomatoes are, and whether you use convection mode or standard mode. Follow your nose; when you smell them they are probably done. If your tomatoes are super juicy it will likely take longer (so be patient).
      • Serve warm, room temperature, or cool. They will keep a week in the refrigerator.

      Notes

      For a South-of-France flavor, add a teaspoon of Herbs de Provence. It's a classic French blend that includes French thyme, savory, fennel, rosemary, marjoram, basil, lavender and tarragon. Find it at most markets or herb and spice stores. 
      How to Use Roasted Tomatoes
      • Serve with crostini alone or spread with soft goat cheese.
      • Stuff portobello mushrooms. 
      • Top a pizza.
      • Toss with pasta.
      • Fill an omelet or serve beside scrambled eggs.
      • Fold into risotto or rice.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 45kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 1gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 0.4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gSodium: 110mgPotassium: 265mgFiber: 1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 665IUVitamin C: 30mgCalcium: 24mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake

      05/06/2025 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

      A piece of golden baked breakfast casserole with eggs on a plate with a fork and dollop of sour cream on top.

      Hearty, savory, and packed with protein, this naturally gluten-free Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake is everything you want in a make-ahead morning meal. Eggs, cottage cheese, quinoa, broccoli, mushrooms, and Parmesan come together for an easy breakfast bake that's perfect for brunch, a holiday breakfast, or breakfast-for-dinner. Assemble the night before, bake in the morning if desired.

      A golden baked breakfast casserole with eggs, mushrooms, broccoli, and quinoa in a white baking dish.

      If you're looking for an easy, hearty cottage cheese egg bake recipe, here you go. Eggs, cottage cheese, quinoa, and sautéed veggies get the day started right. Serve it up with fresh fruit or berries, and some good hot coffee or tea.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake Recipe Highlights

      • Easy to prep ahead and bake in the morning.
      • Something more special for a holiday or weekend breakfast.
      • Gluten-free, high protein, and low carb to keep you going.
      • Think of it like a crustless quiche.

      For a hearty side dish, try these air fryer red potatoes. You can make them in the oven too.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for a breakfast egg casserole in prep bowls on the counter with mushrooms, broccoli, and quinoa.
      • Butter - I use unsalted butter to control the salt in the recipe.
      • Onion - Yellow, white, or brown onions all work well.
      • Herbs - Fresh Italian (flat-leaf) parsley adds flavor, and fresh or dried thyme.
      • Garlic - Adds depth and savory aroma, use garlic powder or fresh.
      • Quinoa - Use white quinoa or tri-color quinoa; cook and cool before using.
      • Mushrooms - White or brown mushrooms (like cremini) both work.
      • Broccoli - Use fresh broccoli crowns and trim into small florets.
      • Eggs - Large eggs, preferably at room temperature.
      • Red pepper flakes - Optional, for a touch of heat.
      • Cottage cheese - Full-fat offers more flavor, but low-fat also works.
      • Parmesan cheese - Adds nutty, salty richness to the casserole.

      Please see the recipe card for the complete recipe, measurements, salt and pepper.  

      For another easy, eggy, breakfast option, make this ham and cheese frittata.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Dairy-free option - There are some plant-based cottage cheese alternatives on the market, but since I haven't tested them in this recipe, I can't guarantee the results. If you try one, let me know how it turns out. And use a vegan Parmesan-style cheese.
      • Cheeses - Try buttery grated Monterey Jack, grated cheddar cheese, or gruyere.
      • Add meat - Stir in up to ½ cup of browned and crumbled pork sausage, chicken sausage for extra flavor. It's a great way to add a savory note.

      These buttery baby dutch yellow potatoes are another good side dish for a bigger meal.

      How to Make a Cottage Cheese Egg Bake

      This cottage cheese and egg bake can be made the night ahead, covered with plastic wrap, refrigerated, and baked the next morning if desired.

      Cook and cool the quinoa ahead of time. Spray your baking dish with cooking spray. Pre-heat the oven to 350°F if baking right away.

      White onions sauteeing a a black steel pan.
      1. Saute the onions in butter until soft. Add the to the casserole dish.
      Nicely browned sauteed mushrooms in a stainless steel pan.
      1. Saute mushrooms in butter until browned and moisture is mostly gone.
      Bright green broccoli florets in a steamer basket.
      1. Steam broccoli florets until tender, 2-3 minutes.
      Cooked chopped broccoli on a black cutting board.
      1. Chopped the cooked broccoli
      A white baking dish filled with broccoli, mushroom, quinoa, and herbs for a breakfast casserole.
      1. Add the veggies, quinoa, and herbs to the dish and mix together.
      Egg, cottage cheese, and parmesan cheese in a blender ocntainer.
      1. Briefly blend the cottage cheese, eggs, half of the parmesan, salt & pepper on low (NOT on high as it whips in too much air).
      Gluten free breakfast casserole ready to bake in the oven.

      7. Pour the egg mixture over the veggies. Sprinkle rest of the parmesan on top evenly.

      Golden baked breakfast egg casserole done and cooling on the stovetop.

      8. Bake the egg casserole at 350°F on the middle rack of the oven for 45-50 minutes until light golden and firm to the touch.

      Serving Suggestions

      Allow the the egg bake to cool a few minutes, then slice into individual pieces.

      To finish off your menu, add some berries, sliced melon or a fresh fruit salad. A little crisp bacon on the side is nice if your family loves bacon. If you're serving more for brunch, lunch, or even dinner, add a tossed green salad.

      Garnish with a dollop of sour cream, chopped parsley, or chopped green onions if desired or more parmesan.

      A piece of gluten free breakfast baked egg casserole on a white plate with a silver fork.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I swap the cottage cheese for another cheese?


      You can use ricotta cheese for a similar texture, or use more shredded cheese if you prefer. Just note it may change the protein content and texture slightly.

      Is it vegetarian?

      Yes, if you use vegetarian-friendly Parmesan or omit it. Always check cheese labels if you're cooking for strict vegetarians. Otherwise, regular parmesan may be fine.

      Can I add meat to this casserole?


      Absolutely-cooked crumbled bacon, finely chopped leftover ham, or cooked, drained, chopped sausage all work well. Try Italian sausage, turkey sausage, maple sausage, or even a mild breakfast sausage for different flavor profiles. Just chop and mix in with the vegetables, but don't overdo the quantities. Use no more than ½ cup. I like using fully cooked sausage-it's easy to dice and stir in without extra prep.

      Can I make this casserole ahead of time?

      Yes! Assemble it the night before, cover and refrigerate. Let it sit at room temp for 30-45 minutes before baking in the morning. It works great.

      More Delicious Breakfast Recipes

      Here are more great recipe ideas for terrific breakfasts. And if you need something quick and healthy, check out the smoothies recipes.

      • Stacked buckwheat pancakes on a white plate with syrup and blueberries.
        The Best Buckwheat Pancakes Recipe
      • Colorful fresh fruit salad with seasonal fruit, great for breakfast and brunch.
        Healthy Fruit Salad Recipe
      • Dutch baby oven pancakes
        Gluten-Free Dutch Baby (German Pancakes)
      • Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.
        Gluten Free Waffles (Crisp & Golden)

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this gluten free breakfast casserole, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      This recipe was originally published 4/3 2017 and if you are looking for that recipe version, comment and I will send it to you.

      📖 Recipe

      A piece of golden baked breakfast casserole with eggs on a plate with a fork and dollop of sour cream on top.

      Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake

      Sally Cameron
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 25 minutes mins
      Cook Time 50 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
      Course Breakfast, Brunch
      Servings 6
      Calories 267 kcal

      Equipment

      • 8x8 baking dish

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ½ tablespoons unsalted butter
      • 1 cup chopped onion half a medium
      • ¾ teaspoon dried thyme
      • 1 ½ cups small broccoli florets about 4 ounces
      • 8 ounces mushrooms stemmed and sliced thin
      • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh Italian parsley
      • ½ teaspoon garlic powder or 2 fresh cloves finely chopped
      • ¾ cup cooked and cooled quinoa
      • 10 large eggs
      • ⅔ cup cottage cheese
      • ⅔ cup finely grated parmesan cheese divided use
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Prepare the dish

      • Lightly spray an 8x8-inch glass or ceramic baking dish with nonstick spray. Sprinkle the cooked quinoa evenly over the bottom.

      Sauté aromatics

      • In a large (12-inch) skillet over medium-low heat, melt ½ tablespoon of butter. Add the onion and sauté until softened, about 3 minutes. Stir in the garlic and thyme, cook for 1 minute more. Transfer the mixture to the baking dish.

      Cook the mushrooms

      • Add the remaining 1 tablespoon of butter to the skillet. Add the mushrooms and cook until browned and most of the moisture has evaporated. Add to the baking dish.

      Add broccoli and herbs

      • Steam the broccoli florets until just tender, 2-3 minutes, then chop them small. Add to the baking dish along with the chopped parsley. Stir to evenly combine all the vegetables.

      Blend the egg mixture

      • In a blender, puree the cottage cheese with 2 of the eggs on low speed a few seconds until smooth. Add the remaining eggs and blend briefly on low speed to combine-just until smooth. Avoid blending on high speed to prevent whipping too much air into the mixture.

      Assemble the casserole

      • Stir ⅓ cup of the Parmesan cheese into the egg mixture, then pour the mixture over the vegetables in the baking dish. Sprinkle the remaining ⅓ cup of Parmesan evenly over the top.

      Bake and serve

      • To serve right away: Bake at 350°F for about 50 minutes, until the top is golden brown and the casserole feels firm to the touch. Let cool slightly before slicing and serving.
        To make ahead: Cover the unbaked casserole with plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight. In the morning, remove it from the fridge 30–45 minutes before baking. Bake as directed above.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 267kcalCarbohydrates: 12gProtein: 20gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 329mgSodium: 578mgPotassium: 433mgFiber: 2gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 938IUVitamin C: 25mgCalcium: 224mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Homemade Everything But the Bagel Seasoning

      04/28/2025 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      Small bowl of homemade everything but the bagel seasoning with seeds, garlic, and onion.

      This easy DIY everything but the bagel seasoning skips the salt but keeps all the savory crunch you love. Made with sesame seeds, poppy seeds, dried garlic and onion, it's endlessly versatile and perfect for sprinkling over eggs, avocado toast, hummus, salads, or roasted veggies. Salt separately to your taste or skip for no salt, and check out the fun variations!

      A small white bowl filled with homemade everything bagels seasoning and a white spoon.

      I love making my own seasoning blends-it gives me full control over the ingredients and makes it easy to customize with fun variations. Whether you want to skip the salt, add a little spice, or try something new like chia seeds or citrus zest, homemade blends are the way to go. And that includes everything but the bagel seasoning! Skip Trader Joe's and make your own.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Small glass prep bowls with seeds, minced garlic and onion to make everything bagel seasoning.
      • Sesame seeds - A mix of white and black sesame seeds adds color and classic nutty crunch. Use raw, not toasted, unless you want a deeper flavor.
      • Poppy seeds - Tiny but bold, poppy seeds add that signature texture and a mild nuttiness.
      • Dried minced garlic - Adds bold, savory flavor with satisfying crunch. Don't substitute with garlic powder here.
      • Dried minced onion - Slightly sweet and aromatic, this adds a key layer of flavor. Also labeled onion flakes.
      • Chia seeds (optional) - For extra crunch and visual interest, chia seeds blend in well without altering the flavor. Not traditional but delicious.
      • Salt (optional) - If adding, use a flakey sea salt or kosher salt, or coarse sea salt for the texture.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt.

      Substitutions and Variations

      Want a bagel blend with a bit more interest? Try these variations to take it to the next level:

      • Sesame seeds - Use all white or all black depending on what you have.
      • Want spice? Add crushed red pepper flakes, Aleppo pepper for heat, or Urfa chili pepper for an earthy smoky addition.
      • Toasty version - Lightly toast the sesame seeds before mixing for a deeper, nuttier flavor.
      • Citrusy twist - Add a pinch of dried lemon zest or sumac.
      • Love fennel? Add fennel seeds.
      • Nigella seeds - Has a lightly oniony, nutty taste that fits well into the flavor profile alongside sesame seeds, poppy seeds, dried garlic, and dried onion.

      Chef's tip: Leaving out the salt allows you to control the final seasoning of your dish. Salt separately to match the recipe or dietary needs, or add a little salt to the everything bagel recipe.

      How to Make Everything Bagel Seasoning

      1. Combine all ingredients in a small bowl.
      2. Stir or shake to mix well.
      3. Store in an airtight jar or spice container for up to 3 months at a cool room temperature. 

      Serving Suggestions

      Here are a few of my favorite ways of using everything but the bagel seasoning:

      • Sprinkle over avocado toast, cottage cheese, or scrambled eggs.
      • Stir into Greek yogurt or sour cream for an easy dip or spread.
      • Use as a seasoning for sesame crusted salmon or chicken before baking.
      • Toss with roasted vegetables (great over asparagus and broccoli).
      • Mix into sautéed greens (like spinach) for crunch.
      • Sprinkle on salads, grain bowls, or even over hummus.
      • Use to top homemade crackers, flatbreads, or baked rolls.
      • Add a pinch to cream cheese and smoked salmon on a rice cake or bagel alternative.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make everything bagel seasoning without salt?

      Yes! This version is salt-free so you can control the seasoning in your final dish. Add salt to taste when using it or stir in coarse salt if you want a salted batch.

      Can I use garlic or onion powder instead of minced or flaked?

      You can, but the texture and flavor won't be the same. Powdered versions blend in rather than stay crunchy and visible.

      What's the best salt to use if I want to add some?

      Use coarse kosher salt or flaky sea salt. Fine salt tends to settle and clump, while coarse salts mix better and give more texture.

      More Recipes with Homemade Seasoning

      Whether it's a simple taco seasoning, a blackening seasoning, an all purpose bbq dry rub, or a brine for turkey, check out these recipes for homemade seasonings (with more recipe to come).

      • Homemade taco seasoning blend in a glass jar.
        Homemade Taco Seasoning Mix and Ways to Use It
      • Crusty topped blackened fish filet on top of coleslaw in a gray bowl.
        Blackened Mahi Mahi (Air Fryer Recipe)
      • Savory dry rub for grilling with spices and a little brown sugar.
        Homemade BBQ Spice Rub
      • A brining bag with a whole turkey inside with herb rub on a cutting board.
        How to Dry Brine Turkey Tutorial

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this everything bagel recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers

      📖 Recipe

      Small bowl of homemade everything but the bagel seasoning with seeds, garlic, and onion.

      Everything Bagel Recipe

      Sally Cameron
      Everything bagel is good on just about everything! So easy to make at home and oyu control the ingredients, including salt - no salt or as much as you prefer.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Total Time 5 minutes mins
      Course condiment, Seasoning
      Cuisine American
      Servings 18 Yield ¾ cup

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 tablespoons raw white sesame seeds
      • 2 tablespoons raw black sesame seeds
      • 2 tablespoons poppy seeds
      • 2 tablespoons minced garlic/garlic flakes
      • 2 tablespoons minced onion/onion flakes
      • 2 tablespoons chia seeds black or white, optional
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt optional

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Add everything to a glass jar, add a tight lid and shake well.
        Store in a cool dark place for up to 6 months for the best flavor and freshness.

      Notes

      Ways to use

      • Sprinkle in cottage cheese and over roasted vegetables, in salads. 
      • Add to a toasted bagel or toasted bread smeared with cream cheese.
      • Use to top avocado toast for flavor, color and texture.

      Variations

      • Sesame seeds: Use all white or all black depending on what you have.
      • Want spice? Add crushed red pepper flakes, Aleppo pepper for heat, or Urfa chili pepper for an earthy smoky addition..
      • Toasty version: Lightly toast the sesame seeds before mixing for a deeper, nuttier flavor.
      • Citrusy twist: Add a pinch of dried lemon zest or sumac.
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Pistachio Crusted Pork Rib Roast

      04/04/2025 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

      A golden crusted pork rib roast on a gray platter with fresh green parsley.

      Looking for a main dish that's easy to make but impressive enough for a special occasion? This oven-roasted pork rib roast checks all the boxes. Juicy and flavorful, it features a bone-in cut with a golden crust of pistachios, garlic, and herbs-perfect for a holiday or any time you want to serve something special. It's easy to do! Let me show you how.

      Golden crusted bone-in pork rib roast on a gray platter with parsley leaves.

      Make this stunning roasted rack of pork for your next holiday dinner-it's easier than it looks, with a pistachio-herb crust and tender, juicy meat. The crust comes together fast in a food processor. Once the roast is in the oven, it needs little attention. Elegant enough for guests, simple enough for family as Sunday dinner. You're sure to receive rave reviews.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Elegant but easy - A holiday-worthy and special occasion pork rib roast.
      • Flavor-packed crust - Pistachios, garlic, and herbs form a golden crust.
      • Juicy, bone-in pork - Roasting on the bone keeps the meat tender and flavorful.

      If you enjoy pork, try this roast pork tenderloin with Dijon mustard sauce.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for bone-in pork rib roast on a marble counter.
      • Pork: Bone-in pork rib roast, chine bone removed, also called a rack of pork.
      • Pistachios: Raw, shelled, unsalted pistachios.
      • Breadcrumbs: Use either gluten-free seasoned breadcrumbs or regular breadcrumbs.
      • Herbs: Fresh flat leaf parsley (Italian parsley), and fresh chopped thyme.
      • Mustard: Both whole grain Dijon and creamy Dijon mustard.
      • Garlic: Both fresh cloves for the crust, and granulated garlic for the pork for extra flavor on the met.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, kosher salt, and black pepper.

      These buttery baby dutch yellow potatoes are a super side dish for this pork rib roast.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Nuts: Swap the pistachios with walnuts or pecans for a different flavor profile.
      • Herbs: Add some fresh rosemary, dried rosemary, or sage, all good with pork.
      • Garlic: No fresh garlic? Use ½ teaspoon garlic powder instead.
      • Crust-free: Want to simplify? Skip the crust. Brush the roast with good olive oil, then season with salt, pepper, granulated garlic, and dried herbs. It's still incredibly flavorful.

      Try these simple whipped sweet potatoes to go along with your pork roast.

      Chef's tip for buying a rack of pork: Look for a pork rib roast with a smooth, even fat cap. A thin but solid layer of fat helps the crust adhere beautifully and protects the meat during roasting. A full, bone-in pork rib roast could have 10 ribs (about 9 pounds), great for a big gathering. If you're cooking for a smaller crowd, look for, or have the butcher cut a 5-rib roast which is about 4 pounds. It's worth seeking out pasture raised or heritage pork versus commodity pork for this special dish as it has better flavor.

      How to Cook a Pork Rib Roast

      Pre-heat the oven to 325°F. Why only 325° when many recipes start with a high temperature? The nut crust needs a lower oven temperature.

      Because ovens vary, check on the color of the crust towards the end of roasting. If the top is browning too quickly, loosely tent the roast with aluminum foil to prevent over-browning. This keeps the crust golden without drying it out or burning the nuts and herbs.

      Ingredients for pistachio crust in a food processor work bowl.
      1. Add the pistachio crust ingredients to the food processor workbowl.
      Pistachios, breadcrumbs, garlic, and herbs processed for a crust for pork roast.
      1. Process until the nuts, herbs, and garlic cloves is fairly fine but still with a little texture. If you do not have a food processor, chop it all by hand. 
      A 5 bone pork rib roast being seasoned with salt and pepper on a plate.
      1. Pat roast dry with paper towels. If the pork came tied, remove butchers twine. Season both sides and ends of the pork rib roast with salt, pepper, and optionally granulated garlic.
      A pork rib roast coated in mustard as a binder for the crust on a white plate.
      1. Mix the two mustards together and brush evenly on the top of the roast. Ready a shallow roasting pan with a rack.

      Chef's Tip: For best results, place the pork rib roast on a wire rack set inside your roasting pan to allow air to circulate and help the crust stay crisp. This is what I usually do. Don't have a wire rack? Lay a few celery stalks under the roast to elevate it slightly. Tried it for this time and it worked, but I recommend a wire rack or a silicone roasting rack like this.

      A pistachio crusted pork roast ready for the oven in a white casserole dish.

      5. Cover the pork rib roast with the pistachio crust, patting it on evenly. Place roast in the oven (conventional setting) until the pork reaches 140°F internally (about 2 hours). It will rise to the perfect pork safe temperature of 145°F as it rests. Be sure to use a wireless or wired digital meat thermometer placed in the thickest part of the meat.

      Chef's tip - How to know when it's done. Monitor the internal temperature of the pork rib roast with a meat thermometer. My oven has a built-in probe, but you can use a wireless thermometer like a Meater smart meat thermometer (what I use on my grill), or a wired meat thermometer. I don't recommend using a handheld instant-read thermometer as every time you open the oven to read the temperature you're losing oven heat. If you don't have a wireless or wired thermometer, they are a good investment.

      Thick slices of a bone-in pork rib roast on a black cutting board with a slicing knife.

      When the pork rib roast is done, allow it to rest for 15-20 minutes, then place it on a cutting board and slice between the ribs with a sharp knife for nice thick pork rib chops. A cutting board with a juice groove helps control the juices.

      Serving Suggestions

      You'll want to serve something terrific to go with this beautiful pork rib roast! Here are my favorite sides:

      • Classic creamy riced mashed potatoes are nice against the crisp crust.
      • Roasted balsamic glaze brussels sprouts, or simple blanched green beans work equally as well.
      • And be sure to make dessert, like a do-ahead strawberry panna cotta.

      Storing and Freezing

      Pork rib roast leftovers will last 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. Meat should freeze fine except reheating overcooks the pork, so I do not freeze. We use leftovers in tacos! You can also dice it and use it as your protein in an entree salad.

      Recipe FAQs

      What cut of meat is a pork rib roast?

      A pork rib roast, also called a pork loin rib roast or rack of pork, comes from the rib section of the loin. It's the pork equivalent of a beef prime rib and includes the rib bones, making it flavorful and great for roasting.

      How many people does a pork rib roast serve?

      Plan on about 1 rib (or chop) per person. A roast with 6 to 8 ribs typically serves 6 to 8 people, depending on appetite and side dishes. I've found that the chops are pretty thick so smaller appetites might even share a pork chop, for more servings.

      Can I use a boneless pork roast instead?

      Yes, but a bone-in roast adds flavor and creates a more impressive presentation. If using boneless, reduce cook time slightly and monitor internal temperature closely. Cook to temperature, not time.

      What if my crust starts browning too fast?

      Tent the pork roast loosely with foil to prevent over-browning. This helps the crust finish cooking without burning.

      Do I need to rest the meat before slicing?

      Yes! Let the roast rest 15-20 minutes after removing it from the oven. This allows the juices to redistribute for moist, flavorful slices.

      More Roasting Recipes

      Roasting is one of the easiest ways to develop deep, delicious flavor-whether you're cooking meat, poultry, seafood, or vegetables. It's mostly hands-off and great for both weeknight meals and special occasions. Here's more roasting recipes.

      • Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.
        Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce
      • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
        Roast Split Chicken Breast
      • beef tenderloin on a plate.
        Roast Beef Tenderloin (Center-Cut Chateaubriand)
      • Roast halibut with tomatoes.
        Baked Halibut with Roasted Cherry Tomatoes

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this pork rib roast, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A golden crusted pork rib roast on a gray platter with fresh green parsley.

      Pork Rib Roast

      Sally Cameron
      A savory bone-in pork rib roast with a crisp garlic-herb-pistachio crust. Perfect for holidays or special occasions.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 2 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
      Resting time 15 minutes mins
      Total Time 2 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
      Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
      Cuisine American
      Servings 5 to 6 servings
      Calories 538 kcal

      Equipment

      • Small roasting pan with rack that fits inside
      • Food Processor optional

      Ingredients
        

      Pork rib roast

      • 4 pound 5-rib bone-in pork roast with chine bone removed bones frenched, optional
      • 2 teaspoons creamy Dijon mustard
      • 2 teaspoons whole grain Dijon mustard
      • kosher sea salt
      • ground black pepper
      • granulated garlic optional

      Pistachio crust (makes extra)

      • ½ cup raw, unsalted pistachios
      • ¼ cup chopped fresh Italian parsley
      • 2 tablespoons seasoned breadcrumbs gluten-free or regular
      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped thyme
      • 2 large fresh garlic cloves chopped fine
      • avocado spray

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Get ready

      • Get the roast out of the refrigerator 1 hour ahead of roasting to get the chill off. After 30 minutes, pre-heat the oven to 325°F. Coat the rack and roasting pan bottom with the avocado spray.

      Make the crust

      • Add the crust ingredients to a food processor, pulse and process until the crust mix is fine but still with a little texture. Without a food processor, chop everything fine by hand and combine.

      Prep the pork

      • Season the pork rib roast on both sides and ends with salt and pepper, and a little garlic if using. Cover the top side of the rib roast well with the pistachio mix, patting firmly and evenly. Position the meat thermometer in the side center chop of the roast.

      Roast the pork and rest

      • Place the roasting pan in the oven and roast pork until the thermometer reads 140°F. Temperature will rise to the perfect 145°F as the roast is resting before slicing.
        Note - Watch the color of the crust towards the end of roasting. If it is getting too brown, tent the top with foil.
        My roasts take approximately 2 hours and 20 minutes. As ovens vary, roast to temperature, not time.
      • When the roast is done, allow it to rest before slicing. Arrange thick chops on a platter and serve.

      Notes

      There will likely be extra crust mix and it's delicious on fish then baked or roasted! I've used it on halibut and salmon. 
      If you don't have a rack for the inside of the roasting pan, lay down stalks of celery to elevate the roast off the bottom of the pan. Discard celery after roasting. 
      Here's an alternative to a wire roasting rack. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 538kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 52gFat: 32gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 139mgSodium: 234mgPotassium: 977mgFiber: 2gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 381IUVitamin C: 7mgCalcium: 95mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Lemon Meringue Tart Recipe

      04/13/2025 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      A beautiful lemon tart with piles of piped meringue on top of a cake plate.

      This lemon meringue tart is bright, bold, and sure to impress-no rolling pin required. A simple press-in almond flour crust (naturally gluten-free) keeps things easy, while the tangy lemon curd filling is rich and smooth. Billowy swirls of Italian meringue top it off for a stunning finish. It slices cleanly and gets rave reviews from the first bite. It takes a little effort, but it's absolutely worth it-and I'll walk you through it step by step.

      A lemon meringue tart with puffs of white piped  meringue that's been torched.

      This lemon meringue tart is a showstopper dessert-perfect for holidays, spring gatherings, or anytime you want something with serious wow factor. The lemon curd strikes a sweet-tart balance with a rich, smooth texture, and the whole tart is naturally gluten-free. Make it with regular sugar or powdered allulose to suit your needs.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Bright lemon flavor, nicely balanced between sweet and tangy.
      • Cookie style crust is easy to make.
      • Top with an Italian meringue or skip and use whipped cream.
      • Make the tart crust a day ahead to make things easier.
      • It's more refined and elegant than a lemon meringue pie.

      Here's a link to my sugar-free lemon curd if you just want lemon curd and not the full tart. And lemon curd is great served with gluten-free pound cake.

      Lemon Meringue Tart Ingredients

      Ingredients for a almond flour tart crust in prep bowls on a counter.
      Ingredients for a lemon meringue tart in prep bowls on a marble counter.

      Tart Crust

      • Almond Flour - Naturally gluten-free almond flour gives the crust a tender, buttery texture.
      • Coconut Flour - Adds structure and helps the crust hold together.
      • Sugar - Light brown sugar adds a subtle caramel flavor.
      • Butter - Use unsalted butter, salted butter can throw off the balance.
      • Salt - Fine sea salt enhances the flavor of the crust.

      Lemon Curd Filling

      • Eggs - A dozen large yolks for the lemon curd.
      • Butter - Unsalted butter only for better control over flavor.
      • Lemons: Either regular lemons or Meyer lemons.
      • Sweetener - Sugar, either caster sugar (superfine sugar), granulated sugar, or for sugar-free and lower-carb use powdered allulose.
      • Gelatin - A small amount adds insurance for clean slices and the perfect texture. I use leaf gelatin 170 bloom power, but regular powdered gelatin works too.
      • Citric Acid Powder - Use only with Meyer lemons, which are naturally lower in acidity. It helps the curd set properly.

      For more about leaf gelatin and why I recommend it, read the note in this post on strawberry panna cotta.

      Italian Meringue Topping

      • Egg whites - Use egg whites from the lemon curd filling
      • Sugar - Superfine sugar is the best for meringue but regular granulated sugar works.
      • Water - For making the sugar syrup.
      • Cream of tartar - Provides stability for the meringue.
      • Sea salt - Just a pinch, that tiny bit balances the sweetness of the meringue.

      Chef's tip: Why Italian meringue? It's the most stable of the three types of meringue: French meringue , Swiss meringue, and Italian meringue and holds up beautifully on a lemon meringue tart, plus it torches well, if you want to torch it.

      If you love lemon, try this easy blender lemon chicken marinade. It's great for grilling chicken!

      Substitutions and Variations

      • If you run short on time, make it a lemon curd tart with lightly sweetened whipped cream on top and skip the meringue step.

      Chef's tip: Almond flour vs. almond meal: Almond flour is made from blanched almonds (no skins) and is finely ground. It gives baked goods a smoother texture and is ideal for crusts, cakes, and pastries. Almond meal is often made from whole almonds (with skins) and is coarser in texture. It can make recipes more rustic or gritty and may affect how the crust holds together. Iuse the superfine

      Recipe Instructions

      For the step-by-step instructions with photos, click here to see details for how to make the tart crust. You need a 9" tart pan with removable bottom.

      Tart Crust

      1. Combine all crust ingredients in a bowl and mix with a fork until it holds together.
      2. Pour crust ingredients into tart pan and distribute with fingers.
      3. Make a strong edge then flat bottom.
      4. Bake 15-17 minutes at 350°F until light golden brown. Cool to fill. Make a day ahead. Wrap and store on counter, fill next day.

      Lemon Curd Filling

      Photo collage of making lemon curd on the stovetop, with egg yolks, lemon juice, and sugar.
      1. Whisk the egg yolks until smooth, juice and strain the lemons.
      2. Bloom the gelatin in appropriate water 5-10 minutes (see recipe card details).
      3. Over medium low heat, melt the butter, add the lemon juice, add the sugar, whisk until smooth.
      4. Heat the butter mix until hot. Slowly pour it into the eggs whisking continually (called tempering), the pour it all back into the pan. Cook a few minutes, whisking, until you feel it thicken.
      Straining cooked lemon curd through a fine sieve.

      5. Pour the lemon curd through a fine sieve and immediately add the gelatin and stir until smooth while hot.

      Pouring lemon curd into a tart shell from a glass bowl.

      6. Cool lemon curd for 15-20 minutes, then pour into the tart shell and bake at 325°F for 15 minutes.

      Baked lemon curd tart cooling on a wire rack on the counter.

      7. Remove baked tart from the oven. It will still be fairly fluid and jiggly. Cool at room temperature for about 1 hour. It should feel fairly cool to the touch before you transfer it to the fridge. Refrigerate for at least 2 to 3 hours for the cleanest slices. Tart will be fully set with no jiggle.

      Italian Meringue

      Tool tip - Use an inexpensive digital candy thermometer for making Italian meringue.

      Four photos of making Italian meringue from sugar syrup to whipped meringue.
      1. Add sugar and water to a small pan and bring to a boil. Do not stir to reduce crystallization of sugar.
      2. Whip 3 egg whites until foamy, then add cream of tartar and whip to soft peaks.
      3. Cook sugar syrup to 246°F - 248°F for Italian meringue.
      4. Immediately remove pan from stove, slowly pour hot syrup into the meringue. Whip on high speed until it cools, 5-7 minutes.
      Piping bag filled with Italian meringue ready to be piped onto a tart.

      Scoop the meringue into a piping bag fitted with a star tip. Fold the top down to create a collar to make it easier to fill. Pipe as you please onto the cooled tart. Ready to serve or refrigerate for a few hours. If desired torch before serving. It's good both ways.

      Chef's tip for perfect meringue: For the best volume and stability, always start with a clean, dry bowl and beaters. Any trace of grease, oil, or egg yolk can prevent the whites from whipping properly. Use a metal or glass bowl (not plastic). Also, room temperature egg whites whip to better volume than cold ones (but it's easier to separate cold eggs).

      A lemon meringue tart on a white cake stand with a piece of tart on a small plate in front.

      Serving Suggestions

      Serve this lemon meringue tart slightly chilled or at cool room temperature. It's perfect on its own, but if you want to dress it up, add a few fresh berries, or a sprig of mint.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make this tart in advance?

      Yes. You can make just the crust or the crust with lemon curd filling a day ahead. Save making the meringue for the day you plan to serve.

      How long will a lemon meringue tart keep?

      The tart is best enjoyed within 1-2 days, as meringue softens over time. Store covered in the fridge and avoid humidity as it softens meringue quickly.

      Why Italian meringue?

      It's the most stable of the three types of meringue and holds its shape beautifully without needing to be baked-perfect for torching and slicing.

      Can I skip the meringue?

      If you're short on time, yes-you can top the tart with lightly sweetened whipped cream instead of meringue.

      More Dessert Recipes with Lemon

      Love lemon? We sure do! If you're a lemon lover, try some of these lemon dessert recipes.

      • Four lemon posset custard dessert cups topped with fresh berries.
        Easy Lemon Posset Recipe
      • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
        Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
      • lemon ice cream
        Homemade Lemon Custard Ice Cream
      • easy lemon mousse
        Lemon Mousse (Light and Airy)

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this lemon meringue tart, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. They really help other readers. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating!

      📖 Recipe

      A beautiful lemon tart with piles of piped meringue on top of a cake plate.

      Lemon Meringue Tart

      Sally Cameron
      A stunning dessert made with a gluten-free almond-coconut crust, tangy lemon curd filling, and pillowy Italian meringue topping. Creamy, bright, and perfect for spring or special occasions. Make the filling sugar-free if desired. To serve, serve as is or torch the meringue if desired. Both are good!
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 1 hour hr
      Cook Time 45 minutes mins
      Tart chilling time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 3 hours hrs
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 8
      Calories 606 kcal

      Equipment

      • 1 9" tart pan with removable bottom
      • sheet pan
      • Silpat silicone liner optional
      • Whisk
      • Piping bag with star tip optional
      • Butane torch head optional for torching meringue
      • Butane fuel optional for torching meringue
      • Candy thermometer or digital thermometer
      • Kitchen scale optional but highly recommended

      Ingredients
        

      Almond flour tart crust (directions link below)

      • 1 ½ cups superfine almond flour 6 ounces Bobs Red Mill
      • ½ cup coconut flour 2 ounces Bobs Red Mill
      • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
      • 2 tablespoons light brown sugar
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt

      Lemon curd tart filling (yield 2 cups)

      • 12 large egg yolks save 3 whites for meringue
      • ¼ pound unsalted butter 8 tablespoons
      • 1 cup strained fresh lemon juice 4 large lemons
      • 1 cup + 2 tablespoons superfine sugar or 1 ½ cups powdered allulose for sugar-free
      • ½ teaspoon powdered citric acid if using Meyer lemons
      • 2 ½ sheets leaf gelatin 170 bloom or regular gelatin powder, 1 packet

      Italian meringue

      • 3 large egg whites from the lemon curd, 90 grams of white.
      • ¾ cup superfine sugar
      • ¼ cup water
      • ¼ teaspoon cream of tartar
      • 1 pinch salt

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Make the tart crust (a day ahead if desired)

      • Pre-heat oven to 350° (177 C). In a medium bowl, mix almond flour, coconut flour, sugar and melted butter with a fork until blended, then blend until completely combined with your fingers. To test, squeeze a handful together. It should hold together and feel moist.
        Dump all of the crust mix into the tart pan and begin to press in the crust starting with creating a strong edge and the bottom last. To see full tart directions and photos please follow the link at the bottom of the recipe.

      Make the lemon curd filling

      • Separate your eggs, using 12 yolks for the filling and saving 3 egg whites for the meringue.
      • First bloom the gelatin. For powdered gelatin, add powder to 2 tablespoons of water, stir, and let bloom for 5-7 minutes in a small bowl. For leaf gelatin, cut the leaves in pieces and cover with cold water in a small bowl.
      • Melt butter in a 3 quart pan over medium low heat. Add the lemon juice (and citric acid if needed) and sugar or sifted allulose and whisk until smooth.
        Whisk the yolks until smooth in a medium bowl. When the butter lemon blend is hot (small bubbles around the edges of the pan), slowly drizzle it into the egg yolks whisking continually until totally incorporated. This is called tempering, so the eggs don't scramble.
      • Pour the entire mix back into the pan and cook over medium low heat, whisking continually, until you feel it thicken, 3-4 minutes. Pour the hot lemon curd through a fine sieve to catch any cooked egg bits and while hot, add the bloomed gelatin and mix until smooth.
        Cool the lemon filling 20-30 minutes before pouring into the tart shell before baking. This protects the crust and ensures a smooth, even set during baking.

      Bake and cool

      • Pre-heat the oven to 325°F (conventional). Place the tart shell on the baking sheet for stability, then pour lemon curd in and bake for 15 minutes at 325°F.
      • Remove tart from oven and carefully place on a wire rack to cool when you can handle it. Filing will be fairly fluid and jiggly, not set (until it cools).
      • Let tart cool at room temperature for about 1 hour. Refrigerate for 2 to 3 hours or overnight for the cleanest slices.

      Make meringue, pipe, and torch (optional)

      • Whip meringues to soft peaks with a hand mixer on medium high speed, adding cream of tartar at the foamy point. Whip to soft peaks, so when you turn the beaters upside down the tip drops over.
      • Make the sugar syrup. Add sugar and water to a small pan. Bring to a boil and cook until sugar syrup reaches 246°F degrees for a stiff meringue, or 240°F - 242°F for a softer more marshmallow texture meringue.
      • When sugar syrup is to the right temperature, immediately remove it from the heat and slowly pour in into the side of the bowl of meringue while whipping on high speed. Whip on high speed as the meringue cools.
        Continue whipping the meringue until glossy peaks form and to cool the meringue 5-7 minutes. Meringue is ready to use.
      • Fill a piping bag fitted with a star tip to pipe a decorative top or spoon and swirl meringue on top of the tart and arrange as you please.
        The final step if desired is to carefully use a blow torch to brown the top. Use a low flame and move the torch across the meringue until you have enough browned meringue. Don't rush this step. When done torching, it's ready to serve.
      • Slicing trick - Use a long thin slicing knife and wipe it off on paper towels or a kitchen towel between each slice for clean slices.

      Notes

      Tart Crust Directions
      Since this lemon meringue tart includes three components, the tart crust ingredients are listed here and in the recipe card. For the step-by-step instructions, click here to see how to make the almond flour tart crust.
      Nutrition calculation note - As powdered allulose is not metabolized by the body, the carb numbers should be 31 grams per serving for all of the crust, filling and meringue. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 606kcalCarbohydrates: 58gProtein: 12gFat: 38gSaturated Fat: 17gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 328mgSodium: 132mgPotassium: 106mgFiber: 5gSugar: 49gVitamin A: 986IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 89mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Creamy Fennel Soup With White Beans

      04/17/2025 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

      A gray bowl of fennel and white bean soup with olive oil and fried shallots.

      This easy, creamy fennel soup with white beans is velvety, comforting, and full of mellow, aromatic flavor. Sautéed fennel, onion, and garlic create a fragrant base, while cannellini beans add body and plant-based protein. Finished with a splash of cream and a drizzle of good olive oil, it's a nourishing soup perfect for cool spring days, with easy dairy-free and vegan options included. Serve it as a first course or a light meal and enjoy its comforting goodness.

      A gray bowl off creamy pale fennel soup with fennedl fronds and olive oil.

      Inspired by French-style vegetable purées (and my garden with a lot of fennel), this fennel soup recipe is mild and creamy with a texture reminiscent of classic potato soup. It comes together in about 45 minutes. The simple, pale color is beautiful in its own way, but garnishes like olive oil, cracked pepper, herbs, or a few fennel fronds add eye appeal and a final pop of flavor.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Fennel Soup Recipe Highlights

      • Creamy and comforting - White beans create a naturally smooth texture, like potato soup but with more protein.
      • Simple and nourishing - Made with clean, everyday ingredients like fennel, onion, broth, and olive oil.
      • Easy to customize - Finish with your favorite toppings for extra flavor and visual appeal.

      For another healthy fresh recipe with fennel, try my fennel and orange salad with orange vinaigrette.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      • Fennel - With its mild, sweet anise flavor, fresh fennel bulb adds subtle depth and aromatic complexity to this creamy soup. Save the fennel fronds for garnish!
      • Cannellini Beans - Canned white beans keep the recipe quick and easy, while adding body and protein.
      • Oil - Use extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil.
      • Onion - White onion or sweet onion work fine and don't overpower the fennel.
      • Garlic - Fresh cloves provide the best flavor.
      • Herbs - Tarragon and/or thyme. Use fresh if you have it, but dried works fine.
      • Broth - Low-sodium chicken broth or vegetable broth.
      • Cream - A splash of heavy cream makes the soup extra smooth and rich.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, sea salt, and either black pepper or white pepper (white pepper disappears).

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Herbs - Use a dried French seasoning blend called Herbes de Provence.
      • Bean options - Great Northern, navy beans, or small white beans all work just as well in this soup.
      • Onion swap - Use shallots for the onion.
      • Vegan or dairy-free soup - Use olive oil of preference, vegetable broth, and canned coconut milk.

      Chef's tip on buying fennel: Fennel bulbs vary in size, and how many you need depends on how they're trimmed. Some come with the feathery green stalks still attached, while others are already cleaned up. For this recipe, you'll need about 1¼ pounds of fennel after trimming. That's typically 2-3 medium bulbs. Find it year round in the store and at it's best in fall to early spring.

      For another fennel and white bean soup, try this chunky, hearty Tuscan White Bean Soup.

      How to Make Fennel Soup

      Four steps showing steps for fennel soup, chopping vegetables, sauteing, simmering.
      1. Chop fennel by hand or in the food processor.
      2. Chop onion and garlic by hand or in the food processor.
      3. Saute the fennel, onion, and garlic in oil, add the herbs and cook slowly until softened, 7-10 minutes.
      4. Add the beans and broth, bring to a simmer, turn down heat and cook 12-15 minutes.
      Blender container full of pureed pale colored creamy fennel soup.

      When vegetables and beans are all soft and flavors blended, puree until smooth in a blender. Do it in two batches if needed. If too thick, add a little more broth to serve.

      Serving Suggestions

      Pair this creamy fennel soup with a crusty roll or garlic toast to soak up every spoonful. Freshly baked cornbread is another nice option. For a satisfying meal, add a simple green salad on the side. It also makes a great first course for a spring or fall dinner.

      For garnishes, try a drizzle of good olive oil, a sprinkle of fresh chopped parsley or chives, a pinch of red pepper flakes, crispy crumbled bacon, or a little grated Parmesan. A spoonful of pesto adds great color and flavor.

      A gray bowl of fennel and white bean soup with olive oil and fried shallots.

      Storing and Freezing

      To store: Let the soup cool completely, then transfer to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 4-5 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop or in the microwave.

      To freeze: This soup freezes beautifully. Store in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge before reheating. Stir well after reheating to restore the creamy texture. If it gets too thick add a little more broth or milk.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make this soup ahead of time?


      Yes! This soup keeps well for several days and actually tastes better the next day as the flavors meld. Just store in an airtight container and reheat gently before serving.

      Do I need to remove the fennel core?

      Not for this recipe. Since the soup is puréed, the fennel core softens completely as it cooks and blends in smoothly.

      Can I use dried beans instead of canned?

      Yes, but you'll need to soak and cook them first. You'll need about 1½ cups cooked beans to replace one 15-ounce can. Be sure they're fully tender before adding to the soup.

      Does the soup taste like licorice?

      No. Fennel has a subtle anise flavor, but once it's sautéed and simmered, it mellows into something more sweet and savory-not overpowering at all. It's delicious.

      More Creamy Soups

      For more creamy soups, check out these super soup recipes in the soups & stews index.

      • A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.
        Creamy Leek and Mushroom Soup Recipe
      • Creamy squash and apple soup in a gray bowl with pumpkin seeds and chives.
        Creamy Butternut and Apple Soup
      • Pot of cream of asparagus soup ready to serve.
        Easy Cream of Asparagus Soup
      • roasted red pepper soup
        Roasted Red Pepper Soup (sheet pan recipe)

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this fennel soup, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A gray bowl of fennel and white bean soup with olive oil and fried shallots.

      Fennel Soup

      Sally Cameron
      A velvety, protein-rich soup made with fresh fennel, white beans, and herbs. Smooth, comforting, and ready in about 45 minutes-perfect for a cozy meal. Yield is 8 cups, 2 quarts.
      5 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 30 minutes mins
      Puree in blender 5 minutes mins
      Total Time 45 minutes mins
      Course Main Course, Side Dish, Soup, starter
      Cuisine American, French
      Servings 6 12-ounce servings
      Calories 332 kcal

      Equipment

      • Dutch oven 5 ½ quarts
      • blender
      • Food Processor optional

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ½ tablespoon extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil
      • 1 ¼ cups chopped white onion or sweet onion 1 small
      • 3 large garlic cloves
      • 1 ¼ pounds fennel bulbs 2-3, bulb only, trimmed of tops
      • 4 cups low sodium chicken broth or vegetable broth
      • 1 ½ teaspoons dried tarragon dried thyme, or both.
      • ½ cup heavy cream canned coconut milk for dairy-free
      • 30 ounces canned cannellini beans drained and rinsed
      • ¾ teaspoon sea salt
      • ½ teaspoon white pepper or black

      Optional garnishes

      • fennel fronds
      • extra virgin olive oil
      • fresh chopped chives or parsley
      • finely grated parmesan cheese
      • crisply cooked and crumbled bacon

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Vegetable prep

      • Roughly chop the fennel and onion, then pulse in a food processor until finely chopped. If you don't have a food processor, chop them finely by hand. Finely chop the garlic.

      Sweat the vegetables

      • Heat the olive oil in a medium pot (5½ quarts) over medium-low heat. Add the fennel and onion, cover with the lid slightly ajar, and cook gently until soft and translucent, about 10-12 minutes. You're sweating the vegetables, not browning them. Keep them pale-no color. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute more. Stir in the herbs and half of the salt.

      Simmer the soup

      • Add the beans and the broth and bring to a simmer, allow flavors to blend and heat soup to heat through, 5 minutes. Puree the soup in a blender in 2 batches, adding the cream at the end. Taste and season with the rest of the salt and white or black pepper if desired.
        Serve with a drizzle of extra olive oil and any other garnishes you prefer.

      Notes

      Substitutions:
      If you can't get cannellini beans, use navy beans, small white beans, or great northern beans, they all work great. 
      Storing and freezing:
      Soup keeps in the refrigerator for 4-5 days in an airtight container, be sure to label and date. Soup freezes for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator then reheat gently on the stovetop or microwave until hot. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1.5cupsCalories: 332kcalCarbohydrates: 43gProtein: 16gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 22mgSodium: 401mgPotassium: 1259mgFiber: 10gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 440IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 186mgIron: 6mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Blackened Mahi Mahi (Air Fryer Recipe)

      03/31/2025 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      Crusty topped blackened fish filet on top of coleslaw in a gray bowl.

      Dinner doesn't get much easier-or tastier-than this air fryer Blackened Mahi Mahi. With bold Cajun spices and a quick cook time, this healthy seafood recipe is on the table in under 10 minutes. Use my homemade blackening seasoning, recipe included. It's fast, flavorful, and perfect for busy weeknights. No air fryer? Make it stovetop instead.

      A shallow gray bowl of colorful coleslaw and blackened mahi mahi filet with lemon wedge.

      Since buying my air fryer, it's my favorite way I'm cooking fish because it is so easy and fast! This blackened mahi-mahi tastes amazing, serving with a quick lemon aioli adds brightness and creaminess, balancing out the smokey spicy flavors from the rub. Or just use a squeeze of fresh lemon.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Blackened mahi mahi is fast, healthy, and an easy recipe with bold flavor.
      • The air fryer delivers perfect results in minutes.
      • Make it with other fish if you can't get mahi.
      • Serve it simply with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice.
      • Use the blackening seasoning may ways.

      While creamy riced mashed potatoes are a terrific side, for a lower carb side dish try this cheesy cauliflower rice.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Fish

      • Mahi mahi - Firm, mild fish filets hold up beautifully to bold blackening spices. Use fresh mahi if you can, or frozen fish fillets that have been fully thawed and patted dry.
      • Oil - A bit of extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil helps the seasoning stick and promotes a nice crust in the air fryer.
      • Avocado oil spray - A quick mist on top gives the fish a slight sheen and helps keep it moist during cooking without adding extra oil. Plus, it helps that crust develop a little better in the air fryer.

      Blackening seasoning

      You can make blackening seasoning as mild or hot as you want by controlling the cayenne or chipotle. Start with a very small amount if you are heat sensitive (like me) and add until you get to the heat level you want. For a shortcut, use a store-bought spice mix. 

      • Smoked paprika - gives the blend its signature color and rich, smoky depth. For a more traditional Cajun flavor, you can swap in sweet paprika.
      • Granulated garlic powder - An essential flavor component.
      • Onion powder - Adds savory intensity and balance.
      • Dried thyme - For herbal notes.
      • Dried oregano - Common in Cajun and Creole seasoning blends.
      • Black pepper: A must have in blackened blends.
      • White pepper - Work with black pepper to layer in heat and sharpness. White pepper adds a subtle complexity-highly recommended if you don't use it.
      • Cayenne pepper - Delivers that classic Cajun heat. Start with a smaller amount if you're spice-sensitive and adjust to taste.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt. 

      Chef's tip: Blackened or blackening? Blackening is the seasoning blend, blackened is the technique use to blacken the fish.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • No mahi mahi? It's terrific on salmon, or see the FAQ section for more firm white fish options.
      • Chipotle powder - Adds smoky heat and bold flavor. Not classic, but it's good.
      • Brown sugar - A small amount adds subtle sweetness and helps create a crust when searing. It's not traditional in blackening blends, but it's a great addition if you enjoy a hint of caramelization.
      • Use lime juice instead of lemon juice to finish the fish. 

      Serve air fryer mahi mahi with a side of sweet corn succotash. It's terrific with the Cajun spices.

      Chef's tip: Is homemade cajun seasoning the same as blackening seasoning? Cajun seasoning is a general-purpose spice blend, while blackening seasoning is a bolder variation created for the high-heat blackening method made famous by New Orleans chef Paul Prudhomme. It's similar-but spicier and more intense. And it works for more than fish. Try it with chicken and shrimp.

      Recipe Instructions

      Blackened mahi mahi doesn't get any easier for a fast and terrific dinner. Note - If using frozen fillets, be sure they are completely thawed and patted dry. 

      A plate of mixed spices making up Cajun blackening seasoning blend.
      1. Blend the blackening spices together and put them in a jar. Pat the fish dry with paper towels.
      Two fish filets coated with blackening seasoning in an air fryer basket.
      1. Pre-heat the air fryer to 385°F. When ready, place fish in the air fryer and cook for 7-8 minutes. At half way, give them another quick spray for shine and crust.
      Air fryer mahi mahi with a blackening seasoning in the air fryer basket.

      Blackened mahi mahi fillets are done when the internal temperature reaches 140°F-145°F, in 7-8 minutes, or until internal temperature reaches 140°F-145°F, in 7-8 minutes.

      Chef's note: Mahi mahi is sometimes called "dolphin fish" in parts of the U.S., especially in Florida and along the East Coast. Don't worry-it's not related to dolphins, the beloved marine mammals. The name can be confusing, which is why the Hawaiian name mahi mahi is more commonly used in recipes and stores today.

      Serving Suggestions

      Serve blackened mahi mahi with lemon wedges, a side of simple white rice or salad. A dollop of lemon aioli is perfect for a creamy finish and good with the smoky seasoning. You can make it in 5 minutes with mayo, lemon juice, zest, garlic, and Dijon.

      Sometimes I serve it with a creamy avocado sauce and lime, or this fresh mango salsa. Another option is simply melted butter, as mahi is a lean fish.

      • A simple, cool, lightly dressed homemade coleslaw.
      • Crunchy broccoli salad with bacon.
      • Simple whipped sweet potatoes and use some of the blackening spices in them too!

      Leftovers

      For the best flavor and texture, enjoy leftover blackened mahi mahi within 1 to 2 days. While cooked fish can technically be stored in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days, it tends to dry out and lose quality. Store it in an airtight container.

      It makes terrific fish tacos! You just need corn tortillas, thinly sliced cabbage, lime wedges, some grated cheese, and maybe avocado. They are delicious!

      A shallow gray bowl with coleslaw topped with air fryer mahi mahi with a blackening seasoning.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make blackened mahi mahi without an air fryer?

      Yes! You can pan-sear it in a hot large-cast iron skillet over medium-high heat with a little avocado oil (good for high heat) or even grill it. Just be sure to use a high-smoke point oil and get your pan nice and hot to create that signature crust.

      What does "blackened" mean in cooking?

      Blackening is a cooking technique where food is coated in a bold spice rub and then cooked at high heat, forming a flavorful dark crust. It's not burnt-it's packed with flavor! The seasoning is a blackening seasoning and the technique is called blackened.

      Can I use another fish besides mahi mahi?


      Absolutely! While mahi mahi is ideal for blackening because of its firm texture and mild flavor, other fish can work too. Salmon is a great alternative with its rich flavor and meaty texture. Halibut, snapper, or grouper are also excellent choices. Cod can be used but is more delicate and may flake apart, so handle it gently, especially if using the air fryer.

      Can I make this ahead of time?

      Blackened fish is best served fresh, but you can prep the spice rub and coat the fish ahead of time. Store it covered in the fridge and cook when ready.

      If you want to make blackened mahi mahi tacos, make it a day ahead, then shred the fish for the tacos, making a fabulous lunch or dinner.

      More Fish and Seafood Recipes

      For more delicious fish and seafood recipes for your seafood lovers including shrimp, scallops, halibut, salmon, and more, please check out the seafood recipe index.

      • Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.
        How to Make Steamed Salmon
      • Miso butter topped halibut on a bed of black rice in a gray bowl.
        Halibut with Miso Butter Recipe
      • black and white sesame salmon
        Sesame Crusted Salmon
      • baked lemon shrimp scampi
        Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make blackened mahi mahi, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      Crusty topped blackened fish filet on top of coleslaw in a gray bowl.

      Blackened Mahi Mahi (Air Fryer Recipe)

      Sally Cameron
      With bold Cajun spices and a quick cook time, this healthy mahi mahi recipe is on the table in just 7-8 minutes. Serve with coleslaw and riced mashed potatoes.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 8 minutes mins
      Total Time 13 minutes mins
      Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4
      Calories 160 kcal

      Equipment

      • 6 quart air fryer

      Ingredients
        

      Fish

      • 1 ½ pounds mahi mahi filets (4 - 6 ounce filets) see substitutes below
      • avocado oil spray

      Blackening seasoning (makes ½ cup)

      • 2 tablespoon smoked paprika or sweet paprika, traditional
      • 1 tablespoon granulated garlic powder
      • 1 tablespoon onion powder
      • 2 teaspoons dried thyme
      • 2 teaspoons dried oregano
      • 2 teaspoons ground black pepper
      • 1 teaspoon white pepper optional but adds depth
      • ¼-1/2 teaspoon cayenne pepper use more for spicy or omit for heat sensitive, or swap chipotle powder

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Add all of the blackening seasoning ingredients to a jar and shake well to blend.
      • Cut the mahi mahi into 4 equal 6-ounces filets. Give them a quick spray of avocado oil and cover the tops with blackening seasoning.
      • Ready the air fryer, setting it to to 385°F. Give the rack a quick spritz of oil if needed. Add the mahi mahi when the air fryer is ready and cook for 7-8 minutes or until the mahi reads 145°F with a digital thermometer.
        Remove from the air fryer and serve right away with wedges of lemon.

      Notes

      Best Substitutes for Mahi Mahi:
      • Salmon - Rich and meaty, holds together well and takes on bold seasoning beautifully.
      • Halibut - Mild, firm, and slightly sweet. Great texture, though a bit pricier.
      • Cod (loin cut) - Mild and flaky but still firm enough for this recipe if handled gently as it falls apart easily.
      • Snapper - Red snapper; lean with a nice texture and mild flavor.
      • Grouper - Similar to mahi in firmness and mildness, terrific if you can get it

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6ouncesCalories: 160kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 32gFat: 2gSaturated Fat: 0.4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 124mgSodium: 152mgPotassium: 785mgFiber: 1gSugar: 0.3gVitamin A: 1215IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 49mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Vegetable Rice

      03/24/2025 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

      A bowl of colorful rice with mixed vegetables and a parsley garnish ready to serve.

      Mixed vegetable rice is a light, colorful Mexican-inspired rice pilaf made with white rice, broth, and a confetti of vegetables like peas, carrots, red bell pepper, and corn. It's flavorful, easy to make, and versatile enough to serve with chicken, fish, tacos, enchiladas, or simple weeknight dinners. This recipe is great for meal prep, make-ahead meals, and freezes beautifully.

      A round white bowl filled with colorful vegetables and rice with a serving spoon inside.

      I first made this mixed vegetable rice while cooking for a meal delivery for a family at church who loved Mexican flavors. It was one of those "use what you have and make it good" side dishes that turned out better than expected, so I went back, wrote it down, and turned it into a real recipe. It's simple, practical, and the kind of colorful side that works with almost everything.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Mixed Vegetable Rice Recipe Snapshot

      • Colorful side dish - Peas, carrots, corn, and red bell pepper make this rice bright, flavorful, and pretty on the plate.
      • Easy to make - Use a mix of frozen and fresh vegetables for simple prep and good texture.
      • Better than plain rice - Broth, vegetables, and seasonings turn basic white rice into a more flavorful side.
      • Meal prep friendly - Make it ahead, refrigerate, or freeze for quick meals later.

      If you love Mexican flavors, try this chicken tortilla soup, easily made with leftover or rotisserie chicken.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      • Rice - Use long-grain white rice such as basmati or jasmine. Basmati is my preference because it stays fluffy and separate. Jasmine rice works too, but it is softer, a little stickier, and can clump more.
      • Oil - Use extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil.
      • Broth - Chicken broth or vegetable broth adds more flavor than water.
      • Onion - White onion has a mild flavor that works well in this Mexican-inspired rice.
      • Garlic - Fresh garlic adds savory depth and a little pungent kick.
      • Spices - Ground cumin and ground coriander add warm flavor. Add red pepper flakes if you want a little heat.
      • Tomato paste - Adds depth of flavor and gives the rice a pretty color.
      • Peas - Petite frozen peas work beautifully and add sweetness and color.
      • Corn - Frozen corn kernels are easy and add color, sweetness, and texture.
      • Carrots - Use orange, red, or purple carrots for color, sweetness, and crunch.
      • Bell pepper - Red bell pepper adds sweetness and bright color, but any color works, including green.
      • Fresh herbs - Chopped cilantro or parsley adds fresh color and garden flavor.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper.

      Chef's Tip: Brown Rice vs. White Rice
      Brown rice takes significantly longer to cook and needs more liquid, so it won't work as a direct substitute in this mixed vegetable rice recipe. To use brown rice, cook it separately first, then stir it into the sautéed vegetables to finish. The timing and texture will be different, but it will still be delicious.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Make it simpler - For milder vegetable rice, omit the cumin, coriander, and tomato paste.
      • Add golden color - Add a pinch of saffron or turmeric for deeper color and flavor.
      • Add heat - For more Mexican-inspired flavor and spice, add finely chopped jalapeño.
      • Use frozen vegetables - Substitute 2 cups thawed frozen mixed vegetables for easy prep.
      • Change the vegetables - Try finely chopped zucchini, green beans, or other small-cut vegetables that cook quickly.

      Here's the perfect easy entree to serve with this vegetable rice, my chicken salsa verde! Make it in 20-30 minutes tops.

      Chef's Tip: How to Keep Rice from Getting Mushy
      For fluffy rice, use the right liquid-to-rice ratio: 1 ¾ cups liquid to 1 cup white rice. Don't overcook it, and when the rice is done, keep it covered and let it steam off the heat for 10 minutes before fluffing gently with a fork.

      How to Make Mixed Vegetable Rice

      White rice in a sieve being washed in the sink with a sprayer.

      1. Rinse the rice very well under cold water, then drain.

      Sautéing chopped white onion in olive oil in a white dutch oven.

      2. Saute the diced onion in oil until soft, 3-4 minutes.

      Tomato paste stirred into white rice turning it red in a pot.

      3. Stir in the tomato paste, cumin, and coriander and cook 3-4 minutes.

      White rice added to a pot of cooking onions and spices.

      4. Add the rice and stir into the pot, toasting rice for 5 minutes, stirring.

      Golden broth pouring into a pot of cooking rice in a havey pot.

      5. Add the broth, salt, and stir. Raise the heat a little and bring to a boil.

      A white dutch oven with a silver top handle with the lid on the stove.

      6. Place a lid on the pot, turn heat down to low, cook for 15 minutes.

      Carrots, bell peppers, peas, and corn added to a pot of rice.

      7. Remove the lid, quickly stir, then add the vegetables and replace the lid. Turn heat off, steam finish for 10 minutes.

      Colorful rice with mixed vegetables in a white pot on the stove.

      8. Finished colorful vegetable rice ready to serve.

      Chef's Tip: Stock vs. Broth
      The terms broth, stock, and bone broth are often used interchangeably, but there is a difference. Stock and bone broth are made by simmering bones, sometimes with meat, for a richer, more gelatinous base. Broth is usually made by simmering meat, vegetables, or both for a lighter flavor. Vegetable broth is common, but technically there's no vegetable "stock" because there are no bones. For this recipe, don't worry too much about the label-use what you have. I use my homemade chicken broth.

      Serving Suggestions

      Vegetable rice is an easy side dish for simple proteins and Mexican-inspired meals.

      • Chicken - Serve it with grilled lemon chicken, air fryer chicken, or roasted chicken breasts.
      • Shrimp - Pair with grilled shrimp or oven-baked shrimp skewers.
      • Pork - This rice is a natural with smoked pork tenderloin, pork chops, or pulled pork.
      • Mexican-inspired meals - Serve with tacos, shredded beef enchiladas, fajitas, or bowls.

      Storing and Freezing

      Store leftover vegetable rice in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 4-5 days. Cool it quickly before refrigerating, and reheat thoroughly to 165°F for food safety.

      For longer storage, vegetable rice freezes well for up to 3 months. Portion it into airtight containers or freezer bags, then thaw and reheat as needed. I like freezing rice in individual portions so I can pop one out and microwave it until hot. Works like a charm.

      A bowl of colorful rice with mixed vegetables and a parsley garnish ready to serve.

      More Terrific Recipes With Rice

      We love rice! In all kinds and colors. Maybe some of these recipe with or about cooking rice you will enjoy.

      • A white pot of turkey and wild rice soup on a gray wooden board with herbs and parmesan cheese on the side.
        Turkey and Wild Rice Soup with Leftovers
      • golden risotto Milanese with peas
        Saffron Risotto (Risotto Milanese)
      • brown rice in white bowl
        How to Reduce Arsenic in Rice
      • A bowl of chicken rice soup with herbs in a white bowl.
        Easy Instant Pot Chicken Rice Soup Recipe

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make vegetable rice, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A bowl of colorful rice with mixed vegetables and a parsley garnish ready to serve.

      Vegetable Rice

      Sally Cameron
      Colorful and tasty, the vegetable rice goes with many main dishes and is great for prep and make head. Customize it with the vegetables you prefer if desired. This is a Mexican-style recipe but you can make it plain, see recipe notes at the end. For vegan or vegetarian, use vegetable broth.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 20 minutes mins
      Total Time 35 minutes mins
      Course Side Dish
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 to 8
      Calories 261 kcal

      Equipment

      • Medium pot 3 ½ quarts

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ½ cups white basmati rice
      • 1 ½ tablespoons extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil
      • 1 cup chopped white onion 1 small onion
      • 2 large garlic cloves
      • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
      • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
      • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • 2 ½ cups low sodium chicken broth or vegetable broth
      • ½ cup peas frozen, thawed
      • ½ cup corn kernals frozen, thawed
      • ½ cup finely chopped carrot 2-3 carrots
      • ½ cup finely chopped red bell pepper half of a large pepper
      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped cilantro or parsley optional garnish

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Wash rice

      • Add the rice to a sieve and rinse well under cold running water for 1 minute. Drain and save for cooking.

      Cook rice

      • Add the oil to a heavy medium pot (3 ½ quarts) over medium heat and saute the onions until soft, 3-4 minutes. If they start to brown turn the heat down. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute more.
      • Add the spices, tomato paste, salt and pepper, and stir, cook 1-2 minutes until it's mixed and fragrant. Add the washed drained rice and toast for 5 minutes, stirring.
      • Add broth to the pot and stir. Turn up the heat and bring to a boil, cover with a tight fitting lid and turn heat to low. Cook rice for 15 minutes.

      Add vegetables

      • At the end of 15 minutes, stir the rice quickly then add all of the vegetables right on top of the rice. Cover with the lid, turn heat off and allow to steam finish for 10 minutes. Taste and season with more salt and black pepper if desired.

      Notes

      To make a more simply flavored vegetable rice, skip the spices and the tomato paste. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 261kcalCarbohydrates: 48gProtein: 7gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 257mgPotassium: 331mgFiber: 3gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 2345IUVitamin C: 25mgCalcium: 36mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Hearty Chicken Minestrone Soup

      03/18/2025 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

      A dutch oven full of chicken minestrone soup with a bowl on the side.

      This hearty Chicken Minestrone Soup is packed with tender chicken, fresh vegetables, beans, and pasta in a rich, savory broth. A high-protein twist on the classic, it's gluten-free when made with GF pasta or use regular pasta. Perfect for late-winter days when the weather is still chilly, this comforting soup is a great way to bridge the seasons.

      A large pot of colorful chicken minestrone with toasts and parmesan. soup

      While traditionally a vegetarian soup-or made with pancetta or prosciutto-classic minestrone soup is highly adaptable. My modern version stays true to its rustic Italian roots while adding extra protein with chicken and using a flavorful chicken broth. It's a well-balanced meal that keeps you full and energized, making it perfect for meal prep or a wholesome weeknight dinner.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Chicken Minestrone Soup

      • Hearty and satisfying.
      • Add chicken for more protein.
      • Loaded with nourishing vegetables.
      • Make it gluten-free or not.

      For another hearty Italian-style soup, make a pot of this Tuscan white bean soup.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Prepping all of the Minestrone ingredients takes a little effort, but it's worth it. You can do some of it ahead to save time.

      Ingredients for chicken minestrone soup in prep bowls on a marble counter.
      • Chicken: Use leftover chicken or rotisserie chicken.
      • Broth: Low sodium chicken broth.
      • Beans: Minestrone uses either red kidney beans, or the white beans called cannellini beans.
      • Onion: Yellow, white, or brown onions.
      • Celery: For the base of flavor.
      • Carrots: For sweetness and flavor.
      • Garlic: Fresh cloves for the best flavor.
      • Zucchini: Adds to the hearty texture, blends well with tomatoes and broth.
      • Green beans: Use fresh raw green beans.
      • Herbs: Dried basil, thyme, rosemary, or an Italian seasoning blend. Add fresh basil to and fresh parsley finish at the end end for more flavor.
      • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil, or avocado oil.
      • Pasta: Choose small pasta shapes in either gluten-free, wheat pasta, or grain-free pasta. Ditalini pasta, elbow macaroni, or small shells work well.
      • Tomatoes: Canned diced tomatoes, chopped, or crushed tomatoes. Use high-quality tomatoes such as Italian San Marzano tomatoes.
      • Parmesan cheese: Grated Parmesan for a rich salty finishing touch at serving.
      • Parmesan rind: If you have one, it adds a nice depth of flavor and umami richness to the minestrone.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper.

      Chef's Tip: Homemade chicken broth makes the best minestrone soup! It's richer in flavor and more nutritious than store-bought versions. Try my Instant Pot chicken broth for a fast batch, or my slow-simmered chicken bone broth for extra depth. Prefer a plant-based option? Homemade vegetable broth is easy to make and adds great flavor to any soup. Any way you make it, use a rich broth for great soup.

      Substitutions and Variations:

      • For a little heat, add red pepper flakes.
      • For greens, add a couple handfuls of baby spinach leaves just before serving. Chopped kale and chard are good too.
      • For a vegetarian minestrone or a vegan option, use vegetable broth, and omit the chicken, using both red and white kidney beans. 
      • Use frozen green beans instead of fresh.
      • Don't like kidney beans? Use navy beans, great northern beans, or even garbanzo beans.

      For another classic, big, flavorful soup, make a pot of Italian Ribollita Soup.

      Minestrone Recipe Instructions

      Start a large pot of water to cook the pasta. Cook it just to al dente as it will soften more in the minestrone.

      Chopped onions in olive oil in a dutch oven sauteeing.
      1. Saute onion in olive oil until soft, 3-4 minutes. Add garlic, cook 1 minute.
      Carrots, onion, and celery in a pot for soup with a wood spatula.
      1. Add the carrots and celery, cook until softened, 3-4 minutes.
      Mixed vegetables for soup in a stock pot with a wooden spatula.
      1. Add the zucchini, green beans, and herbs. Stir and cook another 3-4 minutes.
      Cannellini beans just added to chicken minestrone soup.
      1. Stir in the beans and tomatoes.
      Golden chicken broth pouring into a pot of chicken vegetable soup.
      1. Add the broth.
      A pot of soup in process showing vegetables, broth, and shredded chicken.
      1. Stir in the chicken and pasta, cook at a gentle simmer until hot to serve.
      A dutch oven full of chicken minestrone soup with a bowl on the side.

      Serving Suggestions

      Chicken minestrone soup is a hearty meal in a bowl. All you need if desired is some crusty bread or a slice of garlic toast. For garnish, add chopped Italian parsley or even a drizzle of pesto, and be sure to sprinkle with real Parmigiano Reggiano!

      Storing and Freezing

      Minestrone soup lasts 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. As the minestrone holds in the refrigerator the pasta absorbs broth so you may need extra broth when reheating, about a ½ cup per serving.

      It's best to freeze minestrone without the pasta and add fresh-cooked pasta when reheating to avoid mushiness.

      I freeze my soup in portions in Souper Cubes! They work great, make freezer storage easy and neat, and they stack. I pop out however many cubes I need for a batch of soup. Plus they are good for way more than soup and broth.

      Recipe FAQS

      Can I use frozen vegetables?

      Yes, frozen green beans, peas, carrots, or zucchini work well-just add them near the end of cooking so they don't overcook.

      What's the best pasta shape for minestrone?

      Ditalini pasta, elbow macaroni, or small shells are common choices for minestrone, but any small shape works well.

      Can I cook the pasta in the soup?

      Yes, but I recommend you don't. For the best texture, cook the pasta separately and add it just before serving to prevent it from absorbing too much broth.

      Can I use raw chicken instead of cooked rotisserie chicken?

      Yes, simmer raw chicken breasts or thighs (without the skin) in the broth until fully cooked, then shred or chop and return to the soup (removing any bones, or use boneless chicken).

      More Hearty Soup Recipes

      Please check out the soups recipe index for more delicious soup ideas, from creamy purees like this cream of asparagus soup, or a Mexican chicken tortilla soup, to a quick tomato soup made from canned tomatoes.

      • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
        Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
      • Instant pot lentil soup
        Instant Pot Lentil Soup Recipe
      • Navy bean soup with ham and vegetables.
        Instant Pot Navy Bean Soup Recipe (with ham)
      • black bean pumpkin soup
        Creamy Black Bean Pumpkin Soup

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this chicken minestrone soup, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A dutch oven full of chicken minestrone soup with a bowl on the side.

      Chicken Minestrone Soup

      Sally Cameron
      This hearty minestrone soup is packed with healthy vegetables, tasty broth, tender beans, chicken and pasta for a high protein lunch or dinner. Use either GF or regular pasta, and leftover or rotisserie chicken. Big flavors and a meal in a bowl. Top with grated parmesan and fresh chopped parsley to serve.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 35 minutes mins
      Total Time 55 minutes mins
      Course Soup
      Cuisine American, Italian
      Servings 4 to 5 (Yield 10 cups)
      Calories 453 kcal

      Equipment

      • Dutch oven 5 ½ quarts

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ½ tablespoons olive oil
      • 1 ½ cups chopped onion
      • 3 large garlic cloves chopped fine
      • ¾ cup chopped carrots about 3
      • ¾ cup chopped celery 3 ribs
      • 1 ½ teaspoon dried oregano
      • 1 ½ teaspoon dried thyme
      • ½ cup chopped zucchini 1 small
      • ¾ cup chopped raw green beans
      • 15 ounces canned chopped tomatoes or diced tomatoes
      • 15 ounce can of cannellini beans drained, rinsed.
      • 4 cups chicken broth, low sodium
      • 8 ounces rotisserie chicken or leftover chicken chopped
      • 4 ounces elbow pasta GF or wheat
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped parsley optional
      • ¼ cup grated parmesan cheese optional

      Optional

      • 1 parmesan rind

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Pasta water

      • First get a large pot of water on to boil for the pasta. Add a little salt. When the water boils, add the pasta a cook according to the box directions. When done, drain through a strainer, rinse briefly with cold water and save for adding to the soup.

      Make the soup

      • In a large heavy pot (5 ½ quart dutch oven) over medium heat, add the oil and when hot, cook the onion until soft, 3-4 minutes. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute. Add the carrots and celery and cook until softened, 4-5 minutes.
      • Stir in the dried thyme and oregano, then the zucchini, green beans, and tomatoes. Add the beans, broth, chicken, salt and pepper, parmesan rind if using, and bring to a simmer. Turn the heat down and allow soup to cook for 7-10 minutes to allow flavors to blend.
        Add the pasta towards the end and heat through. Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and sprinkles of grated parmesan cheese if desired.

      Notes

      • For the dried herbs, you can also use 1 tablespoon of a dried Italian blend. 
      • For a little heat, add red pepper flakes.
      • For greens, add a couple handfuls of baby spinach leaves just before serving. Kale and chard are traditional too (but they need to cook longer than the spinach).
      • For a vegetarian or vegan minestrone, use vegetable broth, and omit the chicken, using both red and white kidney beans.
      • Use frozen green beans instead of fresh.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 453kcalCarbohydrates: 59gProtein: 33gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 54mgSodium: 713mgPotassium: 926mgFiber: 11gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 8216IUVitamin C: 28mgCalcium: 190mgIron: 6mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Easy Sugar Free Lemon Curd

      02/26/2025 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      A square jar filled with lemon curd dripping off a silver spoon.

      Smooth, creamy, and packed with bright lemon flavor, this sugar-free lemon curd is a deliciously sweet treat-without the sugar! Naturally low-carb and a keto lemon curd, it's perfect for spreading on toast, swirling into yogurt, or stirring into overnight oats for a refreshing citrus boost. Versatile and easy to make, it's a must-try for lemon lovers. Check out the 'How to Use Lemon Curd' section for even more ways to enjoy it!

      Creamy lemon curd dripping from a silver soon over a jar.

      Winter is the best season to make this easy lemon curd when lemons are at their peak. Traditional lemon curd is made with eggs, lemon juice, sugar, butter, and zest. The only difference in this sugar-free version is swapping sugar for powdered allulose (a natural sugar alternative). It took extensive testing to get the recipe just right-but the results were worth it! The curd is just as smooth, creamy, and full of bright citrus flavor-without the added sugar.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Sugar-Free Lemon Curd

      • Bright lemon flavor.
      • Sugar-free, low carb lemon curd, and keto diet friendly.
      • Simple ingredients and simple to make.
      • Won't spike your blood sugar with 1 net carb per serving.
      • Make it thick, or make it pourable.

      Love lemon? Try this tasty, high protein salad, lentil quinoa salad with a tangy lemon vinaigrette.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Simple ingredients for  sugar-free lemon curd, lemon, sugar, eggs, unsalted butter, on a counter.
      • Lemons: Fresh lemons for the juice and the zest. Both regular Eureka and Meyer lemons can work, but see the notes on lemon below.
      • Sweetener: Use pure powdered allulose not an allulose blend. The powder dissolves beautifully and does not get grainy (crystalize).
      • Butter: Use unsalted butter for lemon curd, no salt!
      • Eggs: Large eggs, no cracks. I've skipped the whole egg and used just yolks for an extra rich lemon curd.
      • Powdered citric acid: ONLY IF you are using Meyer lemons as the pH of the juice is not high enough to set the lemon curd. Buy a small bag online. This is how I make mine as I have a Meyer lemon tree.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements and full recipe.

      What to do with those egg whites? Make a batch of these easy chocolate chip meringues.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For dairy-free - Use a plant butter, stick style not tub.
      • Smoother lemon curd - Omit the lemon zest. 

      Love lemon desserts? Try this lemon posset recipe or this fantastic lemon olive oil cake.

      Chef's note on sweeteners: What is allulose? Allulose is a natural sugar substitute and naturally occurring sugar found at low levels in figs, raisins, wheat, maple syrup and molasses. It is not a sugar alcohol, like xylitol or erythritol (which I don't recommend). While the bag lists carbs in allulose, your body does not metabolize it. Adjusting for that fact, there is only 1 gram of carbs per serving. It's a terrific alternative sweetener of choice. Find more information on allulose here from Cleveland Clinic.

      Does the Kind of Lemon Matter?

      I tested this sugar-free lemon curd extensively-with both Eureka (standard grocery store variety) and Meyer lemons (I grow them), different ratios of yolks to whole eggs, and varying sweeteners-to find the best results. The type of lemons and sugar-free sweetener you use makes a big difference in how your lemon curd sets.

      Standard Eureka or Lisbon lemons are ideal because their higher acidity helps the curd thicken properly.

      Meyer lemons, on the other hand, have a lower acidity (higher pH), which means the curd won't set as firmly. If using Meyer lemons, you'll need to add powdered citric acid to compensate; otherwise, the curd will remain more of a pourable lemon sauce (which is delicious too!).

      In terms of thickening and setting, it's best to let the lemon juice and heat do it's job. I tried adding xanthan gum to one batch that was thin, but it became gummy.

      Recipe Instructions

      Never made lemon curd? Here are step-by-step photos to show you how to make the best lemon curd, and all without sugar!

      A stainless steel small sieve and sifted powder sugar on a white cutting board.
      1. Sift the powdered allulose to remove clumps or rocks.
      Prep work for lemon curd on a cutting board with lemon juice, butter, and egg yolks.
      1. Zest and juice the lemons, separate the eggs, and cube the butter.
      Bright golden yellow egg yolks whisked together in a glass bowl.
      1. Whisk egg yolks until smooth.
      A stainless steel pan with lemon juice, butter, and allulose sugar.
      1. Add lemon juice, allulose, and butter to a 3 quart medium saucepan, melt and whisk until smooth over medium heat.
      Bright yellow egg yolks in a bowl with a steel whisk
      1. When butter-allulose-juice mixture is hot, slowly drizzle into the egg yolks whisking continually (tempering).
      Thickened, cooked lemon curd ready to be strained from the pan.
      1. Add the yolks mixture back into the pan, turn heat down, cook over medium-low heat whisking until thickened and reaches 180°F, 1-2 minutes.
      Straining cooked lemon curd through a sieve into a clean bowl.
      7. Immediately strain the cooked lemon curd through a sieve, pushing it through with a large spoon, spatula, or small ladle. Add lemon zest if desired.

      Pour hot sugar-free lemon curd into a clean jar, cap, and refrigerate 4 hours to thicken or overnight. If the lemon curd thickens more than you want, stir in a little fresh lemon juice to thin to your preferred consistency.

      Chef's tip: If you want to make a curd with other citrus fruits such as lime juice, it's as acidic as lemon juice so the curd should thicken properly. But it's sharper in flavor and you might need to adjust the allulose or add another sweetener to your taste. Consider combining lemon juice and lime juice for a lemon-lime curd!

      How to Use Lemon Curd

      A jar of yogurt topped with lemon curd and fresh blueberries with a silver spoon.

      Here are a dozen ways to use sugar-free lemon curd:

      • Spread between cake layers for a bright, citrusy filing.
      • Swirl into muffin batter.
      • Spread on toast, scones, or muffins.
      • Fill or top crepes for an elegant dessert.
      • Top pancakes, like these Buckwheat pancakes for a terrific breakfast treat.
      • Dollop on gluten-free waffles.
      • Swirl into vanilla ice cream.
      • Mix into oatmeal or high-protein overnight oats.
      • Make a lemon curd blueberry yogurt parfait.
      • Fill cream puffs.
      • Pipe into vanilla cupcakes as lemon curd cupcakes.
      • Thin the curd with a little lemon juice and pour it over fresh fruit or cheesecake.

      Storage & Freezing

      According to the National Center for Home Food Preservation, if you store lemon curd in a well sealed airtight container in the refrigerator, it will last for up to a month (but it never lasts that long at my house).

      Lemon curd can also be frozen for up to three months. Be sure to leave a half inch of air space in a well-sealed container. For thawing, place the container in the refrigerator for 24-48 hours.

      One of my favorite summer grilling recipes for chicken breasts uses this terrific easy blender lemon marinade.

      A glass jar of bright yellow lemon curd with a bowl of lemons on the side.

      Recipe FAQs

      Why did my lemon curd turn out too thin?

      Lemon curd thickens as it cools. If it's still too thin after chilling, it may not have been cooked long enough. Cook until it coats the back of a spoon and reaches 175°F-180°F (77-80°C).

      It might also be the type of lemon you used. Regular grocery lemons such as Eureka and Lisbon lemons have higher acidity which helps thicken the curd. Meyer lemons have lower acidity and need additional citric acid to help set the lemon curd.

      Can I make lemon curd without butter?

      Yes! The butter adds richness and a silky texture, but you can omit it for a lighter, dairy-free version or use a non-dairy butter.

      Can I use bottled lemon juice instead of fresh?

      Simply put, no. Use fresh lemons. Bottled lemon juice usually contains preservatives and lacks the bright, fresh citrus taste needed for a good lemon curd. It also might vary in it's acidity levels and the acidity of fresh lemon juice is needed to thicken and set the lemon curd.

      How can I make my lemon curd extra smooth?

      Strain lemon curd through a fine-mesh sieve after cooking to remove any bits of cooked egg. Straining ensures a silky, professional-quality curd. You can also skip the lemon zest.

      More Lovely Lemon Recipes

      If you love lemon, here are both sweet and savory lemon recipes to try.

      • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
        Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade
      • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
        Lemony Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
      • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
        Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
      • lemon ice cream
        Homemade Lemon Custard Ice Cream

      Did You Make Lemon Curd?

      If you make sugar-free lemon curd, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A square jar filled with lemon curd dripping off a silver spoon.

      Sugar-free Lemon Curd

      Sally Cameron
      Tangy, sweet, tart, bright, easy to make and versatile. This sugar-free lemon curd ditches the carbs and is keto-friendly too. Lots of ways to use it!
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 10 minutes mins
      Total Time 15 minutes mins
      Course condiment
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 to 8 servings: Yield 1 cup
      Calories 122 kcal

      Equipment

      • Fine strainer
      • 3 quart pan I use a saucier, a great addition to your collection.
      • Whisk
      • Microplane zester
      • Citrus juicer electric or hand juicer
      • digital kitchen thermometer

      Ingredients
        

      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter sub plant butter for no-dairy
      • ¾ cup pure POWDERED allulose, sifted well not allulose with monk fruit
      • 6 large egg yolks
      • 2 large lemons, juiced and zested need ½ cup juice, optional zest
      • ¼ teaspoon powdered citric acid for Meyer lemon juice only

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Prep work

      • Separate the eggs for the yolks and save the whites for another use. Sift the allulose as it's often lumpy in the bag. Juice and zest the lemons. Strain the lemon juice. You need ½ a cup of lemon juice.

      Cook the lemon curd

      • Melt butter in the pan over medium low. Add the lemon juice (and citric acid if needed) and sifted allulose and whisk until smooth. Whisk the yolks until smooth in a medium bowl.
        When the butter lemon blend is hot, slowly drizzle it into the egg yolks whisking continually until totally incorporated. This is called tempering, so the eggs don't scramble.
      • Pour the entire mix back into the pan and cook, whisking continually, until it thickens and reaches 175°F-180°F. Pour immediately through a sieve to catch any cooked egg bits. Stir in 1 tablespoon lemon zest if using.
      • When it's finished, pour the liquid lemon curd into a clean jar, cap tightly and refrigerate 4 hours or overnight until set.
        If after refrigeration the lemon curd is thicker than you want, add a little fresh squeezed lemon juice and stir to reach the desired consistency.
      • Lemon curd lasts in an airtight container for up to one month or frozen for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator for 24-48 hours and stir well.

      Notes

      Storage: Sugar-free lemon curd lasts up to 1 month in an airtight container refrigerated and can be frozen for up to 3 months. 
      Notes on carbs: While a bag of allulose lists carbs on the nutrition label, as our bodies do not metabolize allulose the carbs zero out. The only carbs are from the lemon juice. 
      Lemon juice note: If you are using Meyer lemon juice you must increase the acidity with citric acid. Add a ¼ teaspoon to the allulose after measuring.
      What to do with extra egg whites? Make these Forgotten Cookies (like chocolate chip meringue cookies). 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2tablespoonsCalories: 122kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 3gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 204mgSodium: 9mgPotassium: 21mgSugar: 0.1gVitamin A: 478IUCalcium: 24mgIron: 0.5mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Creamy Paprika Sauce Recipe

      01/06/2025 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

      A glass jar of bright orange paprika sauce with a golden spoon and a bag of paprika behind.

      This rich and creamy sauce with brilliant orange color is paprika sauce, owing its gorgeous color and flavor to real Hungarian paprika. Yes, paprika! Often overlooked as just a garnish for deviled eggs, it truly shines as the star of this fantastic and flavorful sauce. Ready in just 25 minutes, this versatile sauce pairs beautifully with lean meats, chicken, fish and seafood, crowning any dish with its beautiful flavor and color.

      A jar of vivid orange paprika sauce with a gold spoon and paprika sprinkled on the table.

      When Hungarian friends gifted me a bag of fresh, vibrant paprika straight from Budapest, I was blown away by its incredible color and fragrance. It was worlds apart from the dull, dusty paprika I was used to from the grocery store.

      While I use a lot of smoked paprika in my recipes, regular paprika had been sitting on the shelf-until this game-changer arrived. Making paprika sauce is so simple, and its versatility will have you reaching for it again and again!

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Paprika sauce (also called paprika cream sauce) is easy to make.
      • Versatile, for meats, chicken, fish, and seafood, even eggs and omelets.
      • Makes the most of high quality paprika.
      • It's authentic, approved by my Hungarian friends!

      Chef's tip on buying paprika: Skip the clear bags or jars and buy real Hungarian paprika in tins or solid bags where it is protected from light to maintain color and potency. Store it away from light and heat.

      If you love making homemade sauces, try this homemade cocktail sauce, or this gluten-free Hoisin sauce.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for paprika sauce in prep bowls on a gray counter.
      • Paprika: Buy fresh Hungarian paprika, also labeled sweet paprika. Check a speciality spice store and online sources versus the grocery store for best quality.
      • Butter: Buy unsalted butter so you control the salt level.
      • Onion: Hungarian cooking uses lots of onion. Use yellow, brown, or white onion, and avoid red onions, which aren't traditional and can overpower the sauce.
      • Garlic: A clove of fresh garlic, it's used with restraint in Hungarian cooking.
      • Tomato paste: Adds color, depth of flavor, and helps thicken the paprika sauce.
      • Broth: Low sodium chicken broth or vegetable broth.
      • Cream: Use heavy cream or heavy whipping cream.
      • Sour Cream: It wouldn't be Hungarian without sour cream! Get full fat sour cream; do not use low fat.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt.

      Substitutions and Variations

      This is one recipe where I do not use black pepper. I don't want black specks in the beautiful orange sauce. If you want to add pepper, try a little white pepper.

      • Use smoked paprika powder for a smoky flavor variation (delicious but not traditional).
      • Use part hot paprika for a spicy sauce.
      • Use creme fraiche in place of full fat sour cream.
      • If you want to spice it up afterwards, add a little of your favorite hot sauce. 

      For another delicious creamy sauce, try this roast pork tenderloin with mustard cream sauce.

      Chef's tip on paprika: Sweet paprika (made from sweet mild red peppers) is the most commonly used in Hungarian cuisine. Hot Hungarian Paprika, made from hotter varieties of peppers (similar to cayenne pepper or a  chili pepper) adds heat and is often used alongside sweet paprika for a more balanced flavor. Rose Paprika is a milder, slightly aromatic type made from the middle of the pepper. Smoked paprika is not traditional in classic Hungarian recipes, but can be used as a modern twist to add a smoky depth of flavor.

      Recipe Instructions

      Cooking chopped onions in a stainless steel pan in butter.
      Step 1: Saute onions in butter until soft over medium-low heat, about 3 minutes. Do not brown them. Add the garlic and cook another 30 seconds.
      Cooking onions turned orange from adding tomato paste.
      Step 2: Stir in tomato paste and cook another 2 minutes.
      Paprika added to a pan of cooking onions turning it bright orange.
      Step 3: Add paprika and stir into onion mixture. Cook another 2 minutes.
      Simmering onions and paprika in a steel pan becoming a sauce.
      Step 4: Add broth and simmer for 2 minutes.
      Heavy cream added to a pan of simmering red paprika sauce.
      Step 5: Stir in heavy cream until smooth and add salt.
      Simmering paprika sauce in a stainless steel sauce pan.
      Step 6: Simmer sauce for 2 minutes until blended and thickened.
      Bright red sauce in a small blender container.
      Step 7: Puree the sauce in a blender to smooth it out, 30 seconds.
      Bright orange paprika sauce adding sour cream to finish.
      Step 8: Add the sauce back to the pan, finish it with sour cream and heat through. Taste and adjust with a little more salt if desired.
      Vivid orange paprika sauce in a jar with a gold spoon and sprinkles of red paprika on the plate.

      Chef's tool tip: For making paprika sauce, I use a 3 quart sauce pan called a saucier. Unlike traditional saucepans with sharp corners, saucier pans have gently curved sides, making it easier to stir and whisk without food getting stuck in the corners. It's a terrific addition to your kitchen collection. It's also my go-to pan for risotto. Sauciers are good all-purpose pans that are easy to clean too.

      Serving Suggestions

      Because paprika sauce is rich and creamy, it pairs well with:

      • A great way to dress up simple roasted or grilled lean meats, like this grilled flank steak or a simple seared pork tenderloin.
      • Simple grilled, roasted, sautéed, or smoked chicken breast.
      • Lean fish and seafood that needs some added richness such as halibut, cod, mahi mahi, or easy baked shrimp.
      • It's even good with eggs such as poached eggs (instead of hollandaise), and omelets.
      • Paprika sauce takes an easy chicken recipe to another level.

      I generally make paprika sauce ahead of time and re-heat on a very low temperature in a small pan. Don't get the sauce too hot as it might break (separate). If it does, whisk it back together to serve.

      Paprika sauce holds for 4-5 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. It's not a sauce that freezes due to the dairy content.

      Recipe FAQs

      What type of paprika should I use for paprika sauce?

      Traditionally, Hungarians make paprika sauce with sweet paprika. To make it spicy, add a little hot paprika. And while smoked paprika is not traditional, it does add a terrific flavor and modern edge to paprika sauce. Try them all!

      What dishes go well with paprika sauce?

      Because paprika sauce is rich and creamy, serve it with lean grilled or roasted meats, chicken breasts, fish and seafood, or roasted vegetables. It's even good with eggs, especially in place of Hollandaise for Eggs Benedict, and omelets. It's terrific with pork tenderloin and pork chops.

      Can I serve paprika sauce cold?

      Paprika sauce is even good served cold as a dip or spread as with the fat content, it gets very thick when refrigerated. Try thinning it down and using as a cold sauce.

      How do I fix broken paprika sauce?

      Because of the sour cream, if you get paprika sauce to hot after adding the sour cream, it might separate or what is called "break". To fix it, whisk fast to re-incorporate the elements. If that does not help, put it in a blender on low speed.

      Another trick for next time you make it is using creme fraiche instead of regular, full fat sour cream, as the higher fat content of the creme fraiche won't break in sauces.

      What's the difference between Spanish paprika and Hungarian paprika?

      Both made from ground dried peppers, but they differ in flavor, smokiness, and heat levels due to the types of peppers used and their production process.

      Spanish paprika tends to be smoky, rich, and slightly sweet from drying the peppers over wood fires, giving it a rich, darker red color.

      Hungarian paprika tends to be sweet, earthy, and slightly fruity, with a more vibrant pepper taste. It's typically not smoked, allowing the natural sweetness of the peppers to shine through. They are both terrific and hold an important place in your spice cabinet.

      More Super Sauce Recipes

      Sauce makes everything good, transforming the most basic recipes into something fun and delicious. And be sure to check out the sauce recipes index page.

      • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
        Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
      • roasted tomato marinara
        The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce
      • tomatillo salsa verde
        Green Enchilada Sauce with Tomatillos
      • asian almond sauce in a bowl
        No-Cook Asian Dipping Sauce With Almond Butter

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this paprika sauce, please comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating. They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

      📖 Recipe

      A glass jar of bright orange paprika sauce with a golden spoon and a bag of paprika behind.

      Paprika Sauce

      Sally Cameron
      Rich and creamy paprika sauce is delicious served with lean meats, chicken, fish and seafood. It's good too over poached eggs and omelets.
      4.50 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 20 minutes mins
      Total Time 25 minutes mins
      Course Sauce
      Cuisine American, hungarian
      Servings 8 Yield 1 ¾ cups
      Calories 90 kcal

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
      • ¾ cup chopped onion ½ medium onion
      • 1 small garlic clove finely chopped
      • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
      • 1 ½ tablespoons paprika sweet paprika
      • ½ cup chicken broth low sodium or homemade
      • ½ cup heavy whipping cream
      • ⅓ cup full fat sour cream
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt or more to taste

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Melt the butter in a medium (3-quart) saucepan over medium-low heat. Add the chopped onion and cook until soft but not browned, about 3 minutes. Add the garlic and cook another 30-60 seconds, stirring.
      • Stir in the tomato paste and cook for 2 minutes. Add the paprika and cook another 2 minutes, stirring, to bloom the spices and release their oils.
      • Stir in the broth and increase the heat slightly. Simmer for 2-3 minutes to blend. Stir in the broth and increase the heat slightly. Simmer for 2-3 minutes to blend. Add the heavy cream and salt, stirring until smooth. Cook for 2 more minutes to thicken slightly. Puree the sauce in a blender to smooth it out, 20-30 seconds.
      • To finish the sauce, add the puree back to the pan and stir or whisk in the sour cream until smooth. Taste for seasoning and adjust with any additional salt for your preference. Sauce is ready to serve.

      Notes

      Chef's Note: I've tested this sauce with ¼ cup, ½ cup, and ¾ cup of heavy cream. While all three amounts work, ½ cup strikes the best balance-it keeps the sauce rich and creamy without muting the paprika flavor. If you prefer a lighter sauce, use ¼ cup. For a richer, more velvety result, go with ¾ cup.
      Options
      • Use smoked paprika powder for a smoky flavor variation (delicious but not traditional).
      • Use part hot paprika for a spicy sauce.
      • If you want to spice it up afterwards, add a little of your favorite hot sauce.
      • Start with ⅓ cup sour cream, then taste. If you prefer a tangier, richer finish, add a little more to taste. 
      Make paprika sauce ahead of time and re-heat on a low temperature in a small pan. Don't get the sauce too hot as it might break (separate). If it does, whisk it back together to serve.
      Paprika sauce holds for 4-5 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. It's not a sauce that freezes due to the dairy content.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 90kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 1gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.5gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 24mgSodium: 99mgPotassium: 101mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 983IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 19mgIron: 0.4mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Forgotten Cookies (chocolate chip meringues)

      10/23/2024 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

      A round white plate piled with chocolate chip meringue cookies.

      Forgotten cookies, called so because you make them, put them in the oven, and forget about them! In the morning you'll wakeup to freshly baked cookies that are crisp on the outside filled with chocolate chips and nuts. It's an old fashioned, vintage kind of recipe for everyone's cookie recipe file. Once you make them, you will never forget these cookies! They are easy and fun to make.

      A plate of Forgotten Cookies with chocolate chips and walnuts on a white serving plate.

      Similar to chocolate chip meringue cookies, forgotten cookies are a favorite for home cooks because they are simple to make, inexpensive, and can be flavored with a variety of add-ins like chocolate chips, nuts, coconut, or dried fruit. This method is fun, because you make them and forget about them until they are crisp and ready to munch on. Their light as a cloud!

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Light and airy meringue cookies with crunch from walnuts and chocolate chips.
      • They crisp overnight in the oven, ready in the morning. 
      • Great for busy bakers as they are so easy.
      • Simple ingredients.

      For another easy and fun sweet treat, make this chocolate bark bites with cranberries and nuts.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for chocolate chip meringue cookies in prep bowls on counter.
      • Eggs: Large eggs; all you need is the egg whites (no egg yolks). 
      • Sugar: White sugar; superfine works even better with meringues than standard granular.
      • Cream of tartar: Stabilizes the egg whites for the meringue.
      • Salt: Just a pinch, I use sea salt.
      • Chocolate chips: Your favorite chocolate chips, semisweet or dark chocolate, regular or low-sugar. The mini chocolate chips work well too. Use no-sugar chips to reduce overall sugar in recipes.
      • Nuts: Walnuts provide a nice crunch and texture to these cookies. 
      • Vanilla: Real vanilla extract for the best flavor. Here is my favorite vanilla.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements. 

      Love hot chocolate? Here's spiked hot chocolate with optional liqueurs. It's like a liquid dessert. There's a kids version too.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Use pecans instead of walnuts.
      • For alternative chocolate chips try: GoodSam chocolate chips, date-sweetened chocolate chips (they are good!), or these chocolate chips that are free from 14 common allergens. I'm shying away from brands with erythritol due to a recent study, and malitol, another hybrid sugar that gives some people digestive upset.
      • Try white chocolate chips, mini chocolate chips, or mint chips.
      • Chopped coconut is a nice add (unsweetened, not the sticky stuff).
      • Add a little cinnamon for cinnamon meringues.
      • Try crushed peppermint candy at Christmas or peppermint extract.

      Here's a bite-sized treat that's actually healthy but tastes like it's not; peanut butter oatmeal protein balls with chocolate chips. Keep them in the freezer!

      Chef's tip on whipping egg whites: Egg whites whip the best when they are at room temperature, but they separate more easily when the eggs are cold. So separate your eggs while they are cold, then allow the whites to warm up to room temperature for the best whipping and a nice stiff meringue.

      Recipe Instructions

      Be sure the egg whites are at room temperature before you start making forgotten cookies for best results. Cold egg whites do not whip well. Pre-heat the oven to 350º. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil.

      Beaten egg white to make meringues at the light foamy stage in a stainless steel bowl.
      Step 1: With a hand mixer on low speed, whip egg whites, cream of tartar, and salt to a foamy stage.
      Meringues whipped to soft peak stage in a silver bowl.
      Step 2: Increase speed. Keep beating until soft peaks form. Add vanilla.
      Egg whites for meringue whipped to stiff peaks, ready to proceed.
      Step 3: Incrrease speed to high and str gradually adding sugar. Whip egg whites to stiff peaks.
      Properly whipped stiff egg white on a beater over a steel bowl.
      Step 4: Example of perfect stiff peaks, ready to proceed with recipe.
      Folding chopped nuts into whipped egg white batter
      Step 5: Gently fold chopped nuts into the stiff egg whites with a rubber spatula.
      Folding chocolate chips into meringue batter for cookies.
      Step 6: Gently fold in chocolate chips to complete the meringue batter.
      Forgotten meringue cookies portioned onto parchment lined cookie trays for baking.
      Step 7: Portion meringue batter onto parchment lined cookie trays. Place the cookie tray (s) into the oven, close the door, and turn the oven off. Do not open the oven until yo're ready to test to see if they are ready; it might be overnight or as little as 5 hours.

      Note on timing: In recipe testing, I've let forgotten cookies go as long as 17 hours and also had them ready in as little as 5 hours. Pull one from the oven and test around 5 hours to see if they are crisp enough for you.

      Chef's tip: How to make perfectly portioned cookies? Use a terrific little tool called a disher or a cookie scoop. They are handy for quickly and easily portioning many things, especially cookie batter and dough. Find them online. The size I use for forgotten cookies is the #30. The higher the number, the smaller the size. If you have a cookie scoop of a different size, say a #40, the cookies will be a little smaller (more cookies). For more free-form cookies, just use a tablespoon and dollop them onto the baking sheet.

      Forgotten Cookies vs. Chocolate Chip Meringues

      Forgotten cookies and chocolate chip meringue cookies have basically the same ingredients, but they are baked differently. 

      Forgotten cookies are placed in a pre-heated oven, then the oven is turned off and the cookies are left to slowly dry and crisp overnight (I've made them anywhere from 5 hours to 17 hours).

      This unique method creates a crisp exterior while the inside remains slightly chewy. Meringue cookies are baked at a low temperature for an extended time until they are fully dry throughout. This creates a uniformly crisp and light textured cookie.

      If you leave forgotten cookies in the oven long enough, they will completely dry like a chocolate chip meringue.

      A small plate with a bitten into meringue cookie and a whole cookie.

      Here's another way you can bake the forgotten cookies. Use ¾ of the chocolate chips folded into the batter with the walnuts, and sprinkle the other ¼ cup on top before baking.

      Chocolate chip meringue cookies with chocolate chips sprinkled on top before baking on a white plate.

      Recipe Tips for Success

      • Use room temperature egg whites. 
      • Skip plastic bowls to whip meringues, choose a metal bowl, glass bowl, or ceramic.
      • Don't try to make meringues on humid or rainy days.
      • Be sure your tools a squeaky clean.
      • Use the cream of tartar for stiffer whites. 

      Serving and Storage

      Enjoy forgotten cookies anytime a cookie snack attack happens! They also make a nice gift from the kitchen at Christmas. Be sure cookies are completely cool before storing or they might get chewy and sticky versus being crisp. 

      Because forgotten cookies are meringues, they are fragile and must be packaged carefully to avoid crushing. Use a cookie tin or other stiff airtight container that seals well to protect them as they are highly susceptible to moisture. 

      To stack them in a cookie tin, place a layer of parchment paper between each layer and don't overcrowd them. Store the container at room temperature in a cool, dry place. Avoid storing them in the refrigerator, as the humidity can cause the cookies to soften or become sticky.

      Forgotten cookies can typically be stored for up to 5-7 days if kept in an airtight container at room temperature.

      A round white plate piled with chocolate chip meringue cookies.

      Recipe FAQs

      Why did my forgotten cookies turn out chewy or sticky?

      Chewy or stick forgotten cookies could be due to several reasons. Humid conditions in the environment, insufficient baking or drying time, or improper storage could be the reasons.

      How long should I leave forgotten cookies in the oven?

      Overnight is the typical instruction, so about 8 hours. Exact timing depends on the heat retention of your oven and the size of your cookies. 

      Can I make forgotten cookies without cream of tartar?

      You can, but the risk is not getting nice stiff meringue when the egg whites are whipped as cream of tartar is a stabilizer and creates a firmer meringue.

      Why did my meringue not reach stiff peaks?

      Even the smallest amount of fat, such as egg yolk, may prevent the meringue from reaching optimal stiffness. Even residual fat in the  mixing bowl can effect the meringue development. Be sure your bowl and utensils are squeaky clean when making meringue. 

      More Sweet Treat Recipes

      For more sweet ideas, check out the desserts index page for inspiration!

      • A stack of crunchy cookies on a counter with a glass of milk and cookies cooling behind.
        Cranberry Oatmeal Cookies Recipe (gluten-free)
      • Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.
        Fudgy Gluten-Free Chocolate Brownies
      • Bark bites on a round display plate for serving.
        Chocolate Bark Recipe (bark bites)
      • Pumpkin snack cake with chocolate chips.
        Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake (Snack Cake)

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make forgotten cookies, please comment and let me know how you liked them. If they were a hit, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

      📖 Recipe

      A round white plate piled with chocolate chip meringue cookies.

      Forgotten Cookies

      Sally Cameron
      Here's a recipe that should be in everyone's cookie file. Once made, you will never forget these cookies. Note, room temperature whites whip better than cold ones.
      5 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 1 minute min
      Drying time 8 hours hrs
      Total Time 8 hours hrs 16 minutes mins
      Course Cookies, Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 10 yield 20 cookies
      Calories 171 kcal

      Equipment

      • Hand mixer
      • Baking sheet
      • Parchment paper
      • Cookie scoop (aka disher) I use the #30

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 large egg whites at room temperature (important!)
      • ⅔ cup sugar superfine works best if you have it
      • 1 cup chocolate chips
      • 1 cup chopped walnuts pecans
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • ⅛ teaspoon cream of tartar
      • 1 pinch salt

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. Line a cookie baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
      • Using a hand mixer, beat egg whites with cream of tartar and salt starting on slow speed until foamy. Increase speed and beat whites until soft peaks form. Increase speed to high and begin adding sugar gradually until all sugar is added and peaks are stiff and glossy. Gently fold the chocolate chips and nuts in by hand with a rubber spatula.
      • Drop cookie dough by tablespoons full onto the parchment. Alternatively for portioning, use a #30 cookie scoop (aka a disher, notes below). Place the cookies in the oven, turn the oven off, and allow the cookies to slowly dry and crisp overnight in the oven, door closed. Do not open the oven.
        NOTE: I've let forgotten cookies go as long as 17 hours (super crisp) and also had them ready in as little as 5 hours. Pull one from the tray and test around 5 hours to see if they are crisp enough for you.
      • In the morning, remove the cookies and taste test one. Cool cookies on a wire rack and package in an airtight container or cookie tin with a tight fitting lid. To layer cookies, place a piece of parchment or wax paper between the layers.
        Cookies keep on the counter for about a week. Do not refrigerate, as moisture is the enemy of meringues.

      Notes

      Variations:
      • Use pecans instead of walnuts.
      • Add some chopped coconut (unsweetened, not the sticky stuff).
      • Add a little cinnamon.
      • Use finely chopped chocolate instead of chips.
      • Add crushed peppermint or use peppermint chips for Christmas.
      •  
      •  
      •  

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2cookiesCalories: 171kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 2gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 15mgPotassium: 121mgFiber: 1gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 2IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 25mgIron: 0.3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Forgotten cookies, called so because you make the batter and portion them, then put them in the oven and forget about them overnight. An old fashioned treat and cookie recipe that should be in everyone's cookie file. Once made, you will never forget these cookies. Note, room temperature whites whip better than cold ones.

      Makes: about 15-16 cookies

      Ingredients

      • 2 large or extra large egg whites (at room temperature)
      • ⅛ teaspoon cream of tartar
      • A pinch of salt
      • ⅔ cup sugar
      • 1 cup chocolate chips
      • 1 cup chopped walnuts
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

      Directions

      1. Pre-heat the oven to 350º. Line a baking sheet with baking parchment paper.
      2. Using an electric hand mixer, beat egg whites with cream of tartar and salt until whites are stiff. Fold in the stevia, chips and walnuts by hand. This will make a flatter cookie. See notes below for options.
      3. Drop tablespoonfuls of the batter onto the parchment lined baking sheet. You should make about 15-16 cookies. Place the baking sheet in the oven and turn it off. Leave the cookies to bake and dry until morning, or about 6-8 hours, until crisp.

      Notes on sugar options - If you are going to use all sugar or half sugar/half stevia, add the sugar to the egg whites when they are frothy when beating with the mixer. Beat until stiff, the fold in chips and nuts.  If you want more of a mounded cookie versus a flat cookie, do this for the all stevia version too.[/recipe]

      Subs: pecans for walnuts, what about for a nut allergy?

      Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets

      11/07/2024 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

      Crispy golden air fryer chicken cutlets on a gray serving platter.

      Need a fast and easy dinner? These thin, crispy air fryer chicken cutlets are ready in minutes. With a quick dip in egg wash, a coating of panko or breadcrumbs, and just 11-12 minutes in the air fryer, you'll have golden cutlets that are juicy inside and crunchy outside. I'll share my simple tip for the perfect crust - plus options for making this air fryer chicken cutlets recipe gluten-free or with classic panko. This is weeknight fast food, made better. Much better!

      Four golden crisp air fryer chicken cutlets with a sprinkle of parmesan and parsley, gray platter.

      These air fryer chicken cutlets go with just about everything. Serve them with a simple salad, over pasta, in a sandwich, or as an easy main with roasted veggies. Because they're air fried, you get the crunch of fried chicken with a lot less oil and effort. Perfect for weeknights, meal prep, or whenever you need a dinner everyone will love.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets

      • Fast & easy - these chicken cutlets cook in just 11-12 minutes in the air fryer.
      • Crispy without deep frying - all the crunch, but lighter and with less oil.
      • Gluten-free or not - make them with regular panko or gluten-free crumbs.
      • No flour needed - a simple egg wash and crumb coating keeps them light and golden.

      No air fryer? This reader favorite recipe for easy chicken parmesan is made on the stovetop.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for air fryer breast chicken cutlets in prep bowls on counter.
      • Chicken - Boneless, skinless chicken breasts, sliced into thin cutlets (saves money vs. pre-cut), but buy sliced cutlets for convenience.
      • Egg - Helps the crumb coating stick.
      • Parmesan cheese - Finely grated for salty flavor (omit for dairy-free).
      • Breadcrumbs - Gluten-free panko, regular panko, or classic breadcrumbs all work (see notes below). My homemade breadcrumbs work great.
      • Garlic powder - Adds a savory boost.
      • Onion powder - Enhances flavor depth.
      • Paprika - Regular or smoked, for color and subtle warmth.
      • Italian seasoning - A simple dried herb blend for balance.
      • Fresh parsley - Optional garnish for freshness and color.
      • Cooking spray - Pure avocado or olive oil spray for crisping.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, black pepper, and complete directions.

      Chef's tip on panko vs. breadcrumbs: Panko crumbs give the cutlets an extra-light, crispy texture, while regular breadcrumbs create a finer crust. Both work - it just depends on the crunch you prefer and what you have on hand. I use both.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Spicy chicken cutlets - Add cayenne, chipotle powder, or even a pinch of cumin and coriander for a kick.
      • Herb swap - Use a single dried herb such as oregano or thyme in place of Italian seasoning.
      • Extra golden color - Stir a little turmeric into the seasoning blend.
      • Kid-friendly chicken tenders - Swap chicken breasts for chicken tenders and leave them whole for homemade air fryer chicken tenders.
      • Want Italian-style? For extra Italian flair, boost the breadcrumb mix with an extra sprinkle of Parmesan and a little more dried oregano or basil. It makes the flavor closer to the classic fried Italian chicken cutlets - but lighter and crispier from the air fryer.

      Chef's tip on GF panko crumbs: If you are gluten-free, I tested four brands of gluten-free panko: Ian's gluten-fee panko, Chef Nathan's, Aleias, and 4C gluten-free panko. I found they performed best when refined as bit as the crumbs are generally large. To refine, buzz briefly in a food processor, crush them in a pie plate with a flat meat pounder, or put them in a zip bag and use a rolling pin to crush just a bit. You'll get a finer coating but one that's still textured and crispy. Don't crush too much, leave some texture. The one I prefer is Ians. If you watch carbs, Aleias and 4C had the lowest carbs.

      Examples of the difference in gluten-free panko brands on a white cutting board.

      How to Cut Chicken Breasts into Cutlets

      If you'd rather slice your own chicken breasts into cutlets versus buying the thin-cut chicken breast cutlets, here's how to do it:

      Slicing a boneless, skinless chicken breast in half horizontally for a cutlet.
      1. Using a sharp slicing knife, slice chicken breast through the center. Aim a little high so the bottom piece is not too thin. Start rounded side up.
      A chicken breast being sliced into half for a cutlet with a thin sharp knife.
      1. Slice all of the way through for two cutlets of equal size.

      How to Make Crispy Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets

      For thin-sliced chicken breasts in the air fryer, I can get 4 cutlets in my 6-quart model basket. How many you can fit will depend on the size of your air fryer.

      Crushed breadcrumbs in a plastic bag with a meat pounder beside on counter.
      Step 1: Refine the panko bread crumbs in a zip bag with a smooth-sided meat mallet, glass, or rolling pin.
      Ingredients for coating chicken cutlets in a glass pie plate.
      Step 2: Add all dry ingredients to a pie plate and mix well.
      Chicken cutlets breading station with egg and seasoned coating.
      Step 3: Set up a breading station to coat cutlets (no flour).
      Whisked egg in a glass bowl with a chicken cutlet being coated.
      Step 4: Whisk egg in a small bowl, add the raw chicken cutlet and cover in egg. Do 1 at a time.
      A panko coated chicken breast in a pie plate being breaded.
      Step 5: Place chicken cutlet flat in pie plate and coat well with panko on both sides, pressing crumbs on lightly.
      Four chicken cutlets coated in seasoned panko crumbs on a rimmed baking sheet.
      Step 6: Place breaded chicken cutlets on a baking sheet to transfer to the air fryer.
      Breaded chicken cutlets in an air fryer basket ready for cooking.
      Step 7: Arrange breaded cutlets in a single layer in the air fryer basket and spray lightly with avocado oil.
      Golden air fried chicken breast cutlets in air fryer basket.
      Step 8: Air fry cutlets at 400°F for 11-12 minutes, turning at half way for a golden crust.

      Chef's Tips for Success

      • Refine the crumbs - If your panko pieces are extra large, pulse them briefly in a food processor for a finer, more even coating or crush in a zip bag with a rolling pin or meat pounder.
      • Oil spray matters - A light mist of avocado or olive oil spray helps the coating turn golden and crisp in the air fryer.
      • Cook to temp - Always check chicken with a thermometer; cutlets are done when they reach 165°F at the thickest part.

      For another air fryer recipe that a super side dish, try these air fryer red potatoes.

      Serving Suggestions

      Air fryer chicken cutlets are endlessly versatile. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve them:

      • Classic dinner - Pair with roasted vegetables, rice, and a green salad. Or serve alongside mashed potatoes or whipped sweet potatoes for comfort food style.
      • Light & fresh - Top a crisp salad with sliced cutlets. Try fennel, avocado, and citrus salad with an orange vinaigrette for a bright, seasonal option.
      • With sauces - Serve with homemade BBQ sauce, honey mustard, or cocktail sauce. They're also delicious drizzled with melted butter or a flavored olive oil (lemon or herb).
      • Simple & satisfying - These cutlets are crispy and flavorful enough to enjoy just as they are, straight from the air fryer.

      Serve air fryer chicken cutlets with a dipping sauce such as homemade bbq sauce, or cocktail sauce. Drizzle them with melted butter or a nice flavored olive oil (lemon or herb work well). Really, they are good just plain as they are, nothing needed.

      Crispy golden air fryer chicken cutlets on a gray serving platter.

      Storage & Reheating

      • Refrigerator: Store leftover chicken cutlets in an airtight container for 2-3 days. Place wax paper between layers to protect the coating. The crust will soften slightly as it sits.
      • Reheating: To restore the crunch, reheat in the air fryer at 400°F for 4-5 minutes. They re-crisp beautifully - perfect for lunch with a salad the next day.
      • Cold option: These cutlets are even tasty cold, sliced into sandwiches or added to a salad.

      Recipe FAQs

      How can I make the breading stick better?

      Some recipe teach a full traditional breading with egg wash and flour. I find that just using egg in this recipe works fine and the panko crumbs stick just nicely. No flour needed, and it's a little lighter.

      How do I make chicken cutlets crispy in the air fryer?

      First, use panko crumbs, which are naturally more textured providing for crispy cutlets. Regular breadcrumbs work as well, they are just give a finer coating. Second, a good trick is to spray the top of the chicken cutlets with a little avocado oil spray. They come out nice, golden, and crispy.

      Do I need to flip the chicken cutlets?

      Yes. Turning the cutlets half way insures even cooking. Start with the nicer side up (the presentation side).

      Can I use frozen chicken cutlets?

      If frozen, thaw chicken cutlets before cooking. The safest way to thaw is overnight in the refrigerator. Another way is to quick thaw by submerging the sealed package in cold water and changing every 20-30 minutes until the chicken is thawed.

      More Chicken Recipes

      Most of eat a lot of chicken as it's so versatile. From boneless to bone-in, whole chicken to chicken breasts and thighs, here are more recipes to keep things interesting. Check out the chicken recipes index page for more ideas. More air fryer recipes are on the way!

      • Sliced and whole smoked chicken breasts on a gray serving plate.
        Easy Smoked Chicken Breast
      • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
        Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade
      • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
        Roast Split Chicken Breast
      • A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.
        Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make air fryer chicken cutlets, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      Crispy golden air fryer chicken cutlets on a gray serving platter.

      Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets

      Sally Cameron
      Crispy, crunchy, easy, and fast! For gluten-free use GF panko, or use regular panko if desired.
      5 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 3 minutes mins
      Cook Time 12 minutes mins
      Total Time 15 minutes mins
      Course Dinner, Entree
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4
      Calories 241 kcal

      Equipment

      • Air fryer I use a 6 quart

      Ingredients
        

      Chicken

      • 1-1 ¼ pounds thin cut chicken cutlets or regular boneless, skinless breasts to slice yourself
      • 1 large egg

      Chicken coating

      • ⅔ cup GF or regular panko crumbs I recommend Ian's for GF
      • ⅓ cup finely grated parmesan cheese
      • 1 teaspoon dried Italian seasoning
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
      • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
      • ¼ teaspoon paprika regular or smoked
      • avocado oil spray

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Start here with boneless chicken breasts

      • Place the chicken breasts smooth side up on a cutting board. Position a sharp slicing knife at the top end of the chicken breast parallel to the cutting board centered in the chicken. Slice the chicken into two pieces creating cutlets. See photos in the post. Proceed with the recipe.

      Start here with pre-sliced thin chicken cutlets

      • Add the panko crumbs to a small zip bag and crush lightly to refine them with a meat pounder or rolling pin. Don't crush completely, leave some texture.
      • Add the panko, parmesan, Italian seasoning, salt, pepper, garlic and onion powders, and paprika to a pie plate or flat dish and mix well. Crack the egg into a medium bowl and whisk to blend.
      • Roll one chicken cutlet in the egg to coat, then lay flat in the pie plate of panko and coat both sides of the chicken, gently pressing the crumbs on to cover. Repeat with other three chicken cutlets. Place them on a clean plate or baking sheet and transfer to near the air fryer.
      • Pre-heat the air fryer to 400°F and set timer for 12 minutes. When air fryer is hot, add the cutlets with the nicer side up first. Spray all four lightly with avocado oil. Air fry, turning at 6 minutes. Chicken is done when it is 165°F measure internally with a digital thermometer. Chicken cutlets are ready to serve.

      Notes

      Leftovers
      Leftover chicken cutlets last 2-3 days refrigerated in an airtight container. The panko crust softens a little as they hold. To crisp them up again, pop them back in your air fryer at 400°F for 4-5 minutes. I've done this after a day and they were so good for lunch with a salad I was amazed! They are even good cold.
      About gluten-free panko crumbs
      I tested multiple brands of GF panko breadcrumbs and found that Ian's GF panko crumbs worked the best. Aleia's gluten-free panko also worked well. If your local store does not carry them, order on Amazon.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 241kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 35gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 143mgSodium: 674mgPotassium: 568mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 0.2gVitamin A: 247IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 123mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Curry Chicken Salad With Grapes and Cashews

      06/06/2016 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      curried chicken salad

      Golden creamy curry chicken salad. Classic chicken salad gets a tasty flavor twist with an Indian-inspired, creamy curry dressing, sweet red grapes and crunchy cashews. Lunch is ready! And it's easy to make ahead.

      curried chicken salad | AFoodCentricLife.com

      Curry Chicken Salad

      After sweating my brains out in hot yoga this morning I needed a nourishing lunch. Thankfully, this curried chicken salad was waiting in the fridge when I got home. I love it when I have healthy food made ahead just waiting. No work, just eat. And the batch I made provided several lunches. The dressing is so good! I think you'll love this recipe.

      poached chicken breasts|AFoodCentricLife.com
      Chicken breasts poaching in a pot.

      How to Poach Chicken (or use leftover chicken)

      Poaching chicken is an easy, fast cooking method you should make your friend. Use boneless skinless chicken breasts. It takes about 15-18 minutes depending on the size of your chicken breasts. After poaching, cool the chicken and cut into cubes for the chicken salad. You'll see how easy it is. You can also use leftover cooked chicken.

      curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com
      Poached chicken cut into cubes for salad.

      Make the Curry Dressing

      The creamy, Indian-inspired dressing can be made ahead for the flavors to blend or made and used right away. You can make it a day or three ahead, then assemble your salad when you need to eat. I use a combination of plain, unsweetened Greek yogurt and mayonnaise. For paleo, use all mayonnaise and skip the yogurt. I use organic Vegenaise or Primal Kitchen which is avocado oil-based.

      curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com

      What is in Curry Powder (aka Curry Spice)?

      Beautiful golden curry powder is a blend of spices. While authentic Indian cooks have their own secret family blend, you can blend your own or buy one. Curry powder comes from mild or "sweet" also called hot.

      Spices that make up curry powder include turmeric, coriander, cumin, fenugreek, ginger, nutmeg, fennel, cinnamon, dry mustard, white, red or black pepper, cardamom, cloves, cayenne pepper, chili peppers and sometimes saffron. No wonder it tastes so good! Try different brands and find your favorite because they do taste different.

      About Turmeric and Curcumin

      The base for many curry powders is bright orangey-yellow spice called turmeric. Long used in Chinese and Indian medicine, turmeric contains curcumin, a powerful, natural anti-inflammatory. Curcumin has been shown to lower risk for heart disease and is a powerful tool in fighting cancer. Read more about the power of turmeric here.

      curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com
      Grapes, cashews, celery, herbs prepped for curried chicken salad.

      Curried Chicken Salad Prep Ahead Tips

      Poach your chicken 3 days ahead of time, then make your salad. You can also make the dressing ahead and refrigerate it, allowing the flavors to blend. When ready to serve, mix the chicken, dressing together with the nuts and grapes (which can all be prepped ahead too).

      curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com
      Bowl of golden yellow curried chicken salad.

      Serving Tips

      Curried chicken salad can be served in lettuce cups, over salads greens or alone. If you eat paleo, try coconut wraps.

      curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com
      curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com

      📖 Recipe

      curried chicken salad | AFoodCentricLife.com

      Curriy Chicken Salad

      Sally Cameron
      Classic chicken salad gets a tasty flavor boost with a creamy curry dressing, sweet red grapes and crunchy cashews. Read the post for make-ahead tips. Make the salad with poached chicken breast or leftover roast chicken. Serve alone, in lettuce leaves, paleo wraps or whole wheat pita bread.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 18 minutes mins
      Total Time 28 minutes mins
      Course Salad
      Cuisine Indian
      Servings 4
      Calories 471 kcal

      Ingredients
        

      Easy Curry dressing

      • ½ cup Vegenaise or mayonnaise
      • ¼ cup plain Greek yogurt or extra mayo for paleo
      • 2 tablespoons curry powder
      • 1 teaspoon honey
      • 1 teaspoon cumin
      • ½ lime juiced
      • ⅛ teaspoon sea salt
      • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper

      Curried Chicken Salad

      • 1 ½ pounds cooked boneless skinless chicken breast see recipe link for poaching below
      • ⅓ cup chopped cashews
      • 1 large rib celery chopped
      • 12 red grapes halved
      • 1 tablespoon chopped cilantro or Italian parsley

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Make the Curry Dressing

      • Mix together the mayonnaise, yogurt, curry powder, honey, cumin, lime, juice, salt and pepper. Stir until smooth. The dressing can be made ahead.

      Assemble the Curried Chicken Salad

      • Slice chicken breast into long thin pieces about ½" thick, then into small cubes about ½" thick. See photo in post for help.
      • In a medium bowl, mix the chopped chicken, grapes, celery, cashews and dressing, folding together until the all ingredient are coated. Stir in the cilantro and mix lightly one more time.
      • Serve the curried chicken salad alone or in lettuce cups, over salads greens, paleo wraps or whole wheat pita halves.

      Notes

      For how to poach chicken breasts follow this easy recipe. 
       
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 471kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 40gFat: 28gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 109mgSodium: 439mgPotassium: 815mgFiber: 2gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 113IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 51mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      How to Make Meatball Beef Stroganoff

      12/22/2024 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

      Creamy casserole dish of beef stroganoff made with meatballs with herbs on top.

      Meatball Stroganoff is a cozy twist on the classic beef stroganoff, swapping tender meatballs for steak in a creamy mushroom and onion sauce. It's rich, comforting, and budget-friendly, with a hint of Dijon mustard and fresh herbs for extra flavor. Serve it over noodles, mashed potatoes, or rice for a hearty meal the whole family will love.

      White oval casserole dish with creamy meatball beef stroganoff topped with fresh tarragon.

      I had beef stroganoff on my mind but no steak on hand, so I improvised with ground beef and made meatballs instead - and the result was terrific. These tender meatballs simmer in a rich, creamy stroganoff sauce made with mushrooms, onions, and crème fraîche (which won't curdle like sour cream). It's a made-from-scratch comfort food classic - no canned soups, just real ingredients. And while it's not a quick meal, it's absolutely worth the effort.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Meatball Stroganoff

      • Budget-friendly - All the classic stroganoff comfort without the steak price.
      • Flexible prep - Make meatballs ahead or use quality store-bought as a shortcut.
      • Make-ahead - The sauce holds beautifully overnight; meatballs reheat well.
      • Gluten-free friendly - Works with GF noodles or traditional egg noodles.
      • Serving options - Great over noodles, mashed potatoes, rice, or on its own for lower-carb.

      For another classic hearty meal, make my lasagna with no-boil noodles, either GF or not.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for beef meatballs in prep bowls on the kitchen counter.
      Ingredients for sauce for beef stroganoff in prep bowls ready to start cooking.

      Make meatballs ahead of time and refrigerate for up to 3 days or freeze and thaw when ready to enjoy.

      Beef Meatballs

      • Lean ground beef: I've made meatballs with 93/7, 90/10, and 85/15 lean to fat ratios and prefer the 93/7. The meatballs are still tender and flavorful, especially with the rich creamy sauce.
      • Breadcrumbs: Gluten-free bread crumbs or wheat bread crumbs help hold the meatballs together. I use homemade gluten-free breadcrumbs, or for store-bought, Aleia's.
      • Milk: Low fat or whole milk.
      • Egg: Large egg, helps bind the meatballs.
      • Onion: Yellow or brown onion adds flavor.
      • Parmesan cheese: Finely grated.
      • Garlic: Fresh cloves are best for that pungent garlic flavor.
      • Herbs: Use fresh Italian parsley and fresh thyme.

      Stroganoff Sauce

      • Butter: Use unsalted butter so you control the salt.
      • Onion: Yellow or brown onion.
      • Broth: Beef broth or beef stock. See chef's tip below.
      • Tomato paste: Adds richness and depth of flavor. Rather than a can, try a tube.
      • Mushrooms: Brown cremini mushrooms or white mushrooms. Buy them whole and slice them yourself, they are fresher.
      • Creme fraiche: French sour cream is richer than regular sour cream and won't curdle or break the sauce.
      • Worcestershire sauce: Not traditional, but adds a nice depth of flavor.
      • Mustard: Creamy Dijon mustard adds flavor and emulsification.
      • Flour: Use either a gluten-free flour blend or all purpose flour.
      • Fresh herbs: Fresh tarragon adds great flavor, or use fresh thyme, or fresh dill. Fresh parsley adds color at serving if desired (I use extra tarragon).
      • Nutmeg: Just a little to add a sweet, nutty, and warm undertone of flavor.
      • Wine or spirits: A little brandy, cognac, dry white wine, or red wine contributes to the layers of flavor, (optional).

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper or white pepper. 

      Chef's tip on beef broth: Not all beef broths are created equal. There are many poor quality broths with unhealthy ingredients made from powders, extracts, and filler broths. A few I recommend are Kettle & Fire Beef Bone Broth, Butcher's Bone Broth (beef), and Bonfide Provisions (check freezer sections). They have clean, high quality ingredients and flavor. Be sure to read labels.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • In a hurry - Make the sauce from scratch using good-quality store-bought meatballs. Beef, turkey meatballs, or chicken all work well. Use bite-sized for best results.
      • Homemade option - For baked turkey meatballs, use this recipe.
      • Herbs - Swap dried herbs for fresh (like tarragon or thyme), using ½ to ⅓ as much.
      • Crème fraîche - If unavailable, use full-fat sour cream (not low-fat) and add at the very end to prevent curdling.
      • Garlic - No fresh on hand? Garlic powder will do in a pinch, ¼ teaspoon per clove.

      For another delicious dish with mushrooms, try mushroom duxelles, a classic French spread.

      Chef's Tip - Why These Meatballs Stay Tender
      The secret is a panade - a simple mix of bread (like breadcrumbs) and liquid (like milk or broth) that locks in moisture. It a culinary trick that keeps the meatballs juicy and prevents them from turning dense, which is why these meatballs stay so tender.

      If you love savory, creamy sauces, try my recipe for sour cream pork chops (it uses creme fraiche too).

      How to Make Meatball Stroganoff

      For meatballs

      Tool tip: To portion the meatballs, I use a handy little inexpensive gadget called a squeeze disher or scoop. It makes it easy and fast. I use the bite-sized #40 size disher (¾ ounce). You can use a larger size remembering the numbers of meatballs will be smaller in number and you'll need to adjust your baking time.

      Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Line a baking sheet with parchment.

      A glass bowl with breadcrumbs, herbs, and egg to make a meatball binder.
      Step 1: Combine the breadcrumbs, milk, egg, and garlic. Let stand for 5 minutes to hydrate breadcrumbs.
      A meatball breadcrumb mix with herbs added in a glass bowl.
      Step 2: Mix in the parmesan, herbs, onion, salt & pepper.
      Adding pink ground beef to a bowl making meatball mix.
      Step 3: Add the beef and mix well with your hands but do not overwork the meat. Use disposable gloves if desired.
      Finished ground beef mix for meatballs ready to portion.
      Step 4: Finished meatball mix is ready for portioning and baking.
      Portioned meatballs on a parchment baking sheet with a disher.
      Step 5: Portion meatball mixture onto a parchment lined baking sheet using a #40 disher/scoop, or a tablespoon.
      Baked beef meatballs on a rimmed baking sheet on a marble counter.
      Step 6: Bake meatballs at 375°F for about 16 minutes. Ready to serve or cool.

      For Stroganoff sauce

      In case you've never made a classic sauce like this, I'm sharing a lot of photos to guide you through. It takes about 25 minutes in total. With a little patience and plenty of stirring you'll have a fantastic stroganoff sauce.

      A glass bowl of sliced white mushrooms on a marble counter.
      Step 1: Clean mushrooms and slice thin.
      Chopped onions sautéing in butter in a stainless steel fry pan.
      Step 2: Saute onions until soft in 2 tablespoons unsalted butter over medium to medium-low heat, 2-3 minutes.
      Adding sliced mushrooms to a pan of sautéed onions in butter.
      Step 3: Add mushrooms to onions and stir.
      Sliced mushroom and onions cooked until tender and light brown.
      Step 4: Cook mushrooms until most of the moisture is gone, add the alcohol and cook that down. Remove mushrooms to a bowl and set aside to use later.
      Melted butter and flour cooking in a steel pan with a wooden spatula.
      Step 5: In the same pan, melt the last 2 tablespoons of butter, add flour and stir until combined.
      A Flour and butter mix called a roux, basis for a sauce or gravy.
      Step 6: Cook the "roux" (roo) stirring, 2-3 minutes to remove the raw flour taste.
      A golden bubbly sauce with a steel whisk in a saute pan.
      Step 7: Over medium heat, slowly add the broth whisking to smooth and create a thickened sauce base, 10-12 minutes. Adjust heat as needed.
      A bubbling pan of stroganoff sauce in the making, adding herbs with a whisk.
      Step 8: Whisk in the tomato paste, herbs, worcestershire, mustard, nutmeg, salt and pepper.
      Creme fraiche being added to a pan with stroganoff sauce and a wire whisk.
      Step 9: Whisk in the creme fraiche until smooth and thick.
      Mushrooms added to stroganoff sauce in a saute pan with a wooden spatula.
      Step 10: Add the mushrooms and onions into the sauce and stir until thickened and you can draw a line through the sauce with a spatula. Ready to serve with the meatballs.
      A white oval casserole dish filled with meatball beef stroganoff with pasta in a bowl beside.

      Serving Suggestions

      Beef Stroganoff meatballs is best served over wide flat pasta noodles (GF or regular), egg noodles, rice, or mashed potatoes. For a lower carb dinner, simply serve meatballs and sauce in a bowl.

      Meatball stroganoff is a complete meal between the meatballs, sauce and pasta. The only thing you need is a tossed green salad on the side for balance. Use this salad recipe to make a nice homemade French vinaigrette.

      Storing

      Leftover meatball stroganoff (or made ahead meatball stroganoff) holds in the refrigerator for up to 3 days stored in an airtight container.

      I usually make my meatball beef stroganoff a few hours ahead of time (or a day ahead) then pop it into a 350°F oven covered with aluminum foil to heat back up (to 165°F).

      Freezing

      The meatballs freeze well on their own but the sauce does not because of the dairy (it gets grainy). To freeze sauce ahead of time, omit the creme fraiche. To serve, heat the thawed sauce in a pan until hot, then whisk in the creme fraiche and warm through.

      Recipe FAQS

      How do I make the sauce smooth and creamy?

      Tradition says use sour cream, but for a rich, creamy stroganoff sauce that won't curdle or break, use French sour cream, called Creme Fraiche. It's works much better.

      Can I make Stroganoff meatballs in a slow cooker?

      For the best results, make the meatballs and sauce ahead of time then heat it in a slow cooker to serve. It's a great make dish that made ahead re-heats well.

      Can I make the meatballs ahead of time?

      Absolutely! Meatballs are a terrific make-ahead dish. Make meatballs and refrigerate for up to 3 days, or cool completely and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator to use, then combine and heat with your choice of sauce.

      Do I cook the meatballs in the sauce or separately?

      Cook the meatballs separately (first), then add them to the sauce when the sauce is done to heat through. This can be done on the stovetop or in the oven in a casserole dish, covered.

      More Dinners with Great Sauces

      If you love a good sauce, try these recipes as well!

      • Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.
        Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce
      • Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.
        Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe
      • bison bolognese with pasta
        Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)
      • beef tenderloin on a plate.
        Roast Beef Tenderloin (Center-Cut Chateaubriand)

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make meatball beef stroganoff, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      Creamy casserole dish of beef stroganoff made with meatballs with herbs on top.

      Meatball Stroganoff

      Sally Cameron
      A terrific twist on classic beef stroganoff made with beef meatballs in a rich, creamy sauce with onions, mushroom, and creme fraiche instead of sour cream. Makes 30 meatballs for 5 servings or 4 larger appetites. Serve over wide pasta noodles, rice, mashed potatoes, or without. Make the meatballs ahead of time. The meatballs take 45 minutes and the sauce about 45 minutes.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 1 hour hr
      Total Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
      Cuisine American
      Servings 5 (6 meatballs each)
      Calories 265 kcal

      Equipment

      • Rimmed baking sheet half sheet size
      • Parchment paper
      • 12" saute pan or fry pan
      • Whisk

      Ingredients
        

      Beef meatballs

      • 6 tablespoons plain breadcrumbs gluten-free or wheat
      • 6 tablespoons milk
      • 1 large egg
      • 2 large garlic cloves zested or finely chopped
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • ¼ cup finely grated parmesan cheese
      • 2 tablespoons finely chopped parsley
      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped thyme leaves or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
      • ¾ cup onion, very finely chopped ½ a medium onion
      • 1 pound lean ground beef 93/7 or 90/10 lean to fat

      Stroganoff sauce

      • 1 pound white mushrooms or cremini
      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter divided use
      • 1 cup chopped onion ½ a medium
      • 2 tablespoons brandy, cognac, or dry white wine optional
      • 3 tablespoons flour GF blend or all purpose
      • 2 cups low sodium beef broth
      • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
      • 2 teaspoons tomato paste
      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped tarragon or thyme or ⅓ to ½ amount dried
      • 1 tablespoon worcestershire GF if needed
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper or white pepper
      • ⅛ teaspoon nutmeg
      • 7-8 ounces creme fraiche

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Get ready

      • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Line a half sheet baking sheet with parchment paper.

      Make the Meatballs (can be made ahead)

      • Combine the breadcrumbs, milk, egg, garlic, salt and pepper in a medium bowl and mix well. Allow to stand for about 5 minutes for breadcrumbs to hydrate.
      • Add salt, cheese, herbs, and onion and mix well. Add the ground beef and gently mix with your hands. Disposable kitchen gloves are helpful. Mix completely until ingredients are well distributed but don't overwork the meat.

      Portion meatballs

      • With either a #40 disher (aka cookie scoop) or a tablespoon, portion meatballs onto the baking pan. They should be bite sized or the size of a small golf ball. You should get approximately 30 meatballs.

      Bake meatballs

      • Bake meatballs for 16-17 minutes until they reach 165°F internally measured with a digital thermometer. Remove pan from the oven.
        If serving immediately keep warm while you make the sauce. Alternatively cool and refrigerate for 3 days or freeze for up to 3 months, labeled and dated. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator to use.

      Clean the mushrooms (start sauce)

      • Using a paring knife, trim the stems of the mushrooms flush with the base and discard stems. Cup 2-3 mushrooms in your hands and rinse them quickly under a trickle of cold water. Dry on paper towels.

      Make the sauce

      • Melt 2 tablespoons of butter in a 12" saute pan or fry pan, add the chopped onion and cook until softened, about 3 minutes. Add sliced mushrooms and cook until the moisture is released and almost gone, 8-10 minutes. Add brandy if using, and cook until almost gone. Pour the onions and mushrooms into a bowl and set aside near the stove until needed.
      • Add the 2 remaining tablespoons of butter to the pan and melt over medium low heat, add the flour and whisk to combine. Cook for 2-3 minutes to remove the raw flour taste.
        Slowly add broth to the pan, whisking to create a smooth sauce. Cook and whisk until the sauce is thickened, 8-10 minutes. Whisk in the Dijon and tomato paste until smooth, then stir in the tarragon, worcestershire, salt, pepper, and nutmeg until smooth. Stir in the onions and mushrooms. Lastly, add the creme fraiche and stir.

      To serve

      • To serve, add the meatballs to the pan and heat through until meatballs are hot. Serve over noodles, rice, or mashed potatoes.
        At this point you can cool the stroganoff and place in an airtight container and refrigerate for 3 days before re-heating and serving.

      Notes

      Substitutions

      • Substitute ½-3/4 teaspoon granulated garlic powder for the fresh garlic.
      • Swap dried herbs for fresh at half the amount.
      • For gluten-free flour blend I use King Arthur.
      • If using spirits and you don't keep it on hand, buy an airline size bottle at a liquor store. 
      • If using white wine, get the mini, airline sized bottles at the grocery store.

      Freezing meatballs

      After meatballs are completely cooled, place them in a single layer on a baking sheet and freeze for 2-4 hours before transferring them to a container or bag. This ensures they're individually frozen and don't stick together. 
      If using frozen cooked meatballs, thaw them first before adding to the sauce. 

      Freezing sauce

      This is not a dish that freezes finished well because freezing disrupts the emulsion of the dairy and it may become grainy. If you want to freeze it, leave out the crème fraîche and stir it in after reheating the thawed sauce. Add the thawed meatballs and heat through until hot. 

      Meatballs nutrition (per 6 meatballs)

      For the nutrition calculation I've separated out the meatballs because they are good with other sauces. It's a great basic beef meatball recipe. 
      Serving: 6 meatballs provides 265 kcals, 24 g protein, 13g fat, 13g carbs, 1g fiber. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6meatballsCalories: 265kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 24gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 102mgSodium: 484mgPotassium: 419mgFiber: 1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 325IUVitamin C: 7mgCalcium: 136mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Turkey and Wild Rice Soup with Leftovers

      12/02/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      A white pot of turkey and wild rice soup on a gray wooden board with herbs and parmesan cheese on the side.

      Transform your Thanksgiving leftovers into a comforting bowl of turkey and wild rice soup! This hearty soup is packed with vegetables, tender turkey, flavorful broth, and the nutty chew of wild rice. Best of all, it comes together in about 30 minutes since the main ingredients are already prepared. Top it off with fresh herbs and a sprinkle of salty Parmesan cheese, and serve with crunchy garlic toast for a cozy, satisfying meal.

      Turkey and wild rice soup in a white pot with garlic toast on the side.

      After Thanksgiving I look forward to making this turkey and wild rice soup each year. But it's too good to make only after Thanksgiving, so make it with leftover chicken for a chicken and wild rice soup or whenever you make turkey.

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Leftover turkey soup can also be made with chicken.
      • Comes together in about 30 minutes.
      • Hearty and flavor-filled.
      • A great way to use leftover Thanksgiving turkey.

      For another easy soup try this chicken rice soup made in an Instant Pot.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for turkey wild rice soup in prep bowls on the counter.
      • Turkey: Use leftover roast turkey, both dark meat and turkey breast for best flavor. Out of turkey? Use rotisserie or roast chicken.
      • Rice: Wild rice gives this soup a hearty texture and nutty, chewy texture.
      • Broth: I use homemade turkey broth which I make ahead and freeze, but chicken broth works too. Look in the freezer section of your grocery store for frozen turkey broth options. Another option, homemade turkey stock made from the turkey carcass.
      • Onion: Yellow, onion brown or white onion.
      • Leek: Use the light green part only, not the dark green tops which are tough.
      • Carrot: For sweetness and more vegetables.
      • Celery: Just a few ribs complete the flavorful, aromatic base for most soup recipes.
      • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves for the best flavor.
      • Herbs: Fresh parsley, fresh thyme, and bay leaves.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Instead of wild rice, use a brown and wild rice blend, brown rice, or white rice.
      • Swap dried herbs for fresh, using ⅓ to ½ as much, try an Italian seasoning blend.
      • Add a little chopped fresh fennel with the vegetables.
      • For a creamy turkey wild rice soup, use less broth and add heavy cream.
      • Add a little soy sauce or gluten-free tamari for an umami flavor boost to deepen flavor (use instead of salt). Start with 2 teaspoons.
      • To brighten the flavor squeeze in a little lemon juice. 

      For another hearty soup made with leftover chicken or turkey, make this Mexican chicken tortilla soup.

      Chef' tip on wild rice: Should I use cooked wild rice or uncooked wild rice? I recommend using cooked rice. Cook it ahead of time and refrigerate it or freeze it until you make the soup. If you add uncooked wild rice to the soup, it absorbs a lot of broth and might get mushy. I cook mine ahead so it's perfect.

      Recipe Instructions

      To cook turkey and wild rice soup, use a large dutch oven or other large soup pot. 

      Carrot, celery, onion, and leek cooking in a large soup pot.
      Step 1: Saute celery, onion, carrots, and leek in olive oil until soft.
      Adding chopped turkey to a soup pot, with a wooden spoon.
      Step 2: Add chopped turkey.
      Stirring chopped fresh green herbs into a pot of turkey soup.
      Step 3: Add chopped fresh green herbs.
      Adding wild rice to a pot of turkey soup with vegetables.
      Step 4: Add cooked wild rice and stir.
      A large glass measuring cup filled with golden broth pouring into a pot of wild rice soup.
      Step 5: Pour in the broth and stir.
      Bay leaves on simmering in a pot of soup with turkey, vegetables, and rice.
      Step 6: Add bay leaf and simmer for flavors to blend, 15 minutes.
      A white pot of turkey and wild rice soup on a gray wooden board with herbs and parmesan cheese on the side.

      Chef's tip: Is it stock or broth? While the terms are used interchangeably, technically any stock (like chicken stock) is made with bones only while broth is made with meaty pieces. Bones give stock or broth a gelatinous quality (it's jiggly) and the meat, rich flavor and more nutrition.

      Serving and Storage

      Turkey and wild rice soup is a meal in a bowl. I serve it with crisp browned garlic toast or crusty bread. To make it a bigger meal, add a tossed green salad with simple homemade balsamic vinaigrette.

      Leftover turkey and wild rice soup keeps for 3-4 days in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Reheat on the stovetop until heated through.

      Recipe FAQs

      Do I need to cook the wild rice before adding it to the soup?

      For best results, cook the wild rice first. You can even cook it a few days ahead and freeze it for when you need it. Wild rice can be added raw, but pre-cooking it separately ensures it doesn't absorb too much liquid from the soup.

      Can I freeze turkey and wild rice soup?

      You can, but the rice can get mushy after thawing. The best way is to cook the soup entirely, not add the wild rice, and add cooked wild rice after thawing and before freezing. You can cook and freeze the rice separately.

      Can I use frozen turkey?

      You can use frozen cooked turkey, but thaw before adding to the soup.

      More Hearty Soup Recipes

      For more terrific soups from smooth and creamy to hearty, check out the soups recipe page. The chicken noodle soup link below is a reader favorite.

      • A finished pot of chicken vegetable soup ready to eat on a table.
        Chicken Vegetable Soup Recipe
      • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
        Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
      • Gray bowl with bean and kale soup topped with parmesan and basil.
        Hearty Tuscan White Bean Soup
      • Creamy squash and apple soup in a gray bowl with pumpkin seeds and chives.
        Creamy Butternut and Apple Soup

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make turkey and wild rice soup, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A white pot of turkey and wild rice soup on a gray wooden board with herbs and parmesan cheese on the side.

      Turkey and Wild Rice Soup

      Sally Cameron
      A flavorful hearty soup to make with Thanksgiving turkey leftovers. If you're out of turkey, try it with leftover chicken.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 20 minutes mins
      Total Time 30 minutes mins
      Course Soup
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4 Yield 2 quarts
      Calories 212 kcal

      Equipment

      • Large pot 4-5 quarts

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil
      • 1 cup chopped onion half a large onion
      • 1 medium leek, chopped use white and light green parts only
      • 3 ribs celery chopped
      • 3 medium carrots chopped
      • 2 large garlic cloves chopped fine
      • 2 cups chopped leftover turkey or chicken, about 11 ounces
      • 1 ½ cups cooked wild rice or wild rice blend or brown rice
      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped thyme leaves ½ teaspoon dried
      • 4 cups turkey broth or chicken broth
      • 1-2 bay leaves
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

      Optional garnish

      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped Italian parsley
      • ¼ cup grated parmesan cheese

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Heat the olive oil in a large heavy soup pot, 4-5 quarts, over medium heat. Add the onion, leek, celery, and carrots. Cook for about 7 minutes until soft, stirring. Turn down the heat if needed, you don't want the vegetables to brown. Add the garlic and cook another minute.
      • Stir in the turkey, then the herbs, wild rice. Stir and cook for 3-5 minutes, then add the broth and bay leaves and bring to a simmer. Cook for about 15 minutes for flavors to blend and soup to heat through. Season with salt and pepper and soup is ready to serve.
        Sprinkle with parsley and parmesan if desired.

      Notes

      If you freeze or refrigerate this soup, you might need a little extra broth as when it sits the rice can absorb some of the broth. For brothier soup, add another cup or so of broth. 
      If you want to make the soup ahead of time, cook the rice and store it separately from the soup so it does not get mushy and absorb a lot of broth, then add it when you're heating the soup.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2cupsCalories: 212kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 21gFat: 2gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.4gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 52mgSodium: 1310mgPotassium: 616mgFiber: 4gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 8345IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 80mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      How to Make Creamy Riced Mashed Potatoes

      11/15/2024 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

      A bowl of creamy mashed potatoes with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley with a silver serving spoon.

      Want to make the best mashed potatoes ever? Ditch the hand masher and use a potato ricer to make riced mashed potatoes. It's a game changer. You get fluffy, creamy, swoon-worthy mashed potatoes that will have everyone wanting seconds. Let me show you the easy step-by-step process. Riced mashed potatoes are ideal for holiday dinners and weeknight meals alike. There's not much better than homemade mashed potatoes.

      A round white bowl full of creamy mashed potatoes drizzled with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley.

      When we have friends for dinner they inevitably end up in the kitchen with me to see how I do things and lend a hand. More than once when making mashed potatoes they'd never seen or used a potato ricer. I thought it was time I posted my riced mashed potatoes recipe and talked about why this terrific and inexpensive kitchen tool makes the best mashed potatoes.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Riced Mashed Potatoes

      • Fluffy, lump-free texture - A potato ricer creates the creamiest, lightest mashed potatoes with no lumps and no gluey texture.
      • Better than other methods - A ricer gives superior results compared to a hand masher, electric mixer, or food processor, which can overwork the potatoes.
      • Easy to adapt - Make them rich and buttery with dairy, or use simple swaps for non-dairy and vegan versions that still taste luxurious.
      • Make-ahead friendly - Prepare them in advance and choose from four easy ways to reheat so holiday (or dinner) timing is stress-free.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for mashed potatoes on the counter with russet potatoes, milk and butter.
      • Potatoes: For fluffy mashed potatoes, use russet potatoes, not gold potatoes which have less starch. Figure a half pound per person.
      • Milk: Low-fat milk, whole milk, half and half. Heavy cream to me gets a bit heavy and overly rich but it's personal preference. 
      • Butter: Use unsalted butter to control the salt level. If you only have salted butter, be careful adding salt when seasoning to serve.
      • Fresh herbs: Both chives and parsley make a nice and easy garnish (optional).

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper or white pepper (no black specks).

      For another buttery way to add flavor to riced mashed potatoes, add a few slices of this herbed compound butter.

      The Best Potatoes for Mashed Potatoes

      What are the best potatoes for mashed potatoes? My answer is russet but there are options. Here is a run down on types of potatoes:

      • Russets have a high starch content so they are light and fluffy when cooked. Russets are ideal for riced mashed potatoes. 
      • Yellow and gold potatoes (like Yukon Golds) belong to the same broad category of yellow-fleshed potatoes. They used to be my preferred for mashed potatoes but I am back to russets these days. Gold potatoes are more velvety, moist, and dense when mashed. Try them mashed sometime to understand the difference. Gold potatoes are my preference for terrific potato salad, in potato gratins, and scalloped potatoes.
      • White potatoes are medium starch, a combination of slightly creamy and slightly dense with thin, delicate skin, and white interiors. Can be used for mashed potatoes but not as fluffy. They hold their shape after cooking.
      • Red potatoes: This variety is waxy, creamy, moist and smooth. Save them for baking and roasting, great in potato salad and soups. Terrific for air fryer red potatoes!

      How many potatoes to buy? Figure about 2 pounds of potatoes for 4, 3 pounds for 6, etc.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For no-dairy or vegan riced mashed potatoes, use either coconut milk, almond milk, oat milk, or you favorite plant-based milk, and plant butter.
      • Add roasted garlic or finely grated Parmesan cheese.
      • For sour cream mashed potatoes, add less milk and use sour cream.

      For complimentary veggies side dishes try roasted brussels sprouts, green beans almondine, or roasted carrots with fresh thyme.

      Chef's tip on buying a ricer: Ricers come made of metal and plastic and with different shapes of hoppers (round versus triangle). I had a large metal one for making bigger quantities when I was catering dinner parties but the bigger ones require more arm strength to press the potatoes through the ricer. For home, here is the ricer I use. Take a look at this link if you prefer a stainless steel ricer. They work the same. It's not just another kitchen gadget that will collect dust. You'll use it for years to come!

      How to Make Riced Mashed Potatoes

      A glass bowl of clean peeled russet potatoes ready to cook.
      Step 1: Peel the potatoes with a vegetable peeler.
      Chopped potatoes on a white cutting board with a chefs knife.
      Step 2: Cut potatoes into equal sized cubes about 1" inch.
      Potatoes simmering in a pot of water with small bubbles on top.
      Step 3: Add potatoes to a large pot, cover with an inch of cold water. Add a tablespoon of salt. Bring to a simmer over medium heat, cook 10-15 minutes.
      Cooked potatoes in a colander pierced with a paring knife showing doneness.
      Step 4: Potatoes are done when tender and easily pierced with a paring knife. Drain through a colander. Place potatoes back in colander and sit them back on the hot empty pan to reduce excess water.
      A potato ricer with a hopper full of cooked potatoes.
      Step 5: Place cooked potatoes in the hopper basket of the ricer fitted with the small holes. Work quickly while they are warm.
      Mashed potatoes being extruded from a potato ricer into a pot.
      Step 6: Press all potatoes through the ricer.
      Riced mashed potatoes being finished with butter and milk.
      Step 7: Add soft butter, warm milk from a small saucepan, and salt.
      Creamy finished riced mashed potatoes with a stirring spoon in a pot
      Step 8: Stir potatoes until creamy. Taste test for texture and flavor, adding more butter, milk, salt, and pepper.

      Chef's tip on using a potato ricer: Be sure your potatoes are cooked until tender but not falling apart or water-logged. After the potatoes are cooked and drained through a colander, dry the potatoes a bit to remove excess moisture for fluffy riced mashed potatoes by placing the colander on top of the warm pot for a for a minute or two, then rice back into the pot. Don't overload the hopper and try to do too much at once.

      Peeling Potatoes Ahead of Time

      If you are making riced mashed potatoes for a crowd, you can peel your potatoes ahead of time, but they must be stored in cold water to prevent bacterial growth.

      1. Keep potatoes refrigerated: Always store the potatoes in cold water in the refrigerator to prevent bacterial growth:
      2. Change the Water if Needed: If soaking for more than a few hours, changing the water helps prevent the potatoes from becoming slimy or absorbing excess water.
      3. Avoid Over-Soaking: For best texture and flavor, soak potatoes for no more than 8-12 hours. Longer soaking can lead to waterlogged potatoes, which may make mashed potatoes gluey.
      4. Drain and Dry Before Cooking: Thoroughly drain and pat the potatoes dry before boiling to avoid diluting the cooking water.

      Follow these tips and your peeled potatoes will stay fresh and ready for perfectly creamy riced mashed potatoes.

      Serving Suggestions

      A classic side dish, perfect mashed potatoes go with many main dishes. Try riced mashed potatoes along side:

      • Roast bone-in chicken breasts.
      • Crispy seared suck breasts.
      • Mediterranean chicken thighs with lots of veggies and juices.
      • Roast beef tenderloin is a classic pairing.
      • Pork tenderloin with Dijon mustard sauce.

      For more buttery flavor, drizzle extra melted butter over the top to serve. Refrigerate leftovers in an airtight container for 3-4 days. To freeze, use a freezer-safe container. 

      Four Ways to Re-Heat Riced Mashed Potatoes

      If you are making riced mashed potatoes ahead of time and refrigerating, here are four ways to re-heat mashed potatoes. The colder they are the longer it will take. Get them out of the refrigerator an hour ahead of time to help get the chill off. Re-heating time depends on the quantity of mashed potatoes you have.

      • Stovetop method: Place the mashed potatoes in a large pot over low heat. Add a little milk and stir frequently to prevent sticking or burning on the bottom. Partially cover and stir occasionally until they're heated through. You may need to add more milk as they warm to keep the potatoes creamy.
      • Oven method: Transfer the mashed potatoes to an oven-safe dish and cover with foil to prevent drying out. Bake for about 20-30 minutes in a pre-heated 350°F oven until warmed through, stirring halfway. Add a little more butter or milk if needed for extra creaminess. Heat potatoes until they reach 165°F (use a digital thermometer).
      • Slow cooker method: This is how I kept mashed potatoes hot for catered parties and it works great. Put the mashed potatoes in a slow cooker on the low setting, stirring every 20-30 minutes. Add a splash of milk to maintain the texture, if needed. I place a clean kitchen towel between the lid and the top of the slow cooker to absorb moisture so it does not drip into the potatoes.
      • Microwave method: Place the mashed potatoes in a microwave-safe dish and cover with a lid or damp paper towel to keep them from drying out. Reheat in 1-minute increments, stirring between each until fully warmed. Add a small amount of butter or milk to refresh the texture if needed.
      Creamy mashed potaotes with fresh chopped herbs on top and a serving spoon.

      Recipe FAQs

      What type of potatoes are best for riced mashed potatoes?

      Russet potatoes are best for fluffy, creamy riced mashed potatoes because of their higher starch content. You can use gold potatoes if preferred. The potatoes will be more dense in texture due to their waxier

      Should potatoes be peeled before ricing?

      For riced mashed potatoes, peel before cooking and ricing for a smooth texture and easier time ricing.

      Can I add flavors like garlic, herbs, or cheese to riced mashed potatoes?

      Yes, you can add flavors but start with a little and add, tasting as you go for both flavor and texture. Two good options are roasted garlic and Parmesan cheese.

      How much butter and cream should I add to riced mashed potatoes?

      I start with 4 ounces of milk per pound of potatoes and 3-4 tablespoons of butter, then taste and mix in more as I go to achieve the perfect balance and texture. Start with less and add more is the best approach so mashed potatoes don't get to thin from too much milk or overly buttery. Cream is not the only option. I prefer whole milk or half and half so potatoes don't get too rich and heavy.

      More Potato Recipes

      Love potatoes? Me too! Here are more delicious potato recipes.

      • Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.
        Simple Whipped Sweet Potatoes Recipe
      • White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.
        Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)
      • Parmesan potato wedges
        Crispy Baked Parmesan Potatoes (Sliced & Oven-Roasted)
      • scalloped potatoes gratin
        Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make riced mashed potatoes, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A bowl of creamy mashed potatoes with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley with a silver serving spoon.

      Riced Mashed Potatoes

      Sally Cameron
      Skip the hand potato masher and use a ricer for the best fluffy creamy mashed potatoes.
      4.50 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 15 minutes mins
      mashing time 20 minutes mins
      Total Time 40 minutes mins
      Course Side Dish
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6
      Calories 297 kcal

      Equipment

      • Potato ricer
      • Medium pot

      Ingredients
        

      • 3 pound russet potatoes 6 medium
      • 6 ounces milk: whole milk, low fat, or half and half or non-dairy
      • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter
      • 1 tablespoon sea salt for cooking water
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon white pepper optional

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Peel potatoes and chop into approximately 1-inch pieces, keeping the pieces the same size.
      • Add potatoes to a medium pot and add cold water to cover by 1-inch. Add 1 tablespoon sea salt. Bring almost to a boil then turn down to simmer and cook until potatoes are tender when pierced through with a paring knife, 10-15 minutes.
        Warm the milk so cold milk doesn't chill your hot mashed potatoes, and be sure the butter is at room temperature or melted.
      • Drain potatoes through a colander then place the colander back on the warm pot on the stovetop to dry for a minute. Place ricer over top of the pot and spoon potatoes into the hopper. Press the potatoes through the ricer.
        When done, add butter and milk gradually, stirring, until you get to the perfect taste and texture. Season with salt and a little white pepper if using.
        Keep potatoes warm for serving or cool completely and refrigerate to be re-heated. Leftover riced mashed potatoes last 4-5 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. They can be frozen for up to a month but may not be as creamy upon thawing.

      Notes

      For no-dairy or vegan riced mashed potatoes, use either coconut milk, almond milk, oat milk, or you favorite plant-based milk, and plant butter.
      Add roasted garlic or finely grated Parmesan cheese.
      For four ways to re-heat riced mashed potatoes after refrigerating (if making ahead of time), please see the post; stovetop, in the oven, microwave, or slow-cooker. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 297kcalCarbohydrates: 42gProtein: 6gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 34mgSodium: 217mgPotassium: 992mgFiber: 3gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 398IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 68mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      How to Make Compound Butter for a Turkey

      11/25/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A yellow butter log with herbs with sliced pieces, fresh herbs behind.

      For a golden, flavorful Thanksgiving bird, compound butter for turkey is your secret weapon. Soft butter mixed with fresh herbs, citrus zest, and garlic gets tucked under the skin to baste the meat from within-so it stays juicy with beautifully crisp, bronzed skin. It takes minutes to prep, can be made ahead and frozen, and is simple to use on roasting day. For a reliably delicious, perfectly roasted turkey, start with this compound butter.

      A yellow log of compound butter flecked with green herbs rolled in parchment paper.

      For years I've made an herbed compound butter for a turkey. The butter's fat helps deliver that golden, crispy skin, while fresh herbs, citrus, and garlic infuse flavor and keep the meat juicy. Most of it goes under the skin, with a thin smear on top-so when you pull that bird from the oven, it gets the rightful oohs and ahhs. Sounds good? It is-and it's surprisingly easy to make.

      Why You'll Love Compound Butter for a Turkey

      • Simple, make-ahead recipe - Mix in minutes; refrigerate 5-7 days or freeze up to 3 months.
      • Big payoff on roast day - Adds flavor, moisture, and gorgeous color as the turkey roasts.
      • Under-skin = juicy meat - Butter goes under the skin; a thin smear on top for bronzing.
      • Flexible seasoning - Make it with or without salt and pepper.

      Add a slice of compound butter to each of the roast bone-in chicken breasts while they are finishing in the oven.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for an herbed compound butter for turkey on a marble counter.
      • Butter (unsalted) - Best for control, especially if you dry-brine. Salt the bird first, then apply the herb butter. If you only have salted butter, reduce added salt elsewhere.
      • Garlic (fresh) - Use freshly grated or finely zested garlic cloves for an even, punchy flavor that spreads well.
      • Herbs (fresh) - Pick your favorites: thyme, parsley, rosemary, sage, chives, marjoram. You don't need them all-2-3 herbs are perfect. Chop finely so they distribute evenly.
      • Citrus zest - Lemon zest is my go-to; orange zest (or both) is nice, too. Zest carries the aromatic oils that brighten the butter without adding liquid.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper. Note salt and pepper are optional.

      For the best turkey, brine baby brine, and then use your compound butter. If you've never done it, here's my turkey dry brine tutorial. It's super easy and way easier than wet brining giving you a flavorful turkey.

      Chef's note: What is a compound butter? It's any butter blended with herbs, spices, citrus zest, garlic, honey, and many other flavoring possibilities. They are sometimes called infused butters or flavored butters. Using them is a great way to add extra flavor to food and can be used almost anywhere you'd use plain butter. Compound butters can be made savory (as in this compound butter for a turkey) or sweet compound butter, as in this maple vanilla butter. There are also speciality butters such as blue cheese butter, truffle butter, and this miso butter which is terrific on fish and seafood.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Herbs & citrus - Mix and match your favorites-thyme, parsley, rosemary, sage, chives, marjoram. Use lemon or orange zest…or skip citrus entirely.
      • Garlic options - Substitute garlic powder for fresh at ¼ teaspoon per clove.
      • Classic lemon-herb - Lemon zest + parsley + dill (bright and turkey-friendly).
      • Southwestern - Cumin + coriander + chili powder (or smoked paprika) for warm spice; add lime zest instead of lemon.
      • No fresh herbs - Use half the amount of dried (they're stronger). Let the butter stand 30 minutes so dried herbs can rehydrate and soften before using or chilling.

      Use a slice of this butter to dress up simple blanched green beans. They take 5 minutes!

      Chef's Tip: Salt Strategy

      • Dry-brined turkey: Keep the butter lightly salted so you don't overdo it.
      • Wet-brined turkey: Skip salt in the butter (or add just a pinch).
      • Unbrined turkey: Use about ¼-½ teaspoon kosher salt per stick (8 Tbsp) of butter.
      • Taste before you spread: Mix, taste a tiny dab, then adjust.
      • Pepper: Add a pinch of black pepper to the butter; adjust on the bird as needed.

      How to Make a Compound Butter for Turkey

      Start with very soft butter at room temperature for the easiest mixing. Do not melt the butter. Get out a piece of parchment paper, waxed paper, or plastic wrap and some kitchen twine (or rubber bands) to make the butter log. Do not use aluminum foil. It reacts with certain ingredients (like acidic ones) and also tears easily.

      Be sure your herbs are totally dry. Wet herbs do not chop well. Try washing them ahead of time and air drying on a kitchen towel.

      Herbs and butter prepped to make a compound butter in glass bowls.
      Step 1: Stir the butter. Finely chop the herbs, zest the garlic (for super smooth garlic), finely chop the citrus zest so that everything blends together well.
      Butter, citrus zest, herbs, and garlic in a glass bowl.
      Step 2: Add room temperature butter and all ingredients to a medium bowl. If using salt and pepper, add now.
      A soft compound butter mixed with herbs in a glass bowl with herbs on side.
      Step 3: Blend butter mixture with a fork or a flexible spatula until well mixed and the herbs are evenly distributed.
      A yellow compound butter with flecks of green herbs on a piece of white parchment paper.
      Step 4: Place the butter near the bottom third of the parchment paper and shape into a log as best as possible.
      Compound butter in the process of rolling into a log in parchment paper.
      Step 5: Fold the bottom of the parchment over the butter and pull the top back against the butter forming a log.
      A log of herbed butter in wax paper with open ends, not twisted yet.
      Step 6: Roll turkey butter into a tight log.
      A finished log of herbed butter with ends twisted to secure and seal, with a label.
      Step 7: Twist the ends in opposite directions compressing the butter. Refrigerate or freeze.

      Chef's tip: How to get very fine garlic. Biting into a piece of raw garlic is not pleasant. Rather than simply chopping garlic, use one of three techniques: use a microplane zester and zest the garlic fine, chop fine and smear into a paste with the back of your chef's knife, or use a garlic press and chop it finer by hand. Either way, you're creating a fine garlic paste that easily incorporates into butter. No biting into a piece of raw garlic.

      How to Use Compound Butter for Turkey

      As a general rule, allow the turkey to stand unwrapped at room temperature for one hour to get the chill off before applying compound butter, then apply herb compound butter for turkey before roasting. The flavors from the butter melt in during roasting and self-baste the meat.

      For best application, work with room temperature butter. Use it for a whole turkey or for a turkey breast.

      With dampened hands, gently insert fingers between the turkey skin and meat to loosen the skin. Slowly work your fingers as far back under the breast skin and near the legs as possible. The skin stretches a fair amount but be careful not to tear it.

      When skin is loosened, spread some of the compound butter in three places:

      • Under the skin of the turkey.
      • On top of the turkey breast and legs.
      • A little inside the cavity of the turkey, rubbing it on the inside walls.

      How much you use depends on the size of your turkey. You won't use it all (save the extra). Don't over-do it for delicious a golden, delicious roast turkey. Save the rest for more delicious dishes. Once applied, the turkey is ready to roast.

      Serving Suggestions

      There are many ways to use a compound butter for turkey beyond turkey!

      • Not just for turkey - Use this butter beyond the bird.
      • Roast chicken - Slide under the skin or melt over sliced breast.
      • Steak - Finish grilled steak with a coin for that steakhouse gloss.
      • Fish - Melt over grilled or baked salmon, halibut, or cod.
      • Mashed potatoes - Stir into riced potatoes or whipped sweet potatoes.
      • Vegetables - Toss with hot green beans, carrots, or roasted broccoli.
      • Bread/rolls - Spread on warm dinner rolls or toasted bread.
      • Grilled corn - Slather on hot grilled corn on the cob in summer.
      • Cornbread - Smear on a slice of your naturally gluten-free cornbread.

      If the compound butter is cold and solidified, allow it to soften at room temperature to use for the best flavor.

      Storage & Freezing

      Compound butter lasts 1 to 2 weeks in the refrigerator when stored properly rolled and wrapped or in an airtight container to keep it fresh and prevent it from absorbing refrigerator odors.

      For longer storage, freeze butter for up to 3 months. Slice off just what you need when ready to use.

      A yellow butter log with herbs with sliced pieces, fresh herbs behind.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I use salted butter?

      Yes. If using salted butter, reduce added salt elsewhere and taste the mixture before spreading-especially if you dry- or wet-brine.

      Do I need to baste the turkey?

      Not really. When most of the butter goes under the skin (with a thin smear on top), the turkey essentially self-bastes. Opening the oven often drops the heat. If you like, spoon pan juices over the bird once in the last 30-45 minutes; tent with foil if browning too fast.

      Can I use dairy-free butter?

      Yes. Use a stick-style plant butter (not whipped/light tubs). Salt levels vary, so adjust. Browning may be less than dairy butter.

      Recipes to Use Compound Butter With

      Use compound butter for turkey for more than turkey! Add some to potatoes dishes. Place a sliver on chicken breasts before oven roasting. Use for a whole roast chicken. Use over simple steamed or blanched vegetables for flavor. It's really versatile.

      • A bowl of creamy mashed potatoes with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley with a silver serving spoon.
        How to Make Creamy Riced Mashed Potatoes
      • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
        Roast Split Chicken Breast
      • whole roast chicken
        How to Roast a Whole Chicken (sear first method)
      • A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.
        Gluten Free Cornbread (no flour)

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make compound butter for a turkey, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A yellow butter log with herbs with sliced pieces, fresh herbs behind.

      Compound Butter for a Turkey

      Sally Cameron
      Compound butters are a secret weapon in the kitchn for adding flavor and moisture. This is for turkey but works with roast chicken, steak, and many other things! For a plain herbed butter, omit the citrus. If you prefer using salted butter, be careful of salt elsewhere.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Total Time 10 minutes mins
      Course condiment
      Cuisine American
      Servings 16
      Calories 205 kcal

      Ingredients
        

      • 8 ounces unsalted butter or salted butter 2 sticks, half pound.
      • 2 teaspoons finely chopped fresh thyme leaves
      • 2 teaspoons finely chopped fresh parsley leaves
      • 1 teaspoon finely chopped fresh rosemary leaves
      • 2 large fresh garlic cloves zested or chopped fine and smeared into a paste
      • 1 teaspoon lemon zest optional
      • 1 teaspoon orange zest optional

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Be sure the butter is very soft before you start blending. Allow it to stand at room temperature for 2-3 hours. Do not melt the butter if you try to speed up the process.
      • Chop the herbs very fine so the blend into the soft butter well. Zest the garlic fine or chop fine then smear into a paste with the back of your chef's knife, into a paste.
        Add the butter and all herbs, garlic, and zest if using to a small bowl. Blend well with a flexible spatula until ingredients are evenly distributed.
      • See photos in the post for help! To make a butter log, place the herbed butter on a full size (12"x16") piece of parchment paper or waxed paper. Using a spatula, spread it into a log shape in the bottom third of the paper with the short edge at the top.
        Fold the bottom of the paper over the top of the butter, then with your fingers or the spatula, gently pull the paper back against the butter to tighten it into a log. Roll the log the entire length of the parchment. Twist end the opposite way from each other and tie them to secure.
      • Compound butter lasts 1-2 weeks in the refrigerator. Wrap the log in plastic film for more protection if desired. Freeze for up to 3 months. Slice off just what you need to use.

      Notes

      Herbs note: Choose fresh herbs such as thyme, Italian parsley, rosemary, sage, chives or marjoram. Don't use them all; choose your favorite 2-3 fresh herbs.
      The parchment paper I use for this is a non-stick parchment paper. Find it here on Amazon. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1tablespoonCalories: 205kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 0.3gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 15gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 61mgSodium: 3mgPotassium: 14mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 0.04gVitamin A: 734IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 11mgIron: 0.1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Easy Baked Brie with Jam Appetizer

      11/23/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      A round wheel of baked brie cheese with a fruit and nut topping, with apples, pears, and crostini.

      If you're looking for a show-stopping, easy holiday appetizer, this baked brie with jam is it! Warm creamy cheese topped with fig compote of fig jam, dried figs and cranberries, and chopped pecans for a perfect balance of sweet and nutty flavors. Serve it with baguette and crisp apple slices for an unforgettable appetizer that will have your guests asking for the recipe. And it's so simple to make!

      A platter of bake brie cheese with fig jam, cranberries, pecans, and bread with apple slices.

      This baked brie with jam recipe was always a crowd pleaser at my catered parties. While the brie bakes to melty perfection, prepare a warm, fruity fig compote on the stovetop with jam, dried fruits, and nuts. Spoon it over the warm brie and serve with baguette slices, fresh grapes, and apple slices. It's irresistible and one of the easiest appetizers.

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Baked brie with jam is a good party appetizer.
      • Simple to make for a busy holiday season.
      • Halve the recipe for a smaller group (8 ounce brie wheel) or double (2-pound brie wheel) for a bigger crowd.
      • No puff pastry to deal with like brie en croûte.

      For another delicious fruity topping, make some of this apple cinnamon compote.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for baked brie cheese appetizer on the counter with cranberries, figs, pecan, jam, orange, and cinnamon.

      Baked Brie

      • Brie: Get a one pound wheel of brie cheese. Don't get a wedge of brie, it doesn't work, as the cheese oozes out everywhere. It needs the rind to hold it in shape.
      • Jam: This fig-orange jam is my favorite and what I recommend. See options below.
      • Dried fruit: Dried figs and dried cranberries.
      • Nuts: Chopped pecans, either raw or these homemade maple glazed pecans.
      • Orange: For the zest and juice.
      • Spices: A little cinnamon added to the topping adds subtle flavor.
      • Liqueur: Add a splash of orange liqueur such as Grand Marnier (optional).

      For Serving

      • Bread: 1-2 baguettes or gluten-free bread.
      • Crackers: Your favorite sturdy crackers to handle the gooey baked brie, and gluten-free crackers for your GF guests.
      • Fruit: Apple and pear slices.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements.

      Another good topping for baked brie is this cranberry orange sauce.

      Chef's tip on brie rind: Do you take off the top of the rind or leave it on? I leave the top rind on as it's totally edible, delicious, and holds the melty cheese together when it comes out of the oven. Without the top rind it oozes everywhere.

      Substitutions and Variations

      Brie is a buttery, mild-flavored cheese that stands up well to flavor variations.

      • Change up the dried fruit such as apricots, raisins, golden berries, or others.
      • Use different jams, such as raspberry preserves, strawberry jam, apricot jam, or other favorite jam.
      • Use sliced fresh figs instead of dried for the topping.
      • If you can't find a 1-pound brie wheel, use 2-8 ounce wheels and place them side by side.
      • No dried figs? Swap pitted dates.

      When fresh figs are available, make these goat cheese crostini with figs and prosciutto.

      Recipe Instructions

      Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. If you're out of oven space and want to use your air fryer, use the bake setting. To bake the cheese, use a small sheet pan, an oven-safe dish, or a small cast iron skillet. Skip the parchment for the cast iron option and serve baked brie right from the skillet.

      A round wheel of brie cheese on parchment paper on a baking sheet.
      Step 1: Unwrap and place brie on parchment paper piece on a baking sheet or in a baking dish. Place in the oven to bake.
      Dried cranberries, dried figs, nuts, and spices in a silver pot.
      Step 2: Add fig jam, orange juice, dried cranberries, dried figs, pecans, and cinnamon in a small pot.
      Fig jam topping with dried fruit and nuts simmering in a small pot
      Step 3: Simmer fig compote for 3-5 minutes until melted, hot, bubbly and thickened. It will thicken more as it cools.
      A round wheel of baked brie cheese with a fruit and nut topping, with apples, pears, and crostini.
      Step 4: When brie is baked and cooled for a few minutes, spoon fig compote over the top and serve.

      Serving and Storage

      Serve baked brie with jam individually or as part of a cheese board. Place the warm cheese on a plate or platter with slices of baguette, crackers, and fruit slices. Grapes are another nice addition. Garnishing the arrangement with herbs such as fresh rosemary or fresh thyme adds fragrance and green color.

      To keep apple and pear slices from turning brown, place slices in lemon water, then dry and arrange on your cheese display.

      Store leftover fig compote in an airtight container for a week.

      Chef's tip for leftover fig compote: Leftover fig compote is good over ice cream or frozen yogurt, or over oatmeal or creamy overnight oats. As pork and fruit are classic companions, the fig sauce can be served along side a pork roast or pork tenderloin.

      Warm brie cheese oozing out of the wheel on a platter topped with fruit and nut sauce.

      Recipe FAQs

      What kind of jam works best for baked brie?

      Any kind of fruit jam or preserves works well with baked brie. Choose seasonal flavors such as fig and cranberry in the fall, or raspberry and strawberry in spring. Blueberry and blackberry are good too, as well as orange preserves. Leftover cranberry sauce works great after Thanksgiving and Christmas.

      Do I need to remove the rind from the brie?

      The rind of brie is totally edible so it does not have to be removed. In fact it helps hold the warm cheese wheel together after baking. If you prefer to remove the rind you can. Trim the top with a sharp knife but leave the side and bottom rind.

      How do I prevent the brie from leaking out?

      Don't over-bake the brie to keep the cheese from running out of the rind. If it does, just enjoy it! It still tastes great even if a bit messy.

      More Appetizer Recipes

      For more appetizer and snack recipes for easy entertaining, check out these recipes or look at the appetizer recipes index page.

      • Mediterranean appetizer tray with baked feta (mezze platter).
        Baked Feta Cheese (Easy Mediterranean Appetizer)
      • Belgian endive leaves filled with herbed cream cheese on a white platter.
        Belgian Endive with Herbed Cream Cheese
      • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
        Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make baked brie with jam, please comment and let me know. Id love to hear how it came out and I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A round wheel of baked brie cheese with a fruit and nut topping, with apples, pears, and crostini.

      Baked Brie with Jam

      Sally Cameron
      A decadent appetizer with gooey baked brie topped with a compote of fig jam, dried fruits, and nuts. Easy, elegant, and festive. Serve with baguette or apple and pear slices.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 40 minutes mins
      Course Appetizer
      Cuisine American
      Servings 8
      Calories 370 kcal

      Equipment

      • small 2 quart pan
      • Parchment paper
      • Baking sheet

      Ingredients
        

      Baked Brie with Jam

      • 1 pound whole brie wheel or 2-8 ounce wheels
      • ½ cup pecans halves chopped
      • ½ cup fig-orange jam or preserves half of an 8 ounce jar
      • ½ cup dried cranberries
      • ¼ cup dried figs 3-4 dried figs, chopped
      • 1 medium orange zested and juiced
      • 1 tablespoon Grand Marnier or other orange liqueur optional
      • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon

      For Serving

      • 2 large baguettes sliced on diagonal
      • 1 large apple cut into thin pieces
      • 1 large pear cut into thin pieces

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Remove brie from the refrigerator and allow to warm up on the counter for 1 hour. If you forget, just bake it longer and keep an eye on it so it does not melt too much.
      • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. Place the brie wheel on a square piece of parchment paper that extends beyond the brie, then on a baking sheet or in a baking dish. The parchment will make it easier to move the soft bake brie onto a serving plate.
        Bake brie uncovered for 20-25 minutes until the cheese feels soft when touched in the center. How long it bakes depends on how cold it was before baking.
      • While brie is baking, make the fig jam topping. In a small pan (2 quart) over medium low heat, place the fig jam, pecans, cranberries, figs, orange juice, and cinnamon. Add liqueur if using. Allow the jam topping to become melted and juicy, and cook for 3-5 minutes to thicken.
      • When the brie is ready, remove from the oven using the parchment to support, place on a serving platter and spoon the warm fig jam sauce over the top. To finish, add orange zest to the top. Serve with baguette and fruit slices.
        Note - Allow the baked brie to sit on the serving platter a few minutes before cutting into the wheel or the cheese may all ooze out.

      Notes

      Group size
      For a smaller group (4), do an 8-ounce brie wheel, or for a bigger group (16-20), do a 2-pound brie wheel. They area little harder to find but can sometimes be ordered from a good cheese department.
      Baking options
      If you're out of oven space and want to use your air fryer, use the bake setting. To bake the cheese, use a small sheet pan, an oven-safe dish, or a small cast iron skillet. Skip the parchment for the cast iron option and serve baked brie right from the skillet.
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 370kcalCarbohydrates: 34gProtein: 14gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 10gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 57mgSodium: 409mgPotassium: 261mgFiber: 4gSugar: 23gVitamin A: 399IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 139mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Gluten Free Cornbread (no flour)

      10/17/2024 by Sally Cameron 9 Comments

      A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.

      I've tested this gluten-free cornbread over and over to ensure it's just right for you. The result? A moist cornbread with bold corn flavor and tender crumb, made without flour, so it's naturally gluten-free and enjoyable by everyone. Best of all, it's quick and easy to make in one bowl in 30 minutes, so skip the little packaged boxes and make homemade! Dairy-free option.

      A square piece of golden cornbread with a stack of pieces behind it on a wire rack.

      After baking batch after batch of corn bread, trying different corn and grain blends, sugar versus honey, milk versus buttermilk, different temperatures and pans, I've come up with an easy gluten-free cornbread recipe. It's not the cake-y style of cornbread, but more rustic and textured as there is no flour. It's my almost Southern cornbread.

      After all of the testing, I think this is the best cornbread, but that's for you to decide! If you bake a batch, please let me know what you think.

      Why You'll Love Gluten-Free Cornbread

      • Naturally gluten-free - no wheat flour or GF flour.
      • No sugar - Sweetened with honey.
      • Buttermilk for tenderness - but with a dairy-free option.
      • Nice and moist - instead of crumbly and dry.
      • Perfect side dish - for soup, salad, or in cornbread dressing for the holidays.

      What goes good with cornbread? Try this southwestern turkey chili recipe.

      Cornbread Ingredients

      Ingredients in prep bowls on a kitchen counter for making cornbread.
      • Gluten-free cornmeal: Use polenta or medium grind cornmeal. Buy certified gluten-free if needed (cornmeal is naturally GF). Don't buy corn flour, instant, or quick-cook polenta as it has been pre-cooked and dried, which means it absorbs liquids differently and will not behave the same way in a baked cornbread recipe.
      • Xanthan gum: Helps as a binder and provides structure.
      • Baking powder: Buy aluminum free and check the date on your package to see it's not expired.
      • Baking soda: To leaven or lighten the cornbread.
      • Milk: Low fat buttermilk (see sub below), or use buttermilk powder, reconstituted.
      • Eggs : Large un-cracked eggs.
      • Butter: I only use and buy unsalted butter to control the salt and recommend you do the same.
      • Sweetener: Honey replaces white sugar in this cornbread recipe, use a mild flavored honey such as clover, orange blossom, or acacia honey.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements.

      For soups to accompany cornbread, try this Instant Pot lentil soup or check out the soup recipes index for lots of delicious options.

      Chef's tip: Buying cornmeal. I use a medium-grind, stone-ground yellow organic cornmeal. If organic isn't available, choose non-GMO, and if needed, buy certified gluten-free. Medium grind yields a softer, more cohesive crumb-ideal if you'll use this cornbread for cornbread dressing. Prefer a heartier texture? A coarse grind (polenta) makes a more rugged cornbread that's great on its own.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For dairy-free cornbread, use a dairy-free milk such as strained unsweetened almond milk or coconut milk, adding 1 ½ tablespoons of lemon juice or apple cider vinegar (to give it the acidity of buttermilk); let is stand for 5-10 minutes or until curdled (lumpy).
      • For dairy butter substitution use plant-based butter. Buy solid cubes, not the tub stuff.
      • For a sweeter cornbread, use a little more honey.
      • If you can't use xanthan gum, swap for an equal amount of guar gum or twice as much psyllium husk (not powder).
      • No buttermilk - Use buttermilk powder and water reconstituted, works great.

      Chef's Note: What is xanthan gum? Xanthan gum helps mimic the structure of gluten in baked goods where there is no wheat. Just a little is all that's needed. It is used in gluten-free baking to add volume, bind, and thicken. Alternatively use guar gum (it's less expensive). What about guar gum vs. xanthan gum in cornbread? Either works well because it's a quick bread, not a yeasted dough. You'll get a cohesive, sliceable texture either way.

      Xanthan gum gives a slightly more elastic, cohesive crumb - it's ideal for batters and baked goods that need structure, like quick breads and muffins.

      Guar gum gives a softer, lighter texture, slightly more tender but a touch more fragile. It's a good choice if you prefer a delicate crumb or are using more whole-grain flours.

      How to Make Gluten-Free Cornbread

      Tool note: I prefer baking in a light colored metal square pan versus a dark non-stick one or a cast iron skillet. A square of parchment in the bottom helps protect the bottom and make sure it came out of the pan easily or just use cooking spray. I've done both.

      A glass mixing bowl with cornmeal and dry ingredients with a silver whisk.
      Step 1: Add dry ingredients (cornmeal, baking powder and soda, gum, salt) to a large bowl and whisk together.
      Wet ingredients added to the bowl for golden cornbread batter.
      Step 2: Whisk the wet ingredients (milk, melted butter, honey, eggs) together in a large measuring cup then pour into the dry ingredients.
      Cornbread batter whisked together in a glass bowl with a whisk.
      Step 3: Whisk the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients until smooth.
      Cornbread batter poured into a square silver baking pan ready to bake.
      Step 4: Pour batter into the prepared baking pan (spray or parchment).
      A square loaf of golden brown cornbread on a wire cooling rack.
      Step 5: Bake until golden brown, the top feels firm, and a toothpick or cake tester comes out the the center with moist crumbs. Allow to cool for a few minutes then gently remove from the pan to cool on a wire rack.

      Serving Suggestions

      Gluten-free cornbread is nice with a bowl of soup or chili, alongside a salad, as a snack, or turned into cornbread stuffing for a Thanksgiving turkey, roast chicken, or holiday ham. What else is classic? See below.

      A piece of golden cornbread topped with maple butter on a white plate with fork.

      Homemade Maple Butter

      Smear a piece of this savory cornbread with homemade maple butter or honey butter. It's super easy to make in a minute! All you need is 2 sticks soft unsalted butter and some maple syrup or honey. Find the recipe for homemade maple butter here.

      Glass jar of yellow whipped maple butter with maple drizzle on top.

      Storing Cornbread 

      Leftover cornbread keeps on the counter well wrapped for 3 days or in the refrigerator. It also freezes well, for about 3 months, wrapped in plastic wrap then foil, then into a zip bag. Be sure to label and date. 

      Recipe FAQs

      Is cornmeal gluten-free?

      Yes, cornmeal is a naturally gluten-free grain, however if you follow a gluten-free lifestyle or are celiac, be sure to purchase a package that is certified gluten-free so there is no cross-contamination during packaging.

      Are cornmeal and polenta the same thing?

      They are almost the same. Cornmeal is usually more finely ground and polenta is a bit more of a coarse grind (as are grits). Cornmeal is often used for making cornbread and muffins (or cornmeal mush), and polenta for a traditional Italian savory side dish of the same name.

      Historically, they start with different kinds of corn; for American Southern grits or cornmeal, it's dent corn, for Italian polenta, it's flint corn. Today, they terms are often used interchangeably but there are differences.

      What kind of cornmeal should I use?

      Cornbread is best with a medium grind, stone-ground cornmeal. Using a fine ground cornmeal will yield a denser cornbread. Coarse grind yields a more granular texture. Use what the recipe calls for is the safest option for making good cornbread.

      What makes a cornbread recipe Southern?

      No flour or very little flour, recipes are usually all cornmeal, like this one. Also little to no sugar, and baking it in a cast iron pan or skillet for a more golden crust. Butter is a preferred fat, but sometimes a southern cook will use lard or bacon fat. I prefer butter.

      More Baking Recipes

      Love to bake? Try these easy quick breads and muffin recipes.

      • carrot cake muffins
        Gluten-Free Carrot Cake Muffins (dairy-free)
      • A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.
        Easy Gluten-Free Pumpkin Bread Recipe
      • Golden baked loaf of Irish soda bread, sliced on a white plate.
        Easy Gluten-Free Irish Soda Bread
      • Gluten Free Strawberry Muffins

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make gluten-free cornbread, please comment and let me know how you liked it, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

      📖 Recipe

      A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.

      Gluten-free Cornbread (no flour)

      Sally Cameron
      With a golden color and tender crumb, this gluten-free cornbread has big corn flavor and can be enjoyed by anyone following a GF diet as it is naturally gluten-free. Its nice with a bowl of soup, chili, or a cup of tea for a snack. It's also wonderful in cornbread dressing for Thanksgiving and Christmas turkeys or with roast chicken during the year.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 25 minutes mins
      Total Time 35 minutes mins
      Course Breakfast, Side Dish, Snack
      Cuisine American
      Servings 9
      Calories 169 kcal

      Equipment

      • 1 8x8 light colored metal baking pan
      • Parchment paper

      Ingredients
        

      Dry ingredients

      • 1 ½ cups gluten-free cornmeal 8 ounces
      • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder 6 grams
      • 1 teaspoon xanthan gum 4 grams
      • ¾ teaspoon baking soda 2 grams
      • ¾ teaspoon salt 5 grams

      Wet ingredients

      • 1 ¼ cups low fat buttermilk remember to shake it! Sub note below
      • 2 large eggs beaten
      • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted and cooled slightly
      • 2 tablespoons honey

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Mix Dry Ingredients

      • Gather up your ingredients and pre-heat the oven to 375 degrees. In a large bowl, add the cornmeal, xanthan gum, baking powder, baking soda and salt. Whisk to incorporate.

      Mix Wet Ingredients

      • Whisk in the buttermilk (or dairy-free substitution) until smooth, then add the eggs, melted butter and honey. Whisk until the batter is well mixed.

      Pout Batter, Bake and Cool

      • Cut a square of parchment to fit into the bottom of an 8″x8″ square light colored baking pan. Spray with nonstick spray. Pour batter into the pan. Bake for approximately 20-25 minutes (I have a convection oven) on the center rack, or until the cornbread is golden and a toothpick stuck in the center comes out clean. The cornbread will be pulling away from the sides of the pan slightly. Use your nose. When the cornbread is done you'll really smell it. Remove from the oven and turn out onto a cooling rack.
      • To serve, cut into squares or to make the cornbread dressing, see the post for cornbread stuffing on how to cut and dry the cornbread.

      Notes

      For no-dairy cornbread, substitute almond milk for the buttermilk, mixed with 1 ½ tablespoons of lemon juice or apple cider vinegar to give it the needed acidity to activate the leavening agents. Allow it to stand for 10 minutes until it curdles and turns lumpy (don't rush this step).
      If you can't use xanthan gum, swap for an equal amount of guar gum or twice as much psyllium husk (not powder).
      Buttermilk powder reconstituted with water works great as a buttermilk replacement and what I usually have on hand these days. Use 1 ¼ cups of water + ¼ cup powder and + 1 Tbsp. of the powder. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 169kcalCarbohydrates: 25gProtein: 5gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 49mgSodium: 432mgPotassium: 155mgFiber: 3gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 153IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 87mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Beet Salad with Feta

      11/11/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      Deep red and golden roasted beets tossed with vinaigrette, herbs, feta, and nuts in a salad bowl.

      Earthy roasted beets, salty feta cheese, fresh herbs, and buttery pine nuts come together with a simple vinaigrette in this richly colored beet salad with feta. Perfect for fall and winter, this healthy salad adds a burst of color and flavor to your table for a satisfying and hearty side dish. Roast fresh beets in foil ahead of time for easy prep, then simply chop, toss, and assemble when ready to serve. It goes together in minutes.

      A white bowl of jewel colored beet salad with feta cheese, pine nuts, and herbs.

      If you love beets, here's a terrific salad to add to your repertoire. To create a flavorful salad, don't boil beets or steam beets; roast them. Roasting beets brings out their natural sweetness. Preparing roasted beets in foil keeps them moist and is super easy. Dress roasted beet salad with feta with almost any vinaigrette from a simple balsamic vinaigrette or a classic French vinaigrette, to a citrusy blood orange or lemon vinaigrette.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Make roasted beets in foil ahead of time, or use store bought cooked beets.
      • Vary the dressings to change up the salad.
      • A great side dish for fall and winter. 

      Recipe Ingredients

      Red and gold beets, fresh herbs, nuts, and cheese for a salad on the counter.
      Red and gold beets, fresh herbs, nuts, and cheese for a salad on the counter.

      Beet Salad

      • Beets: To be roasted for the salad. Buy whole fresh raw beets of medium size with the beet greens on for the freshest beets. Use both red, gold, or both. 
      • Oil: Olive oil or avocado oil to drizzle over the beets for roasting.
      • Cheese: A good tangy, Greek feta cheese is terrific against earthy beets and worth seeking out.
      • Herbs: Fresh parsley, fresh dill, and fresh chives all compliment this beet salad adding good color and flavor. Fresh mint it nice too.
      • Nuts: Buttery pine nuts are a ice compliment but there are options below.

      Vinaigrette Salad Dressing

      • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is best choice, or avocado oil.
      • Vinegar: Balsamic vinegar and red wine vinegar are good options.
      • Mustard: A little Dijon mustard helps emulsify the dressing and add flavor.
      • Garlic: Optional, just a little for flavor if desired.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper.

      Chef's tip on feta cheese: I love good Greek feta cheese. It's tangy and salty from the brining process and has much more flavor than cow's milk feta because it's a blend of goat and sheep milks. Greek feta usually is in block form, not pre-crumbled. You can still use the crumbled regular feta if it's your preference. If you don't digest cow's milk cheeses well, you might find you do better with a blend like this.

      For another feta recipe, try mezze appetizer tray with baked feta. It's great for entertaining.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Swap goat cheese for the feta cheese.
      • Vary the vinaigrettes.
      • Change up the nuts. Crunchy walnuts are terrific as are these glazed maple pecans which add sweetness.
      • Use a flavored olive oil such as lemon, blood orange, or basil.
      • Use lemon juice or orange juice instead of vinegar for the vinaigrette.
      • Thin slices of red onion are a nice addition for more flavor and color.
      • Can't get fresh beets to roast? Try this beet salad with canned beets.

      Recipe Instructions

      For more photos and detailed directions for how to roast beets in foil please see the link.

      Roasted beets in foil with a thin metal skewer piercing one to show they are done.
      Step 1: Trim beet tops and roast beets in aluminum foil packets  at 400°F until tender throughout, 45-60 minutes. 
      A peeled red beet with a paring knife and a y-vegetable peeler.
      Step 2: After roasting, skin beets with a paring knife, vegetable peeler, or by rubbing off with paper towels. Chill beets.
      Red and gold beets being chopped on a black cutting board.
      Step 3: Chop beets into ½" - ¾" cubes.
      Vinaigrette whisked together in a glass bowl with a silver whisk.
      Step 4: Whisk together oil, vinegar, mustard, and salt in a small bowl (add finely chopped garlic if using).
      Deep red and golden roasted beets tossed with vinaigrette, herbs, feta, and nuts in a salad bowl.
      Step 5: Combine beets with nuts, cheese, and herbs in large bowl and toss with vinaigrette. 

      Chef's tip on working with raw garlic. When you want to add fresh garlic to something like a vinaigrette, it must be very fine so you don't bite into a piece of raw garlic (really unpleasant). The best way to make the garlic fine is with a microplane zester. It disappears into the vinaigrette nicely. Otherwise, chop it fine then with the back of your knife smear it into a paste before adding.

      For another terrific fall and winter salad, try this fennel orange salad with orange vinaigrette.

      Serving Suggestions

      Toss the beets with the dressing by themselves, then add the cheese, nuts, and herbs. This way the beets get a good coating without turning the cheese pink.  

      These pairings allow the beet and feta salad to shine while creating a balanced, flavorful meal

      • Grilled or Roast Chicken: The mild flavor of chicken complements the boldness of beets and feta.
      • Salmon: Salmon's richness balances the fresh flavors in the salad.
      • Grain Bowls: Add quinoa to add texture and make it a more substantial, hearty meal.
      • Pasta with Olive Oil and Herbs: A simple pasta dish provides a nice contrast.
      • Serve beet salad with feta on salad greens like peppery arugula or red lettuce.

      Storage

      Roasted beets keep refrigerated in an airtight container for 3- days. I recommend that you store the beets, cheese, herbs, and nuts separately and combine when ready to eat.

      If you have leftover salad all combined and dressed, it will hold for a few days except but the cheese will probably turn pink because of the beets. It still tastes good but might need a little more vinaigrette.

      Recipe FAQs

      Should I use red or golden beets?

      Use either or both for beautiful color depending on availability at your grocery store.

      How do I keep the beets from staining everything?

      When working with red beets in particular, wear disposable kitchen gloves and don't work on a cutting board that will stain easily, such as a white one. For wood cutting boards, lightly wet them with water then wipe off before cutting beets on them. This helps protect the cutting board from staining. Then be sure to wash the cutting board right away. Golden beets are less staining.

      Can I make this salad ahead of time?

      Absolutely, it's a great make-ahead salad. Roast your beets, chop the herbs, crumble the cheese, toast nuts if desired, and make the vinaigrette but don't put it together yet. Assemble and dress just before serving. The components for beet salad with feta can be made several days ahead of time.

      Can I use the packaged steamed beets for beet salad?

      Yes, you can use the steamed and peeled vacuum sealed packages of beets, but roasting your own beets is easy, more flavorful, and can be done ahead of time. If you are short on time and need a quick shortcut, use the packaged option. Beets are always good! You'll need 3-8 ounce packages.

      More Complimentary Recipes

      Serve beet salad with feta alongside these crispy air fryer chicken cutlets or easy roast chicken breasts. Use the maple pecans for the nuts, they are fantastic.

      • A slow cooker pulled pork sandwich with coleslaw and pickles.
        Slow Cooker BBQ Pulled Pork
      • Strawberry shortcake cake with fresh strawberries and whipped cream on a golden sponge cake.
        Gluten-Free Strawberry Shortcake Cake
      • Charro beans in a rustic bowl with chopped tomatoes and sprinkles of white onion and cilantro.
        Charro Beans (Frijoles Charros)
      • A saute pan of Chicken Marsala without cream, topped with mushroom sauce and herbs.
        Chicken Marsala Recipe (No Cream)

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this beet salad with feta, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      Deep red and golden roasted beets tossed with vinaigrette, herbs, feta, and nuts in a salad bowl.

      Beet Salad with Feta

      Sally Cameron
      A beautiful and healthy salad for fall and winter. Roast beets ahead of time then it's easy to assemble and enjoy. Using both red and gold beets creates more color but one color is good too. Be sure to wear disposable kitchen gloves for working with beets!
      3 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 45 minutes mins
      Total Time 50 minutes mins
      Course Salad, Side Dish
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6
      Calories 285 kcal

      Equipment

      • Disposable kitchen gloves

      Ingredients
        

      To roast beets

      • 2 pounds raw beets, medium-sized red, gold, or both, tops on
      • 1-2 teaspoons olive oil or avocado oil
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt

      Beet salad

      • 3 ounces feta cheese preferably Greek feta
      • 2 ounces pine nuts walnuts, or pecans
      • 1-2 tablespoons fresh chopped herbs parsley, dill, and/or mint

      Vinaigrette

      • 6 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
      • 2 tablespoons vinegar balsamic or red wine
      • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
      • 1 small garlic clove zested or chopped very fine (optional)
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
      • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper optional

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Roast beets

      • Pre-heat the oven to 400°F. Trim top greens leaving 1-inch of beet stem. Scrub beets clean and dry with paper towels.
      • Place a double layer of heavy foil large enough to wrap the beets all together on the counter. Place the beets in the center and drizzle with oil, sprinkle with salt. Roast beets until very tender, 45-60 minutes depending on size. The larger the beets the longer they take. When done you should be able to easily pierce through them with a thin metal skewer like a cake tester.
      • When beets are done, open packet and cool until you can handle them, then peel with a vegetable peeler, paring knife, or by rubbing with paper towels.

      Make the vinaigrette

      • While the beets are roasting, make the vinaigrette. Add all ingredients to a small bowl and whisk until smooth. Alternatively add to a jar with a tight lid and shake well.

      Make the beet salad

      • Chop the beets into approximately ¾" cubes and add to a medium bowl. Add two tablespoons of the vinaigrette and toss to coat the beets.
        Sprinkle in the crumbled cheese, nut, and chopped herbs. Add more vinaigrette if desired or serve extra on the side. Beet salad is ready to serve.
      • If making the salad ahead of time, ready the components and refrigerate separate. Combine and dress when ready to serve. Leftover beet salad lasts 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. The cheese will turn pink! Add more dressing if needed.

      Notes

      • Swap goat cheese for the feta cheese.
      • Walnuts are terrific as are these glazed maple pecans.
      • Use a flavored olive oil such as lemon, blood orange, or basil.
      • Use lemon juice or orange juice instead of vinegar.
      • Thin slices of red onion are a nice addition.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 285kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 6gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gCholesterol: 13mgSodium: 381mgPotassium: 501mgFiber: 4gSugar: 9gVitamin A: 125IUVitamin C: 7mgCalcium: 96mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Lemon Mousse (Light and Airy)

      08/22/2011 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      easy lemon mousse

      Light, airy, and bursting with bright citrus flavor, this lemon mousse is a dreamy dessert for lemon lovers. It's made by folding together fluffy whipped egg whites, homemade lemon curd, and billowy whipped cream for a luscious, cloud-like texture. Refreshing, elegant, and make-ahead friendly, it's an easy lemon dessert that feels special enough for guests but simple enough for any spring or summer meal.

      A stemmed wine glass with softly whipped lemon mouse garnished with mint and a blackberry.

      For fifty years, Amelia's restaurant on Balboa Island was a beloved Southern California landmark. Although now closed, their famous lemon mousse inspired this recipe. Making lemon mousse is simpler than it sounds: cook a bright lemon curd, whip the egg whites and cream, then gently fold everything together. Chill it for a few hours and it's ready to serve as a light, elegant make-ahead dessert.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Lemon Mousse

      • Light and airy - Billowy whipped cream and whipped egg whites give this lemon mousse its cloud-like texture.
      • Bright lemon flavor - Homemade lemon curd gives it fresh, tangy citrus flavor without tasting heavy.
      • Make-ahead friendly - Chill it a few hours before serving, making it perfect for entertaining.
      • Elegant but easy - It looks and tastes special, but the steps are simple: cook, whip, fold, and chill.

      For another tasty dessert mouse, try this white chocolate mousse.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      • Eggs: large, un-cracked eggs.
      • Lemons: Fresh lemons, for the juice and zest.
      • Cream: Buy heavy whipping cream (not just whipping cream).
      • Sugar: Use either white sugar, superfine white sugar, natural unrefined sugar, or granular monk fruit/allulose blend ro reduce sugar.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Reduce the sugar - Replace half of the sugar with a monk fruit/allulose blend, or use all monk fruit blend if preferred. This keeps the mousse lighter in sugar while still tasting bright and balanced.
      • Orange mousse - Swap the lemon juice and zest for fresh orange juice and orange zest for a softer, sweeter citrus mousse.
      • Lime mousse - Use fresh lime juice and lime zest instead of lemon for a tangier variation.
      • Whipped cream garnish - For extra whipped cream on top, buy an additional ½ cup heavy cream and whip it separately with a little sugar or monk fruit blend.

      For another terrific mousse flavor, try this white chocolate mousse. It's divine!

      Chef's Note: Traditional lemon curd is usually finished with butter for richness and shine, but it's not needed here. The whipped cream adds richness, while the butter-free lemon custard keeps the mousse light, bright, and airy.

      How to Make Lemon Mousse

      Step 1: Make the lemon curd. Set up a double boiler. In a medium bowl, whip the egg yolks by hand with a whisk until thick and pale in color (and get a good arm workout).

      Step 2: Whisk in the sugar, lemon juice, and lemon zest. Place the bowl on the saucepan of barley simmering water (double boiler set-up) and cook yolks, whisking continually. In a few minutes it transforms into a thick light curd. You will know when it is ready when it coats the back of a spoon and you can draw your finger through it and the line stays.

      The back of a stainless steel spoon with a line through it showing lemon curd it ready.

      Step 3: Whip the egg whites until stiff and glossy. For hands-free preparation use a standing mixer with a wire whip attachment or a hand mixer with beaters. Clean the whip or beaters, then use them to whip the cream. See note below recipe.

      Whipped and blended mousse in a large stainless steel bowl with a whisk and spoon.

      Step 4: Lastly, whip your cream. The cream should be very cold, and use the clean beaters from whipping the egg whites.

      Step 5: Finish the mousse. Combine all three parts by gently folding together with a flexible spatula (or gently whisk together). Cover and chill your mousse until serving time.

      For another delicious lemon dessert, try this easy lemon posset. Just 3 ingredients!

      Serving and Storage

      Spoon lemon mousse into glasses and top with fresh berries. Stemmed wine glasses make a pretty presentation, but small dessert glasses or ramekins work too. Fresh raspberries are my favorite, but blueberries, strawberries, blackberries, or pomegranate seeds all pair beautifully with the bright lemon flavor.

      For an extra garnish, whip an additional ½ cup heavy cream with a little sugar or monk fruit blend, then spoon or pipe it on top just before serving.

      Lemon mousse can be made a few hours ahead, or up to 1 day ahead. Keep it covered and refrigerated until ready to serve.

      Fluffy light lemon mousse in a glass.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make lemon mousse without cream?

      For a dairy-free lemon mousse, try using stiffly whipped coconut cream or a non-dairy heavy cream alternative. I have not tested the current brands, so results may vary.

      Can I make lemon mousse ahead of time?

      Yes. Lemon mousse is best made a few hours ahead and can be made up to 1 day in advance. Keep it covered and refrigerated until ready to serve.

      How do I get a fluffy texture?

      Fold the lemon custard, whipped egg whites, and whipped cream together gently so you don't deflate the mousse. The goal is to keep as much air in the mixture as possible for a light, fluffy texture.

      Is lemon mousse the same as lemon curd?

      No. Lemon curd is a thick, tangy lemon custard usually made with egg yolks, lemon juice, sugar, and butter. Lemon mousse is lighter and fluffier because the lemon custard is folded with whipped egg whites and whipped cream.

      More Lemon Recipes

      Love lemon? Try this lemon almond cake, or lemon thyme brussels sprouts. Maybe you'd rather have lemon ice cream? It's divine.

      • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
        Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade
      • Four lemon posset custard dessert cups topped with fresh berries.
        Easy Lemon Posset Recipe
      • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
        Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
      • lemon thyme brussels sprouts
        Sautéed Brussels Sprouts with Lemon and Thyme

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this lemon mousse, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers

      📖 Recipe

      Italian Lemon mousse | afoodcentriclife.com

      Lemon Mousse

      Sally Cameron
      This light lemony dessert recipe is always a hit. Garnish with a few fresh berries and mint leaves if desired. If you prefer a totally smooth mouse, omit the lemon zest but it adds lemon flavor. Lemon mousse can be made a day ahead and refrigerated until serving.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 10 minutes mins
      Whip cream and white 10 minutes mins
      Total Time 30 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6
      Calories 318 kcal

      Equipment

      • Hand mixer with beaters or standing mixer with whisk attachment

      Ingredients
        

      • 6 large eggs separated
      • ½ cup natural granulated sugar OR monk fruit blend, or ½ and ½
      • 2 large lemons zested, juiced and juice strained
      • 1 ¼ cups heavy cream well chilled

      Optional Garnishes

      • ½ cup fresh berries or more
      • fresh mint leaves
      • ½ cup whipped heavy cream lightly sweetened

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Separate the egg whites from the yolks while they are cold (it's a little easier) and set the whites aside to come to room temperature for better volume when you whip them.
      • Set up a double boiler. Place a large saucepan on the stove top with a few inches of water in it. Bring the water almost to a boil and turn down to simmer. Choose a stainless steel or glass bowl that will fit on top yet partially inside the pan taking care that the bottom of the bowl does not touch the hot water.
      • In the bowl, whip egg yolks with a whisk until thick and pale in color, then whisk in the sugar, 4 tablespoons of strained lemon juice and the lemon zest. Place the bowl on top of the saucepan of hot water and cook yolks, whisking until it sets, thickens, and forms a thick pudding or custard, 5-6 minutes. You will know when it it ready when the curd coats the back of a spoon. You'll be able to draw your finger through it and the line stays. Remove the bowl of lemon custard and set aside to cool. See note below for faster cooling
      • While curd is cooling, whip egg whites to stiff, glossy peaks with a standing mixer fitted with a whip attachment or a hand mixer with beaters. Next, whip the cream in a separate bowl.
        When custard is cool, gently combine all three parts: custard, whipped egg whites and whipped cream. Chill until serving time.

      To Serve

      • Serve in stemmed wine glasses or regular glasses topped with berries and garnished with mint. If you want to top with extra sweetened whipped cream, that's another option.

      Notes

      If you have a standing mixer with the whisk attachment, use it to whip both the whites and cream. Do the whites first and transfer them to a clean dry bowl. Fat from the cream prevents whites from whipping stiffly. Next, whip the cream, then add the cold lemon curd into the bowl and combine on low speed. Lastly add the white back in. 
      TO REDUCE SUGAR - use either all monk fruit blend or half sugar and half monk fruit.
      To cool the lemon curd quickly, set up an ice bath; a larger bowl of half ice and half cold water. 
      Egg safety note: This recipe uses whipped egg whites that are not cooked. Use clean, fresh, un-cracked eggs, and separate them carefully. For anyone pregnant, very young, elderly, or immune-compromised, use pasteurized eggs for extra peace of mind.
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 318kcalCarbohydrates: 24gProtein: 8gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 254mgSodium: 91mgPotassium: 184mgFiber: 1gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 1014IUVitamin C: 26mgCalcium: 72mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Creamy Leek and Mushroom Soup Recipe

      10/26/2024 by Sally Cameron 23 Comments

      A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.

      Creamy leek and mushroom soup is a cozy, flavorful bowl of comfort welcome in soup season. Earthy meaty mushrooms pair perfectly with the subtle sweetness of leeks to create a simple yet satisfying dish that's both creamy and light. Perfect for a chilly evening or a warm lunch, this one-pot soup can easily be made vegan, dairy-free, or with regular dairy to suit many dietary needs.

      Gray bowls of leek and mushroom soup with garlic toast and parsley.

      Making this leek and creamy mushroom soup is straightforward. Sauté the leeks and mushrooms until they're soft and fragrant, then simmer everything together with broth and herbs for added depth of flavor. For a creamy finish, blend part of the soup and stir in your choice of dairy cream or non-dairy cream. Mushrooms are good for you and all of the ingredients in this soup are immune system boosters, great for fall and winter.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Make mushroom leek soup dairy-free, vegan, or with regular dairy. 
      • With wonderful earthy flavors, it's delicious soup. 
      • If you like cream of mushroom soup, you'll like this too.

      For another recipe that uses leeks, try this braised cabbage with leeks and bacon. It's a terrific side dish.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Prep bowls of mushroom, leeks, cream, onion, lemon, herbs, and garlic for leek and mushroom soup.
      • Fresh mushrooms: Buy medium white mushrooms, brown mushrooms, or a combination. 
      • Butter: Unsalted dairy butter or vegan butter. 
      • Leek: Get a large one. Use the pale green and white portion of the leek, discarding the tough top dark green parts.
      • Onion: Use brown, white or yellow onions. 
      • Garlic: Fresh garlic is best.
      • Herbs: Fresh tarragon or fresh thyme leaves add flavor (I use both). Fresh parsley or a little green onion add nice color and garnish.   
      • Broth: Homemade chicken broth (chicken stock) or vegetable broth for vegetarian and vegan diners. If buying broth, look for low sodium and clean ingredients. 
      • Milk: Use heavy cream, half and half, or canned coconut milk for creamy soup as a non-dairy option. You don't taste the coconut at all!
      • Lemon juice: For a little flavor lift. 
      • Cornstarch: For optional thickening at the end. For thinner soup, omit.

      Please see the recipe card for quantities and all ingredients, salt and pepper.

      For broth options, make your own for the best soup. Here's an easy Instant Pot chicken broth recipe, my vegetable broth recipe, and turkey broth recipe for rich flavor.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For dried herbs instead of fresh, the swap is approximately ⅓-1/2 as much dried as fresh.
      • For the ground black pepper, try white pepper.
      • Use fun garnishes such as grated Parmesan, finely chopped Italian parsley, chopped crisp bacon, or crunchy croutons. 
      • If you can't do coconut milk, also try a plant-based heavy cream substitute. 
      • Use two tablespoons of olive oil as a sub for butter.
      • Incorporate wild mushrooms as part of your mix. 

      Chef's Tip: Buying mushrooms. Fresh mushrooms have firm caps that are closed underneath with no exposed gills. Mushrooms should not have brown spots, be slimy or withered. For this soup I use both white and brown (cremini) mushrooms, but you can use all of either one.

      Recipe Instructions

      Hands trimming mushrooms with a paring knife on a walnut cutting board.
      Step 1: With a paring knife, trim the stems of the mushroom.
      Hands holding mushrooms under a trickle of water to rinse them.
      Step 2: Briefly rinse mushrooms under a trickle of cold water rubbing them gently in your hands. Yes you can get them wet.
      A tray of washed brown and white mushrooms drying on paper towels.
      Step 3: As mushrooms are washed, lay them on a paper towel lined tray to dry.
      Hands showing thinly sliced mushrooms above the bowl of a food processor.
      Step 4: Thinly sliced mushrooms in a food processor about ⅛th inch thick. Alternatively slice them thin by hand.
      Chopped onions and leeks sautéing in a dutch oven.
      Step 5: Melt tablespoons butter in a heavy large pot. over medium heat. When hot, add chopped onions and leeks.
      Cooked onions and leeks with green herbs making a soup base.
      Step 6: When onions and leeks are soft, 5-7 minutes, add garlic and herbs. Cook 1 minute more.
      A pot full of raw sliced mushrooms cooking down for soup.
      Step 7: Add all of the mushrooms to the pot and stir from the bottom to mix the onions, leeks, and herbs.
      A heavy pot full of juicy cooking mushrooms as they give off their liquid.
      Step 8: Mushrooms give off liquid as they cook down, getting very juicy. Cook until moist of the liquid is gone, 20-22 minutes. 

      A gray dutch oven filled with finished  leek and mushrooms soup ready to eat.
      Step 8: Add the cream or coconut milk and simmer for a few minutes to blend flavors and heat through for serving. If you have extra fresh herbs chopped, add them near the end for more fresh flavor.

      Chef's tip: How to clean leeks properly. Chop off the dark green top and root end. Discard or save for making broth if desired. Slice the leek in half lengthwise and rinse under cold water to remove any dirt or sandy grit. Lay the leek halves flat, slice in half lengthwise, then thinly crosswise. Have extra leeks? Use them anywhere you would use onions and shallots; in soups, stews, casseroles, and more. Their subtle sweetness is delicious in recipes. 

      What else do I use leeks in? My gluten-free Thanksgiving stuffing recipe, for another level of flavor.

      Serving and Storage

      Sometimes I give my soup a couple of pulses in a blender to refine it just a bit (optional). An immersion blender (stick blender) used right in the pot works too. Place the pot in the sink to reduce splattering. Serve it just as it is with more texture. Taste the soup and adjust the seasoning with salt and pepper if desired.

      For a little color, add fresh chopped parsley. Serve with a green salad for a nice balance with a fresh lemon vinaigrette. Crusty bread is a nice accompaniment.

      Leek and mushroom soup lasts in the refrigerator for up to four days and reheats nicely on the stovetop. Because of the dairy, it won't freeze well but try these options: 

      • Make the base of the soup without the dairy, freeze, then add cream or milk, or coconut milk upon reheating after thawing.
      • Freeze it with the dairy but reheat gently and slowly on the stovetop.
      • If it separates, puree it in a blender. 
      • Use heavy cream as with the higher fat content it will freeze better.
      A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.

      Recipe FAQs

      How do I clean leeks properly?

      To properly clean leeks, chop off the top part where the stalks are dark green. This part is tougher and not used for cooking. You need only the white and pale green portion of the leek. Slice the leek longways in half and run it under cold water to dislodge any sand, grit, or dirt. Dry the leek and proceed with the recipe.

      How can I make the soup creamy without using cream?

      One great trick is to use canned coconut milk. It's a great replacement for cream in creamy soup, and surprisingly does not impart a coconut flavor. Use it straight from the can or dilute it just a little before adding to the soup.

      Can I make leek and mushroom soup vegan or vegetarian?

      To make leek and mushroom soup vegan or vegetarian, use coconut milk instead of cream or heavy cream, and replace chicken broth with vegetable broth. Also, to saute the vegetables, use either a plant-based butter or extra virgin olive oil.

      Can I add other vegetables to leek and mushroom soup?

      If you want to add more vegetable to leek and mushroom soup, try small diced cooked gold potatoes (as they hold their shape better than starchy russets), cooked carrot and celery.

      More Meaty Mushroom Recipes

      If your a mushroom lover, try steakhouse roasted mushrooms or stuffed portobello mushrooms with goat cheese, or mushroom duxelles - The classic French mixture of finely chopped mushrooms, herbs, garlic and shallots cooked in just a little butter. It's a terrific spread for crostini or crackers.

      • steakhouse roasted mushrooms
        Sauteed Mushrooms and Onions
      • Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.
        Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms With Parmesan Cheese
      • stuffed portobello mushrooms with goat cheese and tomatoes
        Stuffed Portobello Mushrooms
      • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
        Classic French Mushroom Duxelle

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make leek and mushroom soup, please comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

      Originally published 12-8-2013, updated 10-26-24.

      📖 Recipe

      A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.

      Leek and Mushroom Soup

      Sally Cameron
      Leek and mushroom soup is earthy and satisfying. Lemon gives this soup a lift of bright flavor and the fresh herbs provide aromatic flavor. A food processor makes quick work of thinly slicing the mushrooms, but you can slice them by hand. If you don't like tarragon, use thyme. For vegan soup use plant-based butter and vegetable broth.
      5 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 35 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
      Course Soup
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4 Yield 2 quarts
      Calories 380 kcal

      Equipment

      • Food Processor optional
      • 5 ½ quart Dutch oven or similar pot

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 pounds fresh mushrooms white, brown or combination
      • 2 tablespoons dairy butter or plant-based butter or extra virgin olive oil
      • 1 ½ cups thinly sliced leek 1 large leek, light part only
      • 1 cup finely chopped onion 1 medium onion
      • 3 large garlic cloves finely chopped
      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped tarragon or thyme leaves or use both
      • 3 cups low sodium chicken or vegetable broth
      • 1 cup cream, half and half, or canned coconut milk
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon white pepper or black pepper
      • 1 small lemon, juiced
      • 1-2 tablespoons finely chopped Italian parsley optional garnish
      • 1 tablespoon cornstarch for thickening, optional

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Prep Mushrooms

      • With a paring knife, trim mushrooms stems flush to the base. Discard stems. To clean mushrooms, cup 2-3 mushrooms in your hands and quickly run them under a trickle of cold water, rubbing the mushrooms gently between your hands. Place washed mushrooms on a clean kitchen towel or paper towel.  Slice mushrooms ⅛″ thick (3 mm) in a food processor with the slicing blade or by hand.

      Cook the Vegetables

      • In a large pot (5 quart) heat oil over medium low heat. Add the leek and onion and cook slowly until soft, stirring occasionally, 5-7 minutes. Add garlic and herbs, cook 1 more minute, stirring. Add mushrooms. Cook until mushrooms have given off their moisture and cooked down. Most of the liquid should be gone, 20-22 minutes.

      Finish the Soup

      • Add broth and cream or coconut milk. Heat through and serve hot. Add the lemon juice, then taste and season with additional salt and pepper if desired. If you want the soup a little smoother, pulse in a blender a few times before serving.  
        Note - If you have extra fresh herbs, I add a little more towards the end for a boost of herbal flavor.

      Notes

      This soup will keep refrigerated for 4- days, so make it ahead on the weekend and enjoy during the week. It's great for lunch or dinner. Just add a green salad.
      Nutritional information was calculated with regular dairy butter and cream. If you use plant-butter and coconut milk your numbers will be a little different. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2cupsCalories: 380kcalCarbohydrates: 23gProtein: 14gFat: 29gSaturated Fat: 18gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 82mgSodium: 426mgPotassium: 1107mgFiber: 5gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 1696IUVitamin C: 30mgCalcium: 102mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Easy Gluten-Free Pumpkin Bread Recipe

      10/06/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

      A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.

      Craving the perfect fall treat that's easy to make, gluten-free and dairy-free? This gluten-free pumpkin bread recipe has everything you need for delicious autumn baking. With a blend of warm spices, creamy pumpkin purée, and just the right amount of sweetness from brown sugar, it's moist, tender, and packed with cozy flavor. Best of all, you probably have everything in your pantry-so let's get baking!

      A sliced loaf of pumpkin bread on a wire cooling rack with a knife and coffee.

      Fall and baking just go together. So if you're craving something with pumpkin and spices, something easy to make and bake, here's the answer: gluten free pumpkin bread. The ingredients are simple and the results delicious.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Warm spices for fall flavor.
      • It's a "quick bread", easy to make with simple ingredients.
      • Perfect for breakfast or an afternoon snack.
      • Freezes for up to 3 months.
      • Serve it with this easy maple butter!

      Here's another easy gluten-free bread recipe, my Irish Soda Bread. It's not just for St. Patrick's Day!

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for pumpkin bread in small prep bowls on a marble counter.
      • Pumpkin puree: Use pure canned pumpkin puree, not pumpkin pie filling.
      • Flour: I tested with King Arthur Measure for Measure GF flour. Other flours may work, I just haven't tried them. If your blend does not have xanthan gum, add ½ a teaspoon to your flour. It helps bind, thicken, and emulsify the batter.
      • Baking soda and powder: Both are needed as leavening agents for light fluffy structure.
      • Sugar: I went with all light brown sugar for this pumpkin bread, for more flavor and moisture than white sugar.
      • Eggs: Large eggs. I have not tested flax eggs for vegan pumpkin bread.
      • Oil: Use a healthy neutral oil.
      • Vanilla: Use good vanilla extract, the real stuff. Here is the best vanilla and my favorite brand. If you love vanilla, get some of their vanilla paste too.
      • Warm spices: Use ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, allspice, ground ginger, and a little ground cloves.

      For measurements please see the recipe card. You'll need a 9x5 light metal baking loaf pan.

      For another easy baking recipe, try this naturally gluten-free cornbread.

      Chef's Tip on Oil: I use Zero Acre Farms and it's terrific for all neutral cooking oil needs. It's fermented from sugarcane plants (isn't that cool?), full of monounsaturated fat, with a high smoke point and a clean taste. Don't use vegetable oil. It's industrially processed and terrible for you. Toss it. We have better options today. This is now my #2 oil along side olive oil.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For other oil options, use quality avocado oil or coconut oil melted, or expeller pressed grapeseed oil.
      • If you like nuts, add ½ cup - ¾ cup of finely chopped pecans or walnuts to the batter. Fold it in by hand before baking.
      • Swap a pumpkin spice blend for the individual spices.
      • For coconut sugar, substitute a cup of coconut sugar for the brown sugar, with one note. Coconut sugar looks and tastes a lot like brown sugar, but it doesn't hold as much moisture. This pumpkin bread is super moist, so it should work without becoming dry.

      For another homemade baked treat, try this golden gluten-free cornbread.

      How to Make Pumpkin Bread

      Flour and spices for pumpkin bread in a glass bowl.
      Step 1: Sift dry ingredients into a medium bowl. Whisk well to combine.
      Egg, oil, pumpkin puree, and brown sugar in a glass bowl.
      Step 2: Add eggs, oil, pumpkin, brown sugar, and vanilla to another bowl.
      The start of pumpkin batter after being mixed smooth.
      Step 3: With an electric hand mixer, beat wet ingredients until smooth.
      Unmixed dry ingredients and wet ingredients in a bowl for making pumpkin bread.
      Step 4: Add dry ingredients to the bowl.
      Finished pumpkin bread batter, smooth and creamy, ready to bake.
      Step 5: Beat the batter for 4 full minutes, until smooth and creamy.
      Pumpkin bread batter in a silver metal baking pan ready for the oven.
      Step 6: Pour the finished batter into a 9x5 light metal baking pan sprayed with cooking spray. Bake at 325°F for 1 hour. 
      A sliced loaf of pumpkin bread on a black wire cooling rack.
      Step 7: Remove pumpkin bread from the oven, run a thin spatula or knife around the inside edge, then gently turn the bread out onto a wire cooling rack. Cool completely before slicing.

      Gluten-Free Baking Tips

      This is why gluten-free pumpkin bread is done as it is. Many of these tips are also for general gluten-free baking.

      • Gluten-free flours need resting time to hydrate for best results. Don't skip this step.
      • Since there is no gluten to toughen the bread from beating, beat it well to aerate and help build structure.
      • More leavening is needed to lighten the batter and final result, so I use more baking soda and powder.
      • Gluten-free baking often requires a little lower temperature (25°F) and maybe a longer bake time.
      • Use a GF flour blend with xanthan gum to bind the ingredients, which is usually the role of gluten in wheat flour.

      Chef's Tip: Pumpkin and chocolate chips is a great combination, try this pumpkin cake with chocolate chips sweetened with maple syrup.

      Serving Suggestions

      Gluten-free pumpkin bread is terrific with a cup of coffee at breakfast or a cup of tea for an afternoon snack. Tuck a wrapped piece into a briefcase or lunch bag. It's a welcome treat pretty much anytime especially in fall.

      It's delicious plain but also nice dressed up for dessert with a dollop of softly whipped cream sweetened with a little sugar and vanilla extract. Also nice is a little cream cheese frosting. Serve it at room temperature or warm it up.

      How to Freeze Pumpkin Bread

      Be sure the pumpkin bread is completely cooled in a wire rack. Wrap and seal in plastic wrap, then in aluminum foil, and then into a freezer bag. This keeps the bread from drying out and avoids freezer burn.

      Be sure to label and date the package. Bread freezes well for up to 3 months. To thaw, place overnight in the refrigerator.

      A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.

      Recipe FAQs

      What gluten-free flour is best for pumpkin bread?

      The best gluten-free flour blend for pumpkin bread is the one that the recipe creator identifies in the recipe as tested with. There are many differences in gluten-free flour blends. Even when the ingredients look the same or similar, they may provide a different result.

      Choose a gluten-free flour blend that has xanthan gum, or add it. It helps with structure, acts as a binder (because gluten is a binder), and helps the moisture of the pumpkin bread batter so your pumpkin bread doesn't crumble. If your blend does not have xanthan gum, add a ¼ teaspoon per cup of flour. It's the secret weapon of GF baking.

      Can I substitute different sweeteners?

      Yes, but realize your result when experimenting might be a little different than the original recipe, plus any changes may effect baking times. That being said, you can generally swap coconut sugar, turbinado, demerara or sucanat (coarse brown raw sugars) for brown sugar. To swap maple syrup or agave syrup for sugar, use ⅔ as much.

      Another swap, to reduce sugar and carbs is to use either a white granulated monk fruit/allulose blend or the golden monk fruit. Try substituting half and half to start, and if you are happy with that, try all monk fruit.

      How should I store gluten-free pumpkin bread?

      Pumpkin bread can be stored on the kitchen counter well wrapped for 3 days. If you prefer, it can also be refrigerated. For freezing, wrap in plastic film, then sealed in foil, then into a freezer bag with the air pressed out for up to 3 months.

      More Pumpkin Recipes

      For more delicious fall recipes with pumpkin, try these pumpkin recipes. From soups to smoothies, pumpkin is for more than dessert!

      • black bean pumpkin soup
        Creamy Black Bean Pumpkin Soup
      • A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse dusted with cinnamon with a gold spoon.
        Pumpkin Mousse (Easy No-Bake Dessert)
      • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
        Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
      • Pumpkin tart
        Pumpkin Tart (Gluten-Free Almond Flour Crust)

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this pumpkin bread recipe, please comment and let me know how you liked it, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.

      Gluten-free Pumpkin Bread

      Sally Cameron
      With a tender crumb and warm spices, this pumpkin bread is gluten-free, dairy-free, and totally delicious. Great for an afternoon snack, at breakfast, even dessert.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 1 hour hr
      Batter rest time 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
      Course Breakfast, Snack
      Cuisine American
      Servings 10
      Calories 242 kcal

      Equipment

      • Hand mixer
      • 9"x5" light metal baking loaf pan
      • Cooling rack

      Ingredients
        

      Dry Ingredients

      • 1 ½ cups gluten-free flour blend I used KA Measure for Measure, see notes
      • 2 teaspoons baking soda
      • ¾ teaspoon baking powder aluminum free
      • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon allspice
      • ¼ teaspoon ground ginger
      • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
      • ⅛ teaspoon ground clove

      Wet Ingredients

      • 1 cup canned pumpkin pure (not pie mix) 8.4 ounces
      • 3 large eggs
      • 1 cup light brown sugar, lightly packed 6 ounces
      • 1 ½ teaspoons real vanilla extract
      • ⅓ cup neutral flavored oil melted coconut oil or MCT oil

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Pre-heat the oven to 325°F. Spray a 9x5 light metal baking loaf pan.
      • Measure out all of the dry ingredients and sift into a medium bowl or onto parchment or waxed paper.
      • To a medium bowl add all of the wet ingredients. With an electric hand mixer whip until it's smooth and blended, about 1 minute.
      • Add the dry ingredients into the smooth wet batter, start on low and build to high speed beating for 4 minutes. Pour the batter into the prepared loaf pan and smooth it out with a spatula. Bake for 1 hour, until a cake tester or long thin skewer comes out clean with just a few moist crumbs.
      • Remove pan from the oven. Run a thin knife or thin metal spatula around the inside of the pan then gently turn the pumpkin bread out onto a wire cooling rack. Allow it to cool completely before slicing.
        Pumpkin bread lasts 3-4 days well wrapped on the counter or can be refrigerated. for freezing, after completely cooled, wrap in plastic wrap, then in aluminum foil, then place in a freezer zip bag for up to 3 months. Be sure to label and date the bag.

      Notes

      Flour
      I tested with King Arthur Measure for Measure gluten-free flour which includes xanthan gum. Other flours will likely work, I just have not tested all of the options. If you're blend does not include xanthan gum, add ½ a teaspoon to the dry mix. 
      If you use another flour blend, drop a comment in a let me know, until I get more tested.
      Spices
      If you do not have all of the spices, use at least cinnamon and whatever else you have, but all of the spices do provide great flavor. 
      Oil
      My oil preference for neutral oil is Zero Acre Farms. It's clean and healthy.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 242kcalCarbohydrates: 37gProtein: 4gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.03gCholesterol: 56mgSodium: 283mgPotassium: 103mgFiber: 3gSugar: 23gVitamin A: 3895IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 65mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!



      Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon

      02/05/2018 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

      roasted broccoli

      Broccoli is endlessly versatile: steam it, snack on it raw with dip, shred it for slaw, or purée it into soup. But roasted? That's where it turns sweet and nutty. This roasted broccoli with parmesan gets a bright finish of lemon zest and toasted pine nuts and comes together with minimal prep. It's a fast and tasty side that pairs with just about any main and it always gets eaten.

      A serving platter of green broccoli spears with parmesan cheees and lemon zest garnish.

      We eat broccoli a few times a week, and I love roasting vegetables-so roasted broccoli was a natural evolution. Toss florets with a little olive oil, kosher salt, black pepper, and a pinch of granulated garlic, then slide the pan into a hot oven for about 15 minutes. To serve, finish with lemon zest, toasted pine nuts, and a shower of Parmesan. Simple-and so good.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Roasted Broccoli

      • Quick & foolproof. Minimal prep; the oven does the work in about 15 minutes.
      • Actually crave-worthy veggies. Roasting turns broccoli sweet, nutty, and irresistible.
      • Parmesan finish. A salty, savory lift (for dairy-free, skip it or use a vegan Parm alternative).

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for roasted broccoli on a counter in glass prep bowls.
      • Broccoli - Choose crowns if possible. This is the top part, less stem and waste. Skip pre-cut bags; they're often small, uneven, and less fresh.
      • Lemon - Zest for brightness and color; serve with wedges for a fresh squeeze at the table.
      • Oil - Extra-virgin olive oil or avocado oil-just enough to lightly coat so the edges brown.
      • Garlic - Granulated garlic powder for even flavor without burning. (Not garlic salt.)
      • Parmesan - Finely grated for a salty, nutty finish. For dairy-free, skip or use a vegan-style Parmesan.
      • Nuts - Pine nuts bring buttery crunch; toast lightly in a dry skillet while the broccoli roasts or use raw.

      Please see the recipe card for measurement, salt, and pepper.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Cheese - Try Pecorino Romano (saltier, sharper).
      • Nuts - Try pistachios, walnuts, cashews, or slivered almonds. Toast briefly for extra flavor.
      • Heat: Add red pepper flakes or a pinch of Aleppo pepper before roasting.
      • Balsamic glaze - Add a light drizzle of balsamic glaze after roasting.
      • Crunch: Sprinkle with toasted breadcrumbs right before serving for extra texture.

      Looking for another terrific broccoli recipe? Try my Crunchy Broccoli Bacon Salad (for your bacon lovers)

      Chef's Tip: Temperature & Timing

      • Why 400°F: More forgiving than 425°F-browns without scorching, but you can go wtih 425°F, just keep an eye on the broccoli while roasting.
      • Floret size: For bite-size florets, roast 14-18 min at 400°F; larger needs longer.
      • Convection: Check 2-3 min earlier.
      • Parmesan: Add in the last 1-2 min or off-heat as a garnish.

      How To Roast Broccoli

      Pre-heat the oven to 400°F and ready a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment.

      Trimming a head of green broccoli into smaller florets for roasting.
      1. Wash broccoli and trim broccoli into florets. Be sure it is completely dry before roasting.
      Broccoli florets arranged flat on a baking tray for roasting.

      2. Toss florets with oi, garlic, salt, and pepper. Lay flat in a single layer on the baking tray.

      Roasted broccoli on a baking tray atop parchment paper.

      3. Roast until edges are lightly browned and stems are tender when pierced, about 15 minutes.

      A serving platter of green broccoli spears with parmesan cheees and lemon zest garnish.

      4. Arrange broccoli on a platter and sprinkle with the parmesan, lemon zest, and nuts to serve.

      Serving Suggestions For Roasted Broccoli

      • With proteins: Roast chicken, seared salmon, steak, or pork tenderloin.
      • Pasta toss: Combine with hot penne, a splash of pasta water, lemon zest, and Parmesan.
      • Grain bowl: Spoon over quinoa or farro; finish with olive oil and extra lemon.
      • Eggs & brunch: Fold into a frittata or serve alongside soft-scrambled eggs.

      Storage & Reheating

      • Fridge: Store in an airtight container up to 3 days.
      • Reheat: Sheet pan at 400°F for 5-7 minutes to re-crisp; add fresh lemon zest and a little Parm to revive.

      This is not ideal for freezing as the broccoli really softens.

      Recipe FAQs

      How do I keep roasted broccoli from getting soggy?

      Dry florets thoroughly after washing, don't crowd the pan, and use enough heat. A preheated heavy sheet pan helps with browning.

      Should I use parchment or a bare sheet pan?

      Parchment = easy cleanup, good browning. Preheated bare pan = deepest browning, but watch closely and use a light film of spray oil to prevent sticking.

      Can I roast frozen broccoli (IQF)?

      Many sources say yes, and you can get passable results with high heat and careful technique. But fresh broccoli is best for roasting. IQF-individually quick-frozen-broccoli may release slightly less water than block-frozen, yet it still tends to steam as it heats, so browning is limited. For true roasted flavor and texture, use fresh; keep frozen for soups, casseroles, or a quick sauté. In a pinch, use the IQF broccoli spears right out of the freezer, and higher heat, 425°F - 450°F.

      More Green Veggie Recipes

      While many people don't think they are veggie lovers, these green veggies recipes might just change their mind. And be sure to check out the sides & veggies recipe index for more ideas.

      • Broccoli bacon salad
        Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
      • broccoli cabbage slaw
        Broccoli Slaw Recipe with Creamy Apple Cider Dressing
      • A bowl of burnished roasted Brussels sprouts glazed with Balsamic.
        Brussels Sprouts with Balsamic Vinegar
      • lemon thyme brussels sprouts
        Sautéed Brussels Sprouts with Lemon and Thyme

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this roasted broccoli with parmesan, please leave and comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you and appreciate your feedback, plus comments are good for others readers. And please add a star rating. Thanks!

      📖 Recipe

      roasted broccoli

      Roasted Broccoli with Lemon and Parmesan

      Sally Cameron
      Another great way to get more veggies onto your plate, roasted broccoli takes just minutes in the oven, top with pine nuts, lemon zest and Parmesan or non-dairy cheesy sprinkle. Broccoli browns are just broccoli heads with some of the thick stem already cut off. Many stores sell the top "crowns", but you can buy heads of broccoli as well. Parchment is available in rolls at most grocery stores next to foil, or online in pre-cut sheets (which are super handy).
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 15 minutes mins
      Total Time 20 minutes mins
      Course Side Dish
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4
      Calories 203 kcal

      Equipment

      • Baking sheet tray
      • Parchment

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 pounds broccoli crowns
      • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
      • 1 lemon, zested
      • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic
      • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
      • 3 tablespoon pine nuts
      • 2-3 tablespoons grated Parmesan cheese or dairy free vegan cheese powder

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Pre-heat the oven to 400°F and line a half sheet baking pan with parchment. Trim broccoli into florets with some stem left. Slice larger pieces in half top to bottom. For trimming help, see photos in post. 
      • Toss florets with oil. Lay florets flat in a single layer and sprinkle evenly with garlic, pepper and salt. Roast for 15 minutes or until the edges are just browned and stems are tender when pierced with a sharp paring knife. Timing will depend on your oven. To serve, sprinkle with pine nuts, lemon zest and Parmesan.

      Notes

      Link to the dairy free cheesy sprinkle is here

      Nutrition

      Calories: 203kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 8gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 2mgSodium: 265mgPotassium: 776mgFiber: 6gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 1439IUVitamin C: 204mgCalcium: 133mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Turkey Broth Recipe

      11/18/2022 by Sally Cameron 13 Comments

      Rich brown roasted turkey broth in glass jars on a kitchen counter.

      If you've never made homemade turkey broth, it's time you do! After years of making this recipe, I've perfected a method for the richest, most flavorful turkey broth recipe, starting with roasted turkey legs and thighs plus caramelized vegetables. This is truly amazing broth, slow-simmered for hours (or an Instant Pot option) until golden and deeply savory. It's the secret to incredible Thanksgiving gravy, soups, and sauces, with a depth of flavor no store-bought version can touch.

      Finished golden brown turkey broth.

      Is turkey stock the same as turkey broth? Basically, yes. Technically, broth is made with meaty turkey pieces, while stock is made mostly from bones. You'll also hear it called turkey bone broth or turkey stock-the terms are often used interchangeably. This recipe is a foundational flavor engine for your Thanksgiving gravy and for soups, stews, and risotto after.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love this Turkey Broth Recipe

      • Rich flavor, simple process - Roasting the turkey pieces and vegetables first creates a deeply flavored broth with almost no extra effort.
      • Two options - Stovetop or Instant Pot/pressure cooker, both mostly hands off.
      • Better than store-bought - The depth, aroma, and clean ingredients make this homemade broth unbeatable.
      • Make ahead and freeze - Break the process into two easy days, freeze portions for soups, sauces, and gravies later.

      To make a terrific turkey soup, use this recipe for chicken vegetable soup and swap leftover turkey and turkey broth.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Turkey broth ingredients.

      Instead of using a roasted turkey carcass, this recipe starts with fresh turkey parts-just like making chicken stock, but richer from roasting.

      • Turkey - Use a mix of legs, thighs, backs, or whatever your butcher has. Starting with meaty pieces gives the broth a richer body and golden color.
      • Onions - Brown, yellow, or sweet onions add savory depth. Avoid red onions, which can tint the broth. Onions form part of the classic flavor base for stocks and broths.
      • Carrots - Add natural sweetness and balance. Together with onion and celery, they form the classic French mirepoix base that builds flavor.
      • Celery ribs - Essential for aromatic, earthy flavor and balance in the broth.
      • Garlic (optional)- I add a whole head of garlic, sliced in half crosswise. It gently perfumes the broth with savory depth without making it taste "garlicky." You can skip it if you prefer a more neutral broth.
      • White wine or dry vermouth (optional) - Adds depth and subtle acidity to round out the flavors. Small airline size bottles are perfect to keep on hand for cooking.
      • Bay leaves - Leaves add a faint herbal note that brings everything together.
      • Parsley - Fresh flat-leaf (Italian) parsley adds brightness. Skip the dried.
      • Thyme - Fresh sprigs are best. Toss them in whole. A must-have herb for turkey broth.
      • Black peppercorns - Use whole peppercorns for gentle spice and rounded flavor.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements.

      Chef's Tip: Why I Add Garlic - I tuck a whole head of garlic, sliced in half crosswise right through the papery skin, into the pan with the turkey parts and vegetables because it contributes roasted depth, sweetness, and "umami". Roasting the garlic mellows the sharp, raw garlic flavor and caramelizes its natural sugars, so it doesn't make the broth taste garlicky. Instead, it adds gentle sweetness, savory depth, and a rich, golden flavor-especially wonderful for turkey gravy and soups. If you prefer a very neutral broth, you can leave it out.

      Use turkey broth in this French Onion Soup, it's a great alternative to beef broth.

      Chef's Tip - Remove the Skin Before Roasting. Removing the skin before roasting gives you a cleaner, more refined turkey broth. It reduces grease from the start and leaves more room in the pot for meaty, collagen-rich pieces that build body and depth of flavor. You'll spend less time skimming, get a broth that freezes and reheats beautifully, and still achieve a rich golden color from the roasted meat and vegetables.

      How to Make Turkey Broth

      Start in the oven: Roasting is the secret step to a rich, deeply flavorful turkey broth. Roasting the turkey pieces, bones, and vegetables intensifies their natural flavor and gives the broth that beautiful golden-brown color. It's the difference between a good turkey broth and a truly great one.

      Because this recipe makes a large batch (perfect for freezing), the stovetop stockpot method is ideal. You'll get the best flavor and high yield by simmering slowly for several hours, rather than using a smaller pressure cooker or slow cooker.

      If you prefer to use an Instant Pot, it works great (I do it), see notes below for my turkey broth Instant Pot method.

      Raw turkey pieces and vegetables in pan.

      Step 1: Roast the turkey and vegetables

      Remove as much skin as possible from the turkey pieces. Distribute the turkey parts in a large roasting pan, then top with roughly chopped carrots, celery, onion, and a split head of garlic (unpeeled).

      Roast the turkey and vegetables for 1 hour at 375°F, then add 1 cup of dry white wine or dry white vermouth and roast for another 30 minutes. This is what you use to make the broth. Allow the roasted turkey and vegetables to cool, refrigerate until the next day to make the broth. Breaking up the process make it more manageable.

      Note - When I use my pressure cooker, I do it all in one day as it is faster (about 4 ½ hours total).

      Chef's tip: How much salt? None. Never add salt to your broth. Any broth. Add salt to the dish you're cooking with the broth. This gives you more control over the salt levels in a dish.

      Turkey and veggies after roasting.

      Step 2: Start the broth

      Early the next morning, place everything in a large 10-12 quart stock pot and cover with 5 quarts of cold water to start. Add bay leaves, fresh thyme, parsley, and black peppercorns to the pot. 

      Turn up the heat to get the pot to a simmer, then turn down to low for a low gentle bubble for 10-12 hours. As the broth cooks down and the water level drops, add boiling water from a tea kettle. Over a 12 hour period I add from 1-3 quarts to keep the water level up.

      Simmering broth on the stovetop.

      Cooking long and slow ensures extracting the most flavor and nutrition for fantastic turkey broth. The house will smell like roasting turkey and you will have a rich, golden brown broth, full of flavor.

      Chef's Tip: Simmer Don't Boil. Keep the broth at a gentle simmer, not a rolling boil. Boiling breaks up the proteins and vegetables, turning the broth cloudy and muddy in flavor. Slow simmering draws out flavor and keeps the clarity of the broth.

      Step 3: Strain and chill

      Strain the broth through a fine sieve into a large clean pot. Don't use plastic as it will slow cooling. Discard the spent bones, meat and vegetables.

      A pot of chilling broth in an ice bath.

      Quickly chill the strained broth by placing the pot in an ice water bath. Fill a sink half full with with cold water and ice. To speed cooling, place something under the pot like a trivet so cold water circulates underneath (the photo is chicken broth).

      Stir broth occasionally for faster cooling. You want the broth cooling as quickly as possible for food safety. Cool to 70°F before refrigerating. 

      Chef's tip: If you want to skip the roasting process you can still make great turkey broth. The flavors will not be as rich but it's still delicious.

      Step 4: Refrigerate and degrease

      Transfer the cold broth to large storage containers and cover to refrigerate overnight. I use these commercial kitchen style Cambro containers.

      In the morning, remove any fat that has solidified on top. Divide broth into containers, label and freeze for Thanksgiving and after. Homemade turkey broth will add big flavors to your Thanksgiving recipes.

      Chef's Tip: Make the broth Monday of Thanksgiving week and it will be good until Thursday. For longer use, freeze it. You can also make it a week or more ahead and freeze.

      Instant Pot Turkey Broth Method (Pressure Cooker)

      These days, I make turkey broth in the Instant Pot more often than I do on the stove. You won't get the bigger volume you can achieve with a large stockpot, but the pressure cooking environment extracts flavor exceptionally well. You get a deep, rich broth in a fraction of the time. It's faster, it's reliable, with great results.

      Roast the turkey parts and veggies as the directions outline. Use 5 pounds of turkey thighs (stripped of skin) plus a few less vegetables, and you'll get about 2 ½ quarts of rich, roasted turkey broth. Fill with water to the max line, lock on the lid, press the broth setting and set for 2 hours.

      After two hours, allow natural pressure release then strain and chill. It follows my Instant Pot chicken broth recipe but with turkey.

      How to Use Turkey Broth

      Roasted turkey broth is what i use to make my turkey gravy on Thanksgiving. It's also terrific in soups, such as this turkey and wild rice soup recipe, and this pumpkin risotto, just about anywhere you would use a good broth. For good sipping on a chilly day, remember to add a little salt for flavor.

      A white bowl of rich French onion soup with a cheesy crouton on top and sprinkle of fresh herbs.

      I use it to make my easy French onion soup. Look at the photo above and see how dark and rich the soup looks. That's not beef broth but homemade turkey broth! Another soup it's terrific in is my creamy black bean and pumpkin soup, plus it's a really simple soup to make.

      Black bean pumpkin soup with a sauce spider web on top.

      How to Freeze Turkey Broth

      If you don't plan to use your turkey broth within 4 days, portion and freeze it for later. Turkey broth freezes beautifully and keeps for up to 3 months.

      Best containers for freezing:
      I freeze all of my broths in Souper Cubes®. The ½-cup, 1-cup, and 2-cup Souper Cubes are ideal for portioning, thawing, and cooking. Glass Mason jars, or square glass containers with tight-fitting lids also work.

      To thaw frozen broth:

      1. Refrigerator method (best): Transfer containers to the refrigerator for 24 hours to thaw slowly.
      2. Cold-water method: Submerge sealed containers in a bowl of cold water until partially thawed, then heat gently on the stovetop over low heat.
      3. Microwave method: Defrost at 40% power or on the "manual defrost" setting until slushy, then transfer to a pot and finish thawing on low.

      ⚠️ Food Safety Tip: Never thaw broth on the counter at room temperature. It puts the broth in the temperature danger zone (41°F-135°F) where bacteria can grow rapidly.

      Recipe FAQs

      How can I use turkey broth?

      Use turkey broth in place of chicken broth for soups, stews, risotto and just about any where you need broth, being sure the flavor is complimentary.

      Should I add salt when making turkey broth?

      No. Keeping your broth unsalted makes it more versatile, so you can season precisely when using it in soups, sauces, or gravy later.

      Can I make turkey broth in the Instant Pot?

      Yes. Roast the turkey pieces and vegetables first for rich flavor, then transfer to your Instant Pot. Do this is two batches for a 6-quart Instant Pot. Add cold water to the max fill line and cook on High Pressure for 2 hours, followed by a natural release. Strain and cool before using or freezing. The longer cook time extracts deeper flavor and gelatin from the bones for a richer broth.

      Do I need to roast the turkey and vegetables first?

      Technically no, but roasting creates deeper flavor and color. The caramelization adds that rich golden brown hue and roasted aroma that separates homemade from store-bought broth.

      Why is my turkey broth cloudy?

      Cloudy broth usually means it boiled too hard. Always keep it at a gentle simmer and avoid stirring. Boiling emulsifies fat and proteins into the liquid, making it look cloudy. It's still delicious, just not clear.

      More Broth and Soups Recipes

      For more broth recipes, try my long-simmered chicken bone broth, Instant Pot chicken broth, or vegetable broth. And here's my terrific Thanksgiving stuffing recipe where you can use this turkey broth.

      • Instant pot chicken broth
        Easy Instant Pot Chicken Broth
      • Golden homemade broth on a counter with onions, carrots, celery, and parsley.
        Low Sodium Vegetable Broth
      • Golden chicken bone broth in glass jars with carrots, celery, and parsley, cooling on the counter.
        Chicken Bone Broth (Homemade)
      • Gray bowl with bean and kale soup topped with parmesan and basil.
        Hearty Tuscan White Bean Soup

      ⭐️Did You Make This?

      If you make this turkey broth recipe, please comment and let me know. I appreciate hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers. And if you have any questions, comment or email me.

      📖 Recipe

      Rich brown roasted turkey broth in glass jars on a kitchen counter.

      Turkey Broth Recipe

      Sally Cameron
      There is no comparison to the flavor of homemade broth. Roast the turkey parts and vegetables, then make the broth. Make ahead and freeze for using Thanksgiving Day for gravy and afterwards for soup.
      5 from 3 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Simmering Time 10 hours hrs
      Total Time 12 hours hrs
      Course Broth, Soup, stock
      Cuisine American
      Servings 16 Yield 3-4 quarts
      Calories 45 kcal

      Equipment

      • Large stainless steel roasting pan 14"x16"
      • OR a large heavy duty disposable aluminum pan works You may need to double them up for strength or place the pan on a rimmed baking sheet pan for support. Dispose of after use.
      • large stock pot (10-12 quart)

      Ingredients
        

      For the oven

      • 7 pounds turkey pieces thighs, necks, legs
      • 1 large onion brown, yellow, sweet, white
      • 3-4 large carrots
      • 3-4 celery ribs
      • 1 whole head garlic
      • 1 cup white wine or dry white vermouth or water

      For the stockpot

      • 3 bay leaves fresh or dry
      • ½ bunch Italian parsley
      • ½ bunch fresh thyme
      • 2 teaspoons whole black peppercorns
      • 5 quarts cold water
      • Boiling hot water to fill pot as needed

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Heat oven, prep turkey

      • Pre-heat oven to 375° (190 c) and get out a large roasting pan. Remove as much skin and any extra fat that you can from turkey pieces. Place pieces into the roasting pan in a single layer.

      Prep veggies and roast

      • Roughly chop onions, carrots and celery. Split garlic head horizontally through the center (no need to peel). Add vegetables and garlic to the roasting pan with the turkey. Place pan in the oven and roast for 1 hour. At the end of the hour, add the wine and roast another 30 minutes.

      Make the broth

      • Place roasted turkey and vegetables into a large stock pot (10-12 quarts). Add bay leaves, parsley, thyme, peppercorns and cold water. Bring the pot to just under a boil, turn down to low and barely simmer for 10-12 hours. You want the pot to be at a slow, gentle bubble to extract as much flavor as possible. When the water level drops about 2", add a little boiling water from a tea kettle, keeping the ingredients just under water.
      • At the end of 10-12 hours, remove all meat, vegetables, herbs and discard, as they will be spent. Drain broth through a fine sieve into a clean large pot or bowl. Place in a sink filled with ice and cold water to cool quickly. Place pot on a trivet or small rack to help water circulation under the pot for faster cooling. Stir occasionally. You want the broth to cool as quickly as possible for food safety.
      • When stock is cool, below 70°, cover and place in the refrigerator. The next morning, remove any fat solidified on top, place into containers, label and freeze.

      Notes

      To thaw broth, place containers from the freezer into the refrigerator for 24 hours and thaw slowly. Alternatively, place frozen containers in a sink with cool water to start the thaw, then place semi-frozen broth into a pot and heat over low until liquid, or use the microwave at low power.
      Do not leave broth out on the counter to thaw at room temperature as this is not food safe.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1cupCalories: 45kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 9gFat: 1.5gCholesterol: 9.6mgSodium: 84mgPotassium: 211mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gCalcium: 29mgIron: 0.5mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Caesar Pasta Salad with Chicken

      08/23/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A Caesar pasta salad ready to serve with salad servers and dressing in a marble counter.

      Combine two beloved classics-Chicken Caesar Salad and Pasta Salad-into one irresistible dish: Caesar Pasta Salad! Crisp romaine lettuce, tender chicken, and perfectly cooked pasta all tossed in a creamy Caesar dressing. Add crunchy croutons, and a generous sprinkle of salty Parmesan cheese, and you've got a salad that's sure to become a new favorite. Make it gluten-free or not, even vegetarian if desired. Plus, there are three ways to make this salad!

      A large shallow bowl of caesar pasta salad with romaine, curly pasta, croutons, chicken and dressing in a small pitcher.

      This caesar pasta salad is perfect for gatherings, meal prep, or any time you crave a fresh, satisfying meal. It's especially nice in hot weather when cool foods are not just welcome but needed. Use grilled chicken or rotisserie chicken, homemade caesar dressing or bottled, and store or homemade croutons.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Three ways: Make all of the parts homemade, some homemade, or buy them all.
      • Make ahead of time and combine to serve.
      • Use leftover grilled chicken or rotisserie chicken
      • Make it with gluten-free pasta or use regular pasta.
      • Make homemade croutons or use store-bought.
      • It's a great main dish as it's got everything.

      For another terrific pasta salad, try this lemony Mediterranean pasta salad.

      Recipe Ingredients

      I've listed just the Caesar pasta salad and dressing ingredients, but have recipe links to the homemade gluten-free croutons and grilled chicken if you want to make it all as I do.

      For the Caesar Pasta Salad

      • Chicken: Use either grilled chicken breast or rotisserie chicken, whatever cooked chicken is easiest.
      • Lettuce: Crisp romaine leaves are the best for a Caesar salad. Get whole heads and tear or chop yourself.
      • Caesar dressing: You can buy bottled but homemade take just a minute in a blender with only healthy ingredients (and it's gluten-free).
      • Pasta: Choose a short pasta shape such as rotini pasta, bow-tie pasta, penne pasta or elbow pasta. Use either gluten-free pasta or regular wheat pasta.
      • Croutons: Once again, either store bought for speed and ease or use my homemade croutons recipe. They are sooo good.
      • Parmesan cheese: For Caesar dressing if you are making homemade, plus more for over the top as a garnish.

      For Homemade Caesar Dressing

      What make a good Caesar salad? The dressing. This creamy homemade Caesar dressing is restaurant quality, made in a minute in the blender.

      Caesar salad dressing ingredients in small bowls.
      • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is best but avocado oil will work.
      • Lemon: The acidity in fresh lemon juice lifts the flavor.
      • Egg: You only need the yolk, emulsifies the dressing.
      • Mustard: Go with Dijon mustard for flavor plus it's a natural emulsifier in dressings.
      • Anchovy: Anchovy paste in the tube adds a subtle depth of flavor without being fishy, but it is optional. Trust me, I can't stand anchovy but it's good in this dressing.
      • Garlic: Fresh is best, finely zest.
      • Vinegar: Balsamic vinegar adds richness and depth.
      • Worcestershire sauce: A must! Adds a savory, umami boost to Caesar dressing.
      • Parmesan cheese: Adds a salty, savory flavor, or tryn Mexican Cotija.

      Please see the recipe card for all measurements, plus salt and pepper.

      If you love creamy dressings, try this creamy ginger vinaigrette.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For a vegetarian Caesar pasta salad, swap the chicken with hard boiled eggs (1-2 per person), halved and served on top of the salad. Another good add is chickpeas (garbanzo beans).
      • Toasted pepitas make a fantastic extra garnish and take minutes to make.
      • Add cooked or grilled corn kernels for more texture and flavor.
      • For more color, add a chopped red onion, halved grape tomatoes, fresh cherry tomatoes, or slivers of colorful bell peppers.

      How to Make Caesar Pasta Salad

      This is a salad of components: Romaine lettuce, leftover cooked chicken, Caesar dressing, pasta, and croutons. You can make Caesar pasta salad 3 ways:

      • All homemade, and can be done ahead.
      • Partially homemade.
      • All store purchased, just assembly.

      My photos are for if you are making Caesar pasta salad with all homemade components. Make the Caesar dressing the day of serving as it has a raw egg yolk. It takes a minute in the blender.

      Homemade components: gluten-free croutons recipe, Caesar dressing recipe. For chicken, I used leftover boneless skinless grilled chicken. Make the marinade in the blender, add the chicken, and grill the next day, then chill and chop.

      Bread cubes tossed with butter and olive oil in a glass bowl.
      Step 1: Start the croutons or make them ahead of time, if making homemade.
      Pouring dry pasta into a large pot of boiling water to cook.
      Step 2: Boil pasta in a large pot of salted water, then drain, rinse with cold water, dry and chill.
      Chopping romaine leaves for a salad on a white cutting board.
      Step 3: Chop the romaine leaves and wash, then dry well.
      A bowl of homemade caesar dressing with spoon.
      Step 4: Make the Caesar dressing in the blender.
      Grilled chicken breasts on the grill, with nice grill marks.
      Step 5: Grill chicken a day or two ahead, or use leftover or rotisserie chicken. Cool and chop.
      A Caesar pasta salad ready to serve with salad servers and dressing in a marble counter.
      Step 6: Once all of the components are ready, toss to serve in a large mixing bowl with extra dressing on the side.

      Serving Suggestions

      When you add the chicken to this Caesar pasta salad it's truly a complete meal. Serve it with extra dressing, extra Parmesan, and extra croutons (because they are fantastic), so everyone can customize if desired. For more of a side salad, skip the chicken.

      You can also skip the croutons and serve with crusty garlic bread.

      Recipe FAQs

      What type of pasta works best for Caesar pasta salad?

      Short shaped pastas work the best for a Caesar pasta salad. Look for rotini, corkscrew pasta (cavatappi), elbow macaroni, fusilli, and farfalle (bowtie pasta). Penne or mini penne may also work.

      How do I keep the pasta from getting mushy?

      Cook the pasta until just done, called al dente. Taste a piece to test. Don't overcook it. Then drain and rinse the pasta under cold running water to stop the cooking process. Drain well and lay the past out on a clean kitchen towel to dry before chilling in the refrigerating (if making ahead) or using in the salad.

      Can I make Caesar pasta salad ahead of time?

      Yes, this is a great make ahead salad. Ready each component ahead of time and refrigerate, then toss together and dress at serving time for the best texture.

      More Great Salads and Pasta Recipes

      • chinese chicken salad
        Healthy Chicken Salad Recipe with Ginger Salad Dressing
      • Chicken blueberry salad
        Blueberry Vinaigrette
      • A white bowl of sun-dried tomato pesto pasta with basil and parmesan garnish.
        Creamy Sun-Dried Tomato Pesto Pasta
      • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
        Lemony Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this Caesar salad dressing, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A Caesar pasta salad ready to serve with salad servers and dressing in a marble counter.

      Caesar Pasta Salad

      Sally Cameron
      This Caesar pasta salad is a terrific main course salad. Make it gluten-free if desired, and notes for vegetarian diners. Make your own homemade caesar dressing or use bottled. Serve extra croutons, Parmesan, and dressing on the side. See links at the end for homemade chicken and croutons.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 30 minutes mins
      Assemble time 10 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr
      Course Entree, Main Course, Salad
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4
      Calories 628 kcal

      Equipment

      • Large pot to cook pasta
      • blender if making homemade caesar dressing
      • Baking sheet for croutons
      • Parchment paper

      Ingredients
        

      Caesar Salad

      • 12 ounces hearts of romaine 3 large heads in a package
      • 4-6 ounces pasta gluten-free or regular, cooked
      • 1 pound chopped cooked chicken grilled or rotisserie
      • 1 cup croutons gluten-free or regular
      • 4 tablespoons grated parmesan cheese

      Caesar Dressing (yield ¾ cup)

      • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or more to taste
      • 1 large egg yolk
      • 1 teaspoon dijon mustard
      • 1 teaspoon worcestershire sauce
      • ½ teaspoon anchovy paste in a tube optional
      • 1 large garlic clove finely chopped or zested
      • ½ teaspoon balsamic vinegar
      • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
      • 2 tablespoons finely grated Parmesan cheese or Mexican Cotija cheese
      • 2 pinches sea salt
      • 2 pinches white pepper or black pepper

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Homemade Caesar dressing

      • Place the lemon juice egg yolk, mustard, anchovy paste, garlic, vinegar, and Worcestershire sauce in a blender and puree on lowest speed for a few seconds to blend.
      • With the blender top on and the center top removed, slowly stream the oil into the blender until dressing is creamy and emulsified. Increase the speed as you go. Add the Parmesan and puree until creamy. If the dressing gets too thick, add either a little more lemon juice or warm water to make it the consistency you prefer.
        Refrigerate the dressing until serving time in an airtight container. Due to the egg yolk, the dressing lasts 2-3 days max in the refrigerator. Be sure to label and date.

      Make the salad

      • Pasta: Cook the pasta in a large pot of boiling sated water, then drain and rinse with cold water to stop the cooking process. Drain again and allow pasta to dry on a clean kitchen towel or baking sheet. Refrigerate until serving time so it's cold.
        In the mean time work on the other parts of the salad.
      • Lettuce: Slice the hearts of romaine crosswise into 1-inch strips. Separate the leaves and wash (if not pre-washed), then dry well and chill. Using a salad spinner makes it easy.
      • Chicken: Cube or shred the cooked chicken.

      Serving the salad

      • Add the romaine, chicken, and pasta to a large salad bowl and toss with a few tablespoons of Caesar dressing. Top with the croutons and Parmesan cheese. Serve extra dressing on the side along with more cheese and croutons.

      Notes

      For the chicken:
      For the grilled chicken that I use, make this super easy blender lemon chicken marinade, marinate boneless, skinless breasts for an hour or overnight, then grill for 12 minutes. 
      For the croutons:
      Here's my recipe for gluten-free croutons.
      To make this vegetarian:
      Swap the chicken for hard boiled eggs and/or chickpeas (garbanzo beans. Use canned beans, rinsed and drained well. 
      Nutrition calculation just for the dressing:
      Serving is 2 tablespoons. 
      calories: 179kcal, carbs 1 g, protein 1 g, fat 19g, cholesterol 32mg, sodium 54mg, potassium 22mg, fiber 0, sugar 0. For all numbers please see the dressing recipe card. 
       
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 628kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 44gFat: 35gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 22gCholesterol: 148mgSodium: 502mgPotassium: 619mgFiber: 3gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 7558IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 142mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Best Deviled Eggs Recipe (Step by Step)

      04/18/2011 by Sally Cameron 10 Comments

      deviled eggs 2022

      I've been told many times I make the best deviled eggs. Deviled eggs are a classic crowd pleaser any time of year, from Easter to Thanksgiving and potlucks to parties. Just about everyone loves them, so here's my tips and tricks for the best deviled eggs recipe including how to make easy peel hard boiled eggs. It's tried and true with a creamy tangy filling. Recently, I took 4 dozen to a party and a few leftovers went home with neighbors. They texted in the morning and said they were even great for breakfast!

      Close up of deviled eggs with creamy golden filling sprinkled with rusty red paprika.

      The best deviled eggs start with properly cooked hard boiled eggs with no green rings around the yolks. Green rings signify over-cooking. Some recipes swear by using week-old eggs, but I don't think it matters (and I hard boil eggs every week). Make sure your eggs are clean and not cracked. Fifteen minutes of cooking is just right, then immediately into an ice bath.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love THese Deviled Eggs

      • Classic recipe - Deviled eggs are a classic recipe that just about everyone enjoys.
      • Prep ahead - Make them ahead of time, fill before serving.
      • Great garnishes - Fun and flavorful ways to garnish and add your own touch.

      For another appetizer that's bite-sized and easy to make ahead, make these easy caprese skewers with cherry tomatoes and mini mozzarella balls.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      • Eggs: Clean, fresh, un-cracked eggs. They do not have to be a week old if you follow my method.
      • Mayonnaise: Use your favorite mayonnaise.
      • Mustard: I prefer the bite of a good, creamy Dijon mustard but you can use yellow mustard.
      • Vinegar: For the water to boil the eggs, white or apple cider vinegar, and for the filling, apple cider vinegar (or lemon juice).
      • Horseradish: For a little extra flavor punch. (optional)
      • Garnishes: There are so many options! See the list below. A simple sprinkle of paprika is classic.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper. Note - I use white pepper for deviled eggs so the black specks don't show.

      Chef's tip: Piping bags are for more than filling deviled eggs. Use them to pipe creamy pumpkin mousse into glasses for a nice fall dessert, and for wipped cream dispensing.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For avocado deviled eggs, either puree half an avocado with the filling or replace it entirely with guacamole.
      • For a sun-dried tomato filling, blend enough sun-dried tomato pesto with the mayonnaise until creamy and use as filling.

      For another crowd-pleasing, make ahead appetizer, make these spinach stuff mushrooms.

      How to Make Deviled Eggs

      Hard Boil Eggs

      To make perfect hard boiled eggs, bring a large pot about half full of water to a boil. You want the eggs to be covered by about 2" while cooking. Use a pan large enough to hold the eggs in a single layer. Add white vinegar and salt.

      A glass bowl with ice cubes and water chilling down hard boiled eggs in an ice bath after boiling.

      Why the vinegar and salt? it creates a chemical reaction with the shell making them easier to peel after cooking and chilling. Believe me, it works.

      When the water boils, turn the heat down and gently lower in the eggs with a spider strainer or large spoon. Cook eggs at a strong simmer (small bubbles) for 15 minutes. While the eggs are cooking, set up an ice bath by filling a large bowl half full of ice then add cold water. When eggs are done, place then in the ice bath immediately and chill until very cold. The colder, the easier they peel.

      Peeling Hard Boiled Eggs

      A small white bowl of peeled hard boiled eggs with egg shells in the back.

      Place a folded kitchen towel on the counter, then tap the egg all around to crack the shell, then roll the egg gently with the palm of your hand, pushing away from you on the towel. The shells will peel right off most of the time, but there is always a stubborn one.

      A baking sheet with hard boiled egg halves for making deviled eggs, with yolks, vinegar, mustard.

      How to Make Deviled Eggs Filling

      Here are directions for with or without a food processor.

      Golden egg yolks, mustard, mayonnaise, and horseradish in a food processor work bowl.

      Making Filling With a Food Processor

      Place the yolks and all ingredients in a food processor and pulse until creamy. Pipe or spoon the filling into the egg whites and add your garnishes. If piping you'll want the filling a little stiff, so don't add too much liquid. No food processor? No problem. Make the filling by hand.

      Making Filling Without a Food Processor

      To make the filling without a food processor, place the yolks in a bowl and mash them with a fork until they are fine and crumbly. Add the other ingredients and stir (or whisk) until creamy and smooth as possible. Refrigerate the filling until needed.

      One more way without a food processor is to use a sieve and push the yolks through with the back of a spoon or flexible spatula. This method insures a smoother filling and less lumps.

      What is the Best Way to FiIl Deviled Eggs?

      Deviled egg filling in a clear piping bag with a star tip for piping.

      The quick answer is with a piping bag, zip top bag or a spoon. I keep a box of piping bags on hand and after learning this trick you might too! They keep the filling safe in the fridge, they are fun to use, and your deviled eggs will look beautiful.

      Scrape the filling into a piping bag set up with a large star or plain tip. To make it easy, place the piping bag in something tall like a blender container for stability When ¾ filled, twist and secure top with a rubber band. To fill eggs, snip the tip off the tip end and gently squeeze.

      Piping yellow egg filling into hard boiled egg halves for deviled eggs.

      Another option is piping using a zip top plastic bag. Use a star tip in the corner or skip it and just snip off a small corner of the bag for piping. If you don't want to pipe, use a teaspoon to your fill deviled eggs.

      To transport, pack egg halves in a sturdy container. When you arrive at your location, snip the tip off your piping bag and fill the eggs. Garnish and enjoy.

      A plate of deviled egg halves after piping yellow filling in a decorative pattern.

      The Best Garnishes for Deviled Eggs

      Here are 14 variations for deviled eggs, and try my recipe for smoked salmon on a pellet grill for another nice topping.

      Paprika, regular or smokedBay shrimp or crab
      Chopped fresh dill or parsleyChopped green onion
      Sliced jalapeno peppersCooked bay shrimp
      AvocadoSun-dried tomatoes
      Crisp crumbled baconBlack or green olives
      Radish slicesPickle relish
      CapersCherry tomato halves
      A chart of garnishing ideas for deviled eggs.

      Making Deviled Eggs Ahead of Time

      To make deviled eggs ahead of time, hard boil the eggs and make the filling a day or two ahead. Keep them refrigerated and separated. Fill when ready to serve. The fastest way is using the piping bag method and having your garnishes ready to go.

      A platter of finished deviled eggs topped with red paprika as garnish.

      For another classic appetizer, make shrimp cocktails with homemade cocktail sauce that beats anything out of a jar. It's easy with purchased shrimp or make your own in minutes (directions included).

      Recipe FAQs

      How do I keep deviled eggs from sliding around on the serving platter?

      Here are a few things to try to keep your deviled eggs in place. Use a deviled egg plate that has hollows to place the egg halves in. Try placing soft flat lettuce leaves on the bottom of the plate. Trim a flat spot on the bottom of each egg helps. If you have enough filling, put a dab under each egg half to anchor it to the plate. Eggs plate are the best!

      How long can deviled eggs sit out at room temperature?

      Deviled eggs can sit out at room temperature safely for up to two hours, or if 90°F or higher, only one hour. One trick is to place them on a bed of crushed ice to keep them cold.

      How do I prevent lumpy deviled egg filling?

      If you don't have a food processor, push the cooked yolks through a fine sieve with a flexible spatula into a medium bowl. It's a little work but worth it. Then add your mayonnaise, mustard, vinegar, and seasonings and whisk or stir until smooth.

      More Appetizer Recipes

      There are so many marvelous ways to create delicious appetizers, whether for a get-together, a holiday celebration, or watching your favorites games with the gang. Check out some of these recipes and more on the appetizer index page.

      • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
        Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe
      • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
        Classic French Mushroom Duxelle
      • Creamy salmon dip on an appetizer tray with crackers and cucumber chips.
        The Best Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe
      • Nectarine and goat cheese crostini.
        Goat Cheese Crostini With Baked Nectarines

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      Let me know if you made these deviled eggs by adding a comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      Deviled eggs with paprika | afoodcentriclife.com

      Best Deviled Eggs Recipe

      Sally Cameron
      Buy eggs that are free of cracks. Eggs can be hardboiled and peeled and the filling made a day or two ahead. This recipe halves easily. See notes for using a piping bag and garnishes at the end.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 15 minutes mins
      Chilling Time 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 50 minutes mins
      Course Appetizer
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12
      Calories 154 kcal

      Equipment

      • Food Processor optional
      • Disposable piping bag with large tip optional

      Ingredients
        

      Deviled Eggs

      • 2 tablespoons white vinegar for the water
      • ½ teaspoon salt for the water
      • 12 large eggs
      • ⅔ cup mayonnaise or Vegenaise
      • 1-2 tablespoons creamy Dijon mustard
      • 1 tablespoon prepared horseradish
      • 1-2 teaspoons apple cider vinegar
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
      • ⅛ teaspoon white pepper

      Optional Garnishes

      • See list in notes below

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      How to Hard Boil Eggs

      • Choose a pot large enough to hold eggs a single layer. Fill the pot about half full with cold water to cover eggs by 2". Add salt and vinegar. Bring the pot to a boil. Turn the heat down to a simmer (small bubbles) and carefully lower eggs into the water. Using a mesh skimmer or a slotted spoon makes it easy. Set timer for 15 minutes.
      • Prepare an ice bath to chill the eggs immediately after cooking by filling a large bowl with ice and cold water. When eggs are done cooking, plunge cooked eggs into the ice bath. Chill until very cold, about 15 minutes. Peel right away or refrigerate them for a day or two until ready to use.

      Make the Filling: Food Processor or Not

      • With a sharp knife, cut eggs in half lengthwise. Pop yolks out and place in the bowl of a food processor or a large bowl. Add the mayo, Dijon, horseradish, vinegar, salt and pepper and pulse until smooth and creamy.
        If you don't have a food processor, place the yolks in a large bowl and mash them into a fine crumble with a fork, then add the mayo, Dijon, horseradish, vinegar, salt and pepper. Stir until creamy.

      Filling Deviled Eggs: Two Ways

      • Two ways to fill: spoon or piping bag. Fill the deviled eggs with a spoonful of the filling or use a disposable piping bag for a nice presentation. Piping bag and garnish notes are below.

      Notes

      Piping Bag Notes

      Place filling into a disposable piping bag fitted with a large star or plain tip and pipe into egg halves. If this sounds fussy it's not! It is actually fun and your deviled eggs look so professional. Once you try it you'll be hooked. 

      Ways to Garnish Deviled Eggs

      Use chopped fresh dill, cilantro, or parsley, chopped green onion, regular or smoked paprika, tiny cooked bay shrimp, avocado, sun-dried tomatoes, crisp chopped bacon, sliced jalapeños, black or green olives, capers, radish slices, pickle relish, or half of a small cherry tomato. You choose!

      Nutrition

      Calories: 154kcalCarbohydrates: 2gProtein: 6gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 186mgSodium: 306mgPotassium: 76mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 271IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 30mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Easy Gluten-Free Crepes (Sweet or Savory)

      08/14/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      Two golden folded crepes on a white plate with blueberry jam and whipped cream.

      Easy gluten-free crepes bring all the magic of classic French crepes to your kitchen. These thin, delicate pancakes are simple to make and work with both sweet and savory fillings or no filling at all. They taste every bit as delicious as traditional crepes and freeze beautifully, so they're perfect for special breakfasts, quick desserts, or light lunches. A dairy-free option is included too.

      Plates of golden crepes topped with blueberries, powdered sugar, and whipped cream.

      While I fell in love with crepes at the street stands of Paris, I still remember my first Crepe Suzette at a tiny French restaurant in San Diego. I was instantly hooked. After going gluten-free, I updated my recipe so we could still enjoy them. These gluten-free crepes are easy, flexible, and made with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Gluten-Free Crepes Recipe Highlights

      • Sweet or savory - Serve gluten-free crepes for breakfast, lunch, dinner, or dessert.
      • Make ahead friendly - Refrigerate or freeze the crepes for later.
      • Flexible for everyone - Not gluten-free? Use all-purpose flour or white whole wheat flour.
      • Dairy-free option - Use unsweetened oat milk and dairy-free butter to grease the pan while cooking.
      • Easy to serve - Fill and roll, or simply fold and stack crepes with your favorite fillings.

      For another gluten-free breakfast recipe try these golden crisp waffles.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Flour, eggs, milk and ingredients to make crepes on a counter.
      • Flour - Use a gluten-free flour blend but you can make them with all purpose flour (wheat flour) as well. The gluten-free ones are so good no one would know they are gluten-free crepes. Seriously.
      • Milk - I use what I have in the fridge, usually low fat but whole milk is good too.
      • Eggs - Large eggs, clean, un-cracked.
      • Butter - I use unsalted butter for gluten-free crepes, especially sweet crepes.
      • Sugar - To reduce sugar, I usually use monk fruit, but you can use regular or superfine sugar. Use sweetener only for sweet, dessert crepes. Omit for savory crepes.
      • Flavorings - For dessert crepes, a little vanilla extract is nice. For savory crepes, omit.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt.

      For another style of pancake, try these hearty buckwheat pancakes, entirely gluten-free.

      Chef's notes on flours: I've made gluten-free crepes with both King Arthur Gluten-Free Measure for Measure flour (with xanthan gum) and King Arthur Gluten-Free All-Purpose flour (without). Both work well. The all-purpose flour without xanthan gum may make a slightly more tender crepe. Similar gluten-free flour blends should work too. I have not tested this recipe with cornstarch-heavy blends such as Cup4Cup.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Almond flavor - For dessert crepes, try almond extract instead of vanilla extract.
      • Citrus twist - Make lemon crepes with fresh lemon zest and a little lemon juice, or add a touch of orange flower water.
      • Dairy-free option - For dairy-free crepes, use plant-based butter and dairy-free milk. Unsweetened oat milk is my recommendation, though almond milk should work too.
      • Savory crepes - Omit the vanilla and sugar for savory fillings.

      Tools for Making Crepes

      None of these tools for making crepes are expensive, plus they are versatile and good for many uses beyond crepes. This is what I use for making crepes, but I've listed alternatives.

      • A crepe pan: The best pan is a 10" non-stick crepe pan. The good news is they are inexpensive, and not only usable for crepes but for eggs and other foods. The crêpe pan I use is light weight and allows you to handle and swirl the batter to cover the pan bottom to make a crepe. You can also use a 10" nonstick skillet instead of a special crepe pan. The benefit of a real crepe pan is the sides are low, so it's easier to turn the crepes.
      • A mini off-set spatula: This cheap little tool is something I reach for often, not just for crepes. If you don't want to bother, use a fork. You need something to gently life the edges of the crepe while it cooks to peak underneath, then grab the edges to flip it.
      • Blender: While you can make gluten-free crepe batter by hand in a medium bowl with a whisk, a good blender does a better job. If making crepe batter by hand, whisk it very well until smooth and if needed, strain out any lumps. 
      • Fine sieve: A fine sieve is a basic tool everyone should have in the kitchen. Flour for crepes must be sifted to lighten and aerate the batter and remove any lumps. You can also use an old fashioned sifter. If you like to bake, you'll love having a sifter. It's faster than using a sieve, but both work. Find them at kitchen stores, Walmart, online, etc.
      • Parchment paper: I buy handy 9" parchment rounds to layer finished and cooled crepes when making them ahead. You can use parchment squares or wax paper as well and trim them to fit. The rounds fit perfect, and you can use them to line cake pans and springform pans.

      How to Make Gluten-Free Crepes

      Note: I've made gluten-free crepes with ¼ cup of batter for very thin crepes, and with ⅓ cup, for crepes that are just a little sturdier (and still delicious). That's only 1 tablespoon difference, both work.

      Sifted flour on  parchment paper with a sifter and sieve.
      Step 1: Sift the flour to lighten it and remove any lumps.
      Flour, eggs, milk, vanilla in a blender container to make crepe batter.
      Step 2: Add milk, flour, eggs, vanilla, and sugar, and salt to the blender.
      Pale yellow batter inside a blender container.
      Step 3: Blend on low speed blend until smooth, about 45 seconds. Crepe batter will be thin and will thicken a bit upon resting and refrigerating.
      A Pyrex glass measuring container with light yellow batter covered in plastic.
      Step 4: Pour the batter into a container, cover and let the batter rest refrigerated for 30 minutes(or longer). Can be made ahead. Melt butter when ready to make crepes.

      Chef's tip: Why rest the batter? For better results. So the flour hydrates, any bubbles dissipate for a smoother batter, and for more delicate crepes. The flavor is also better. Rest 30 minutes. I've made batter up to 2 days in advance then whisked well to reincorporate. I also get it out of the refrigerate and let it stand to get the chill off, until the temperature is closer to room temperature.

      Yellow batter in a crepe pan for making crepes, finished crepes on a plate.
      Step 5: Place pan over medium heat. Brush with a small amount of melted butter. Pour scant ⅓ cup of batter and immediately turn and swirl the pan in a circular motion until the batter coats the bottom of the pan entirely. Cook 60 seconds on first side. Crepe should be set and edges done.
      A golden crepe in a black shallow pan finished cooking.
      Step 6: Lift the edge of the crepe and with your fingers gently turn it over to the second side. Shake the pan a bit to re-center. Cook another 45 seconds. Turn the heat down a bit if needed so they don't brown too quickly.
      A stack of golden crepe between rounds of parchment paper on a plate.
      Step 7: As each crepe is completed, slide it out of the pan onto a flat plate. When done, layer them between parchment paper or wax paper.

      When crepes are cool, wrap in plastic film then into a zip-stye bag. Refrigerate for 3-4 days or freeze up to 4 months (remember to label and date).

      Chef's tip: Frozen crepes are fragile. Place as many gluten-free crepes as you need in the refrigerator overnight to thaw and handle with care so they don't break. Allow crepes to thaw completely before unwrapping and separating to prevent tearing. The parchment layers really help with handling.

      Serving Suggestions

      In France, one of the simplest and most beloved ways to enjoy crepes is crêpe au sucre, served with melted butter and a sprinkle of sugar. Crepes filled with Nutella are another favorite. At home, an easy way to serve gluten-free crepes is with good jam, fresh fruit, and a light dusting of powdered sugar or powdered monk fruit for a no-sugar option. Find more ideas below.

      Two golden folded crepes on a white plate with blueberry jam and whipped cream.

      Sweet Crepe Ideas

      Find your favorite fillings and toppings. Fill crepes with lightly sweetened vanilla whipped cream, also called Chantilly cream, or whipped ricotta sweetened with a little honey. Another option is pureed cottage cheese, blended smooth in a food processor and sweetened however you like.

      For breakfast, a drizzle of maple syrup is delicious. For dessert, try strawberry coulis, jam, fresh berries, or a little whipped cream. I usually keep it simple with jam, berries, or whipped cream, or all three if I'm serving crepes to friends for dessert.

      For a topping that works well for both breakfast and dessert, try this cinnamon apple compote or blueberry compote.

      Savory Crepe Ideas

      For breakfast, fill savory crepes with softly scrambled eggs and cheese. For lunch or dinner, try a creamy chicken, mushroom, or creamed spinach filling.

      A little French restaurant near our house serves buckwheat crepes filled with slices of ham, then topped with a poached egg and cheese. Always a treat.

      Savory vegetables make a great filling too, like this roasted vegetable ratatouille, another terrific French-inspired dish.

      Recipe FAQs

      How do I make crepe batter smooth and lump-free?

      The best way to achieve lump free crepe batter is with a blender on low speed. Without a blender, whisk well in a bowl until smooth and if lumps persist, strain the batter through a fine sieve before using. Another tip, strain your flour before mixing.

      Should I let the crepe batter rest before cooking?

      After mixing, rest crepe batter in the refrigerator for 30-60 minutes so the flour has a chance to hydrate. This is especially important for gluten-free crepes.

      What type of pan is best for making crepes?

      While I've used carbon steel pans, a non-stick pan frying pan will do. Best is a non-stick crepe pan for making crepes. They are shallow, so the crepes are easy to turn, and not a heavy pan, so they are easy to swirl the batter and handle. The good thing is that non-stick crepe pans are inexpensive and worth buying if you love crepes. They make making crepes easy, so you can enjoy them more often.

      Can I make crepes ahead of time?

      You can definitely make crepes ahead of time. Cool crepes then stack them between pieces of parchment paper or wax paper and refrigerate until serving time.

      To freeze, just wrap the stack in plastic film and then in a zip-style bag. To freeze, wrap the stack of crepe in layers of plastic wrap then into a freezer-safe bag. Label and date for up to two months. To thaw, place them in the refrigerator overnight. When thawed, gently remove the layers an fill as desire with sweet or savory options.

      More Breakfast and Brunch Recipes

      Looking for more breakfast and brunch inspiration? Here are a few reader-favorite recipes to add to your table, whether you're planning a cozy weekend breakfast or a special brunch spread.

      • A golden cinnamon muffin with dripping glaze on a muffin paper.
        Bakery Style Cinnamon Muffins (Gluten-Free)
      • A golden cheesy frittata in a cast iron skillet sprinkled with parmesan and chopped parsley.
        Ham and Cheese Frittata
      • Dutch baby oven pancakes
        Gluten-Free Dutch Baby (German Pancakes)
      • Stacked buckwheat pancakes on a white plate with syrup and blueberries.
        The Best Buckwheat Pancakes Recipe

      If You Make Gluten-Free Crepes

      Let me know if you made these gluten-free crepes by adding a comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      Two golden folded crepes on a white plate with blueberry jam and whipped cream.

      Gluten-free Crepes

      Sally Cameron
      The classic thin French pancakes called crepes, made gluten-free (or with all purpose wheat flour). Delicious for a sweet dessert or for a more savory breakfast, lunch or dinner. Easy and fun to make, crepes freeze so you can make them ahead to use anytime.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 18 minutes mins
      Total Time 23 minutes mins
      Course Breakfast, Dessert, Dinner
      Cuisine French
      Servings 4 to 5, 8-10 crepes, 2 per person
      Calories 189 kcal

      Equipment

      • 10" non-stick crepe pan or non-stick fry pan
      • blender
      • Sifter or fine sieve
      • Mini off-set spatula or fork
      • Small pastry brush optional but makes buttering the pan easier

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 cup gluten-free flour or regular all purpose flour (wheat)
      • 2 cups low fat milk whole milk or plant milk
      • 2 large eggs
      • 2 tablespoons sugar or monk fruit for sweet crepes only
      • ¾ teaspoon vanilla extract sweet crepes only
      • 1 pinch salt
      • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or plant butter, melted

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Make crepe batter

      • Sift the flour onto a piece of wax paper or parchment paper. Add the milk to the blender, then the sifted flour, eggs, sugar or monk fruit, vanilla, and pinch of salt. Blend on low speed for about 45 seconds, until blended. Don't use high speed. Note: for savory crepes, omit the sugar and vanilla.

      Refrigerate batter

      • Pour the crepe batter into an airtight container and refrigerate for 30 minutes to hydrate flour. Can be made ahead up to 2 days.

      Make the crepes

      • Remove the batter from the refrigerator. Whisk crepe batter to re-incorporate into a smooth batter.
      • Melt the butter in a small bowl in the microwave. Place the pan over medium heat to get hot, then turn down to medium low. Brush a little melted butter over the pan surface, it should sizzle just a little.
        Pour in a scant ⅓ cup of batter and immediately lift the pan and gently swirl so the batter evenly covers the bottom of the pan. Don't worry if the first one is not perfect looking. It will still taste great.
      • Cook the first side of the crepe approximately 60 seconds. Lift an edge to see if it is lightly golden, the with your fingers (it's a little hot) pick up the crepe and turn it over. Shake the pan to re-center if needed. Cook approximately 30-45 seconds longer, the slide the crepe out of the pan onto a flat plate.
        Continue making crepes, brushing between each one with a very small amount of butter. Stack crepes as you go.

      To serve

      • Fold into quarters serve and top as preferred, or to refrigerate for another day.
        Stack them each between a layer of parchment of wax paper then wrap well in plastic film and refrigerate for 3-4 days. Alternatively, freeze crepes for up to two months. Be sure to label and date the package. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight.

      Notes

      Nutrition calculation was done with standard sugar. If you make them with monk fruit (as I do), it is only 3 grams of sugar per crepe (and 21 carbs for 2). Numbers are included for the crepes only, not for any topping or fillings you might enjoy. 
      If crepes are frozen, they are fragile until completely thawed so handle them carefully so they don't break. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight for best results. Separating them is easy if you've layered between parchment paper. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2crepesCalories: 189kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 8gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 85mgSodium: 73mgPotassium: 179mgFiber: 2gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 363IUCalcium: 147mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce

      07/22/2024 by Sally Cameron 106 Comments

      roasted tomato marinara

      As farmers' markets overflow with fresh, ripe summer tomatoes, now is the perfect time to make a batch of roasted tomato sauce. Skip the stockpot and reach for your roasting pan to create a richly concentrated and flavorful sauce that captures the essence of summer. While 'the best' is a bold statement, this recipe has been shared more than 50,000 times through the years. It's a reader favorite for good reason, since 2011.

      Jars of rich red roasted tomato sauce on a wood counter with fresh tomatoes and garlic cloves.

      In late summer when prices are low, I'll bring home 10-20 pounds of fresh tomatoes and make my own roasted tomato sauce. Roasting tomatoes concentrates their natural sweetness. Adding garlic, onions, and herbs adds wonderful flavor. Store-bought pasta sauce can't hold a candle to this!

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Roasted tomato sauce freezes well for a quick meal in colder months to come.
      • Takes advantage of fresh summer tomatoes.
      • Terrific with many dishes like this easy chicken parmesan, and of course simply with a bowl of pasta.

      If you love homemade tomato sauce, here's another recipe, my easy homemade marinara sauce. Make it in about 30 minutes with canned tomatoes.

      Roasted Tomato Sauce Ingredients

      Ingredients for roasted tomato sauce on a marble counter with tomatoes, onion, garlic, oil, wine.
      • Tomatoes: Use meaty, fresh ripe tomatoes, whatever looks best and is a good price as you need a lot of tomatoes. Check out your local farmer's markets. Different types of tomatoes is good
      • Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves, not garlic powder, for that punch of flavor. A must for tomato sauce.
      • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is the best.
      • Wine: A little dry red wine adds nice flavor but it's optional.
      • Herbs: Fresh oregano, fresh basil leaves, or some of each.
      • Onions: Yellow, brown, or white, all are fine.
      • Red pepper flakes: If you want to add a little spiciness.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper.

      Here's another of my favorite tomato-based sauces; mushroom marinara. Rich and meaty but no meat!

      Chef Sally's tip on wine: When I cook with wine I use the mini airline size bottles so I don't have to open a big bottle. They work great, are inexpensive, and easy to keep in the pantry. Wine enhances flavor in cooking, but of course using it is optional.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • To offset the acidity of the tomatoes, some people add a little sugar. If your tomatoes are sweet, you probably won't need it, but you can use it if perferred. Another option is a little monk fruit.
      • Another nice addition is a tablespoon or two of balsamic vinegar. Add this when pureeing the roasted tomato sauce. It adds nicely to the flavor of the sauce. 
      • To use dried herbs instead of fresh herbs, use a dried Italian seasoning blend. Use ⅓ to ½ as much as fresh herbs.

      Chef's tips on tomatoes: So what's a good tomato for this sauce? I usually buy a combination of heirloom varieties like Brandywine and Purple Cherokee (a purple beefsteak) and Roma tomatoes, for fun color and flavor mixed in. Red beefsteak tomatoes are excellet too. Buy what looks best and is a good price as this is a lot of tomatoes! A mix is great for roasted pasta sauce. For more info on varieties of tomatoes read this.

      Recipe Instructions

      Ten pounds of colorful chopped tomatoes on a black cutting board with a knife.
      • Step 1: Pre-heat a hot oven or two ovens to 425°F.
      • Step 2: Wash the tomatoes and core them, depending on variety. Beefsteak and heirloom tomatoes have bigger cores. If you are using Romas, you may only need to chop them. Chop the tomatoes into larger chunks. Add them to the roasting pans.
      • Step 3: Roughly chop onions and peel garlic cloves leaving them whole. Add them to the roasting pans, diving the quantity between the two.
      • Step 4: Add olive oil, chopped herbs, wine (if using), salt and pepper and toss with your hands to mix.
      • Step 5: Roast the tomatoes. Timing is approximately 1:15 minutes, depending on how juicy the tomatoes are, how concentrated you want your roasted tomato sauce, and your ovens. It might take a little longer.
      • Stir the sauce half way through. Check their progress around 45 minutes. Don't leave the ovens open too long. Roast until the tomatoes and onions are a nicely shriveled with browned edges and there is still a little juice in the pan bottom.
      A stainless steel roasting pan of roasted tomatoes, onions, herbs, and garlic.
      • Step 6: When roasting is complete, allow pans to cool long enough to handle, then spoon everything carefully into a food processor or blender in batches and puree. For a chunky sauce, do a few pulses. For a smooth sauce, process for a little longer. Your preference.
      Roasted tomatoes, onions, garlic cloves, and herbs in a food processor to be pureed.

      Another tool option, use a stick blender (immersion blender). They are a handy tool that takes up a lot less kitchen space than a food processor or high powered blender for smaller kitchens. Be sure to puree in a tall pot in the kitchen sink to reduce splatter (and wear an apron!).

      Chef's tip on yield: My most recent batch of roasted tomato sauce yielded 3 beautiful quarts. At other times, the yield has been 2 quarts. Maybe the tomatoes were more or less juicy, or maybe I reduced it farther in roasting. Either way, the sauce is fantastic and thick after pureeing.

      Pureed tomato sauce in a food processor workbowl ready to enjoy.

      Recipe Tips and Tricks

      Use one large roasting pan (like you use for a turkey) for a half batch or two large roasting pans for a full batch. For a full batch with one roasting pan, split this recipe into two batches. If you have double ovens or one really large oven, you might be able to do two pans at once with two roasting pans. If you only have one roasting pan, try borrowing a second from a friend.

      Another option is using a big electric roaster like you might do a turkey in. Electric roasters are great tools and I've used them for other recipes but not for roasted tomato sauce. You'll have to experiment with timing.

      Don't use disposable, uncoated aluminum pans. The acidity in tomatoes reacts with the aluminum with the possibility of leaving an unpleasant metallic taste.

      While the long terms effects of aluminum leaching into foods it not fully known (there are conflicting reports), acidic foods like tomatoes are better off in stainless steel or anodized aluminum. Anodized aluminum roasting pans work because the manufacturing process hardens the metal making it non-reactive.

      Read Tip: Willie says "I've been making this for a few years now - the best marinara sauce EVER! ? I use two stainless steel cookie sheets (don't have 2 roasting pans) and switch top and bottom, half way thru cooking". See here entire comment below.

      Serving and Storing Suggestions

      • Serve over your favorite pasta noodle. It's a good basic spaghetti sauce, or for penne or rotini (corkscrew).
      • For a lower carb dinner, serve over zucchini noodles.
      • It makes a terrific pizza sauce!
      • Roasted tomato sauce is also terrific with my ricotta and kale stuffed shells recipe.
      • Serve as a dipping sauce with a grilled cheese sandwich. Oh, it's so good.
      Finished tomato sauce in glass jars and silicone molds for freezing.

      How Do I Store Roasted Tomato Sauce?

      Roasted tomato sauce will keep in the refrigerator for 5 days in an airtight container, or freezer for up to 6 months. I've used glass jars (like a mason jar or a ball jar) and these portioned silicone freezing cubes.

      Store roasted tomato sauce in them or when the sauce is frozen solid, pop the cubes out and store in freezer-safe zip bags, labeled and dated.

      When you fill jars, don't fill them all of the way to the top. Leave a little head space for expansion.

      To thaw frozen sauce, place in the refrigerator overnight, pour into a pan over medium heat with a lid on low heat. On of my favorite things to label jars with is these removable labels. They work great.

      Roasted Tomato Sauce Canning Notes

      I used to can this sauce with a pressure canner so it was pantry stable. Now I just freeze the finished sauce.

      Low-acid foods such as tomato sauce should optimally be processed using a pressure canner, not a water bath. Only a pressure canner can reach the 240 degrees necessary to safely process low-acid foods (a ph value greater than 4.6).

      For instructions on preparing canned tomatoes, check out this article from Simply Canning.

      A jar of rich red, chunky roasted tomato sauce without a lid and red ripe tomatoes.

      Recipe FAQs

      Which type of tomatoes are best for roasting?

      Meatier tomatoes are best for making a roasted tomato sauce. Buy either Roma tomatoes or plum tomatoes, but you can use any variety of tomatoes depending on availability and personal preference. I often use heirloom tomatoes.

      If the tomatoes have lots of seeds, squeeze or slice some of them out after halving or quartering. A combination of tomatoes make for good flavor. If you want a really red sauce, use all red tomatoes, or mix in colors for fun and flavor.

      Do I need to peel the tomatoes before roasting them?

      No need to peel tomatoes before roasting as the skins soften during roasting and add nice texture to the finished sauce. Plus, there is good nutrition in those skins, so I recommend not peeling. It's definitely a time saver too. For a smoother roasted tomato sauce, puree longer in a food processor or blender.

      What herbs and spices work well in roasted tomato sauce?

      Traditional herbs for roasted tomato sauce include basil, oregano, thyme, rosemary, Italian parsley, and bay leaf. Soft leaf herbs blend into the finished sauce easily when pureeing. Herbs such as bay leaf must be removed, as you do not want to eat them. Rosemary, if chopped, will blend in, or use sprigs then remove after roasting.

      More Recipes With Tomatoes

      Here are more recipe for you using tomatoes, from oven roasted cherry tomatoes to an easy marinara, bolognese, and mushroom sauce.

      • A white bowl of red and gold roasted cherry tomatoes with fresh thyme leaves.
        Garlic Roasted Tomatoes with Thyme
      • Pot full of homemade marinara.
        Easy Pasta Sauce With Tomato Sauce
      • bison bolognese with pasta
        Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)
      • mushroom marinara pasta sauce
        Mushroom Tomato Sauce

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this roasted tomato sauce recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

      Recipe originally published in September 19, 2011.

      📖 Recipe

      roasted tomato marinara sauce | AFoodCentricLife.com

      Roasted Tomato Sauce

      Sally Cameron
      Roasting tomatoes makes an incredibly rich and concentrated tomato sauce. To roast this many tomatoes at once, you need two roasting pans so as not to crowd the ingredients. That may require two ovens or roasting in two batches. If you don't own a roasting pan, find a friend who does and borrow one. Freezes beautifully. Serving is ¾ cup.
      5 from 5 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 50 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr
      Course Sauce
      Cuisine Italian
      Servings 16 Yield 3 quarts (12 cups)
      Calories 133 kcal

      Equipment

      • Stainless steel roasting pans
      • Food processor or blender
      • Double ovens or split the batch into two

      Ingredients
        

      • 10 pounds fresh tomatoes
      • 16 large whole garlic cloves, peeled
      • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
      • ½ cup dry red wine optional
      • 6 tablespoons fresh oregano leaves or basil leaves (or both) or 2 tablespoons dried
      • 2 medium onions roughly chopped
      • 1-2 tablespoons Balsamic vinegar optional
      • 2 teaspoons sea salt
      • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
      • ¼-1/2 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      Pre-heat Ovens

      • Pre-heat the oven (s) to 425°F. Get out two large stainless steel roasting pans (like for roasting a turkey).

      Prep Tomatoes

      • Wash the tomatoes. Depending on the type of tomato, you may need to cut out the core first, as with large Beefsteak or Heirloom varieties. You may not need to with Roma or plum tomatoes Cut tomatoes into large chunks. Don't cut the pieces too small. Big chunks are good. Smaller pieces roast too fast.

      Roast Tomatoes

      • Place tomatoes in the roasting pan. Add garlic cloves, oil, wine or broth, oregano, onion, salt and pepper. Toss with your hands. Place pans in the oven and roast until tomatoes have reduced and are starting to get a few black edges. The pan should still have some juices, not be dry.  Depending on your oven it should take about 60 minutes. Stir half way through. If the tomatoes are really juicy, it may take longer.

      Cool and Puree

      • Remove pans from oven, set on the stove top and allow to cool until you can handle it. Carefully transfer the roast tomatoes into a food processor and pulse 5-6 times or until you get the preferred texture. You can also use a blender and process in batches. Serve or cool completely and freeze in portions.

      Notes

      Canning tomatoes requires a pressure canner. See notes in the post, and read about canning tomatoes on recommended links.
      For tomatoes, use what is best at the market. Roma tomatoes, plum tomatoes, beefsteaks, and heirloom tomatoes all work great in this recipe. 
      The yield for this recipe is 2-3 quarts, depending on how far you roast or reduce the tomatoes. This sauce will keep fresh in the refrigerator for 4-5 days, or freeze for up to 6 months. Some batches I've reduced the sauce way down with little juice left in the pan. This last batch I did not go as far and got 3 beautiful quarts of sauce. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 0.75cupCalories: 133kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 3gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gSodium: 307mgPotassium: 731mgFiber: 5gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 2404IUVitamin C: 41mgCalcium: 68mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Tropical Mango Pineapple Smoothie

      08/17/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie in a glass with lime and fruit wedge.

      Refreshing on a hot day, enjoy tropical flavors with this mango pineapple smoothie, bursting with the vibrant flavors of ripe mango, pineapple, and lime juice. Skip the fast food version that's loaded with sugar and make this healthier alternative at home in minutes. Naturally sweetened with whole fruit, it's also packed with protein from Greek yogurt and fiber, making it a great way to start the day.

      Ever order a McDonald's mango pineapple smoothie? Just reading the nutrition label could send you into sugar shock. It's the kind of smoothie that gives smoothies a bad name. A medium mango pineapple smoothie at the golden arches has a whopping 57 grams of sugar (14 teaspoons) and almost no protein (3 grams). Let's fix that right now so you can enjoy this tropical smoothie at home.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Make it in minutes or make it ahead for a grab-and-go breakfast.
      • High in protein and fiber, a healthy mango pineapple smoothie recipe.
      • Use frozen fruit or fresh fruit.
      • Way less sugar than a fast food mango pineapple smoothie.

      If you love mango in smoothies, try this bright green smoothie with mango and spinach. Sounds crazy but it's terrific and a beautiful color. 

      Recipe Ingredients

      Two glasses of bright golden mango pineapple smoothies with lime and pineapple wedges.

      While this smoothie is a tropical delight, it is still a higher sugar smoothie. Be careful how much fruit you add. If you eat low carb or watch your sugar intake, keep this smoothie recipe as a treat, not an everyday smoothie.

      • Milk: Coconut milk adds more of a tropical touch, but almond milk, hemp seed milk, dairy milk, or cashew milk all work.
      • Yogurt: Buy unflavored plain Greek yogurt for the best protein.
      • Protein powder: Use your preferred. I generally use whey protein.
      • Mango: Fresh mango or frozen mango. Frozen mango chunks make it frosty and thicker.
      • Pineapple: Use fresh pineapple or frozen pineapple.
      • Lime: A little fresh lime juice lifts the flavor and tempers the sweetness.
      • Turmeric: Just a little adds golden color (optional), plus it's good for you.
      • Vanilla: What's more tropical than vanilla? Add a little vanilla extract or vanilla paste, if you are not using vanilla protein powder.

      For lower sugar smoothies, try berry smoothies and check out my smoothies recipe index page.

      Chef's tip: One tropical fruit I skip in a mango pineapple smoothie is banana. Often used in smoothie recipes to make them creamy, this smoothie recipe doesn't need more sugar, as it gets nice creaminess from the yogurt. Can you add banana? Yes, fresh banana or frozen banana. I don't think it is needed, but it's up to you.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • It might sound crazy but a little mild curry powder is nice!
      • Swap lemon juice for lime juice.
      • Use either all protein powder or all yogurt to meet your protein needs.
      • For more fiber and protein, add a tablespoon of ground flax seed.
      • If you want it sweeter, try a little maple syrup, honey, or monk fruit (for no added sugar). 
      • Try coconut water for your liquid, but read the labels for added sugar.
      • Add a vanilla extract, ground vanilla, or use vanilla protein powder. 

      Fresh pineapple mango salsa is terrific with chicken, fish, shrimp, and many other dishes. It's brightly flavored and delicious if you've never made it.

      Chef's tip: What NOT to use in a pineapple mango smoothie? Skip any mango puree concentrate, pineapple puree, pineapple juice, fruit juice concentrate, or orange juice concentrate. Why? They are pure sugar as the fiber is gone, and they really spike your blood sugar. Use whole fruit that still has the fiber and you'll do much better.

      Another good combination with pineapple is frozen cucumber. Sounds crazy but it's really refreshing! Look at my cucumber smoothie post for how to cut up and freeze the cucumber.

      Smoothie Instructions

      A blender container with ingredients for a smoothie.
      A pureed mango smoothie in a blender ready for pouring.

      Any blender will do but a high-speed blender purees better and works faster.

      To the blender container add the milk first, then the yogurt, fruit, protein powder, lime juice, and turmeric (if using). Blend away, start low to grind up the fruit, then turn it up to high to puree.

      Serving Suggestions

      A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie with pineapple and lime garnish.

      Serve right away or soon after blending. Keep it refrigerated if you are not drinking it right away, or in an insulated thermos if on the go.

      You can make a mango pineapple smoothie the night ahead of time and shake well to re-blend in the morning or after a workout. They are a great quick breakfast.

      For another classic smoothie, try this strawberry banana smoothie with yogurt.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I prepare a mango pineapple smoothie in advance?

      It's best enjoyed fresh, but you can prepare it in advance and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Shake, stir, or re-blend before drinking.

      How can I make a protein-rich mango pineapple smoothie?

      To increase the protein, try adding protein powder, Greek yogurt, silken tofu, or a handful of nuts and seeds (hemp seeds, chia seeds) to increase the protein level. Use a combination of options to round out your protein needs. One more tip, compare milk protein levels and try a higher protein option such as homemade hemp seed milk.

      Is it necessary to add sweeteners like honey or sugar?

      No, sweeteners are not needed in a smoothie including tropical fruit as they are naturally higher in sugar. If you feel you need it sweeter, use an alternative sweetener without sugar such as monk fruit.

      Do I need a high-powered blender to make a mango pineapple smoothie?

      You can make a smoothie with almost any blender. A high-powered blender creates a smoother texture, but a regular blender or personal blender also work. You might need to blend longer or add a little more liquid to achieve the desired consistency.

      More Healthy Fruity Smoothies

      • Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.
        5-Minute Cherry Smoothie Recipe
      • A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.
        Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)
      • chocolate blueberry smoothie
        Chocolate Blueberry Smoothie (high protein)

      ⭐️Did You Make This?

      If you make this mango pineapple smoothie, I hope you'll comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I appreciate hearing from you.

      📖 Recipe

      A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie in a glass with lime and fruit wedge.

      Mango Pineapple Smoothie

      Sally Cameron
      A tropical dreamy creamy smoothie with mango and pineapple, blend in a minute for breakfast or a post workout refuel. Make it the night ahead if desired and keep well refrigerated, shake well before enjoying.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Total Time 5 minutes mins
      Course Beverage, Breakfast, smoothie
      Cuisine American
      Servings 1
      Calories 254 kcal

      Equipment

      • High speed blender

      Ingredients
        

      • 10 ounces unsweetened almond milk or milk of choice
      • ½ cup plain greek yogurt
      • ½ cup chopped mango fresh or frozen
      • ¼ cup pineapple fresh or frozen
      • ½ scoop protein powder plain or vanilla
      • ½ teaspoon turmeric powder optional
      • 1 lime juiced
      • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract or vanilla paste

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Add liquid to the blender first, then yogurt, then all other ingredients and blend on high until smooth and creamy. For a frostier smoothie add a few ice cubes.

      Notes

      Smoothie milk options:
      Hemp seed milk, dairy milk, almond milk, cashew milks, and coconut milk really adds tropical flavor, all make this a delicious smoothie. 
      For more tips on making healthy smoothies, please read my Healthy Smoothie Guide.
      Nutritional information is an estimate provided to you as a courtesy. You should calculate the actual nutritional information with the products and brands you are using with your preferred nutritional calculator if there are questions. 
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 254kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 26gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 30mgSodium: 430mgPotassium: 463mgFiber: 5gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 994IUVitamin C: 70mgCalcium: 539mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      5-Minute Cherry Smoothie Recipe

      06/28/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.

      Got 5 minutes for a quick breakfast that's healthy? Whip up this creamy cherry smoothie. Use fresh or frozen cherries, either sweet cherries or tart cherries. Cherry season is fleeting so take advantage of the season while you can and enjoy this cherry smoothie. Prep them ahead if needed, they hold well in the refrigerator.

      Two glasses or bright pink cherry smoothie with dark cherries in the background.

      You know it's summer when cherries show up at the market. Beyond using cherries for fabulous desserts like this easy cherry cake, a cherry smoothie is one of my favorite ways to enjoy cherries. While fresh cherries are the essence of summer, frozen cherries work year round for this terrific smoothie.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Use fresh or frozen cherries.
      • Works with tart cherries or sweet cherries.
      • A simple smoothie recipe but customizable with great add-in options.
      • High protein with Greek yogurt (if you do dairy).

      Recipe Ingredients

      Simple ingredients for a cherry smoothie in glass bowls.
      • Milk: I use homemade unsweetened almond milk but use your milk of choice.
      • Cherries: Both tart cherries and sweet dark cherries make a great smoothie, as well as both fresh and frozen.
      • Yogurt: I recommend buying plain Greek yogurt for the thick creaminess and high protein that is adds to a cherry smoothie.
      • Banana: Fresh banana or frozen banana are good. Frozen makes a thicker, colder smoothie.
      • Flavoring: Just a little almond extract really adds complimentary flavor to the cherries, or use vanilla extract for a cherry vanilla smoothie.
      • Sweetening: Choose a mild honey for sweetness. How much you use will depend on the natural sweetness of the cherries. Also try maple syrup, but it has a definite taste.

      Chef's cherry tip: Fresh cherries or frozen cherries? I've used purchased frozen cherries, fresh pitted cherries, and fresh cherries that I pitted then froze for this cherry smoothie. They all work but my first choice is the fresh pitted then frozen cherries. Yes, it's a bit of work to pit and freeze your own fresh cherries but I find the flavor the best. Outside of cherry season, I'll go through my frozen stash and then use store-frozen cherries if available.

      Ways to Customize a Cherry Smoothie

      Want a healthy cherry smoothie recipe? Try some of these substitutions and variations.

      • Milk variations: try homemade coconut milk, cashew milk, dairy milk, hemp seed milk, or oat milk, (each will change the flavor a little).
      • Make it a vegan cherry smoothie with non-dairy milk and yogurt.
      • Add protein powder for higher protein, either whey, almond, egg white, or a plant-based blend.
      • For a black forest chocolate cherry smoothie add cocoa powder or use chocolate protein powder.
      • For no-added sugar, use a monk fruit honey or simple syrup for sweetening.
      • Skip the sweetening and instead use a vanilla Greek yogurt.
      • For a boost of healthy fats, add a tablespoon of almond butter, peanut butter, cashew butter, coconut butter, or even MCT oil.
      • For added fiber and protein add 1-2 tablespoons of flaxseed meal.
      • One thing I add to my smoothies everyday is a supplement called creatine. It helps with building muscle, staying strong, and improving cognition and memory. Here's a great article on creatine. It's not just for body builders or men.
      • One more add-in worth mentioning is tart cherry powder. Known to be great for joints, muscle soreness, and post workout recovery. Plus it tastes great in smoothies.

      Be sure the check out my Ultimate Guide to Making Healthy Smoothies!

      Smoothie Instructions

      Making smoothies is best with a high-speed blender.

      Cherries, banana, and milk in a blender container.
      Step 1: Add milk to the blender first, then protein powder if using. Next add the cherries, bananas, sweetener, and extract.
      A pink and bubbly blended cherry smoothie in a blender container.
      Step 2: Start blender on slow speed to start grinding the fruit together, then power up to high and blend until smooth as desired.

      How to Store Cherries

      Cherries like things cool and dry, making moisture is the enemy of cherries. I wash mine as soon as I get home with this produce wash, then allow them to dry completely on a clean kitchen towel. Do not put them away unless they are dry or you run the risk of moldy cherries.

      When cherries are totally dry, place them in a storage container with a layer of paper towels at the bottom to minimize condensation or moisture.

      They will last 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Beyond that, freeze extra cherries.

      Chef's tip on cherries: How can you tell tart cherries (sour cherries) from sweet cherries? By the color. Tart cherries are bright red while sweet cherries are the dark red ones. Read here about the health benefits of cherries.

      How to Freeze Cherries

      Pitted frozen whole dark red cherries on a sheet tray.
      Step 1: Pit and freeze whole cherries on a rimmed sheet tray until firm.
      Bagged dark red cherries frozen for storage.
      Step 2: Store frozen cherries in freezer safe containers or zip bags.

      To freeze cherries, wash and dry first, then pit them with a cherry pitter tool and lay them in a single layer on a plastic or parchment line rimmed baking sheet tray that will fit in your freezer (I use quarter sheet size). Freeze for several hours until firm, then store them in a freezer safe container.

      Frozen cherries are best up to 6 months but can last up to a year properly frozen and stored. So while it's cherry season, freeze as many as you can for the months ahead.

      Here's another beautiful fruit smoothie and my other go-to recipe, this raspberry smoothie.

      Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.

      Serving Suggestions

      Enjoy a cherry smoothie right out of the blender or make it the night ahead and store it in an airtight container like a wide mouth ball jar with tight fitting lid. Refrigerate for a great grab-and-go breakfast or workout refuel.

      Recipe FAQs

      How do I pit cherries for a smoothie?

      The best way to pit cherries for a smoothie or any other recipe is with an inexpensive tool called a cherry pitter. Find them online and where cooking tools are sold. Without a cherry pitter you can use a paring knife, but it's slower and messier.

      How can I make my cherry smoothie creamier?

      For a creamy cherry smoothie, add yogurt. Use Greek yogurt as it is thicker than regular yogurt. Banana adds creaminess to smoothies, either fresh or frozen. Another creamy add-in is your favorite nut butter.

      How do I make a cherry smoothie thicker?

      To make a thicker smoothie, try freezing your fruit if it's fresh. Add Greek yogurt or ground flaxseed, which also adds fiber and fat. If the smoothie does not have banana, it's a great thickener for a smoothie. Lastly, add a few ice cubes.

      More Smoothie Recipes

      Smoothies have been my go-to breakfast and post-workout preference for more than 25 years! For more healthy smoothie recipes, try the links below and check out the smoothie recipe page where I am adding more smoothie recipes.

      • A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.
        Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)
      • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
        Chocolate Banana Smoothie
      • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
        Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this cherry smoothie, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.

      Cherry Smoothie

      Sally Cameron
      Bright pink, sweet and smooth, grab some cherries while they are in season and enjoy this cherry smoothie!
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 0 minutes mins
      Total Time 5 minutes mins
      Course Breakfast, smoothie
      Cuisine American
      Servings 1
      Calories 403 kcal

      Equipment

      • blender

      Ingredients
        

      • ½ cup unsweetened almond milk or your favorite milk
      • 1 cup pitted cherries, fresh or frozen about 5 ounces or 13-14 cherries
      • 2 teaspoons honey or other sweetener, optional
      • 1 small banana fresh or frozen
      • ¾ cup plain greek yogurt 5 ounces
      • ½ teaspoon almond extract or vanilla extract optional

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Add milk to blender first, then yogurt, fruit, honey, and extract if using. Start low to grind the fruit together then increase speed and puree to desired consistency.
        Enjoy cherry smoothie right out of the blender or make it ahead and refrigerate for later enjoyment or overnight for a grab-and-go breakfast or post-workout refuel.

      Notes

      How to Customize a Cherry Smoothie

      • Milk variations: try homemade coconut milk, cashew milk, dairy milk, hemp seed milk, or oat milk, (each will change the flavor a little).
      • Make it vegan with non-dairy milk and yogurt.
      • Add protein powder for higher protein, either whey, almond, egg white, or a plant-based blend.
      • For a black forest chocolate cherry smoothie add cocoa powder or use chocolate protein powder.
      • For reduced sugar, use a monk fruit honey or simple syrup for sweetening.
      • Skip the sweetening and instead use a vanilla yogurt.
      • For a boost of healthy fats, add a tablespoon of almond butter, peanut butter, coconut butter, or even MCT oil.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 403kcalCarbohydrates: 60gProtein: 21gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 216mgPotassium: 999mgFiber: 8gSugar: 42gVitamin A: 161IUVitamin C: 19mgCalcium: 387mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)

      04/01/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

      A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.

      This delicious raspberry smoothie is one of my favorite, go-to smoothie recipes. Why? It's a super simple smoothie and I am crazy about raspberries! If you are too, you're going to love this smoothie using frozen raspberries. Perfect for busy mornings when you have little time and still want to eat healthy. Blend one up today or make it the night ahead.

      A beautiful pink raspberry smoothie in a small glass with a bowl of raspberries.

      I've been drinking and creating smoothie recipes for more than 25 years, and here's a simple favorite, my raspberry smoothie. It's easy to keep the ingredients on hand for whenever you need them. Plus, there are lots of ways to vary it to meet your personal needs.

      Why You'll Love This Raspberry Smoothie

      • Quick and easy raspberry smoothie recipe.
      • Just a few simple ingredients.
      • Healthy for breakfast, afternoon snack, or a post-workout re-fuel.
      • Satisfy a sweet tooth in a healthy way.

      If you love raspberries, try grilled shrimp salad with raspberry vinaigrette, and for a terrific mocktail, try this raspberry shrub recipe, it's refreshing and no alcohol.

      Smoothie Ingredients

      Keeping the ingredients simple allows the flavor of the raspberries to shine through for a delicious smoothie.

      Ingredients for a raspberry smoothie in glass bowls.
      • Raspberries: Frozen raspberries are easiest for smoothies, but use fresh berries if you prefer, or use them for garnish if desired. Frozen is easy to keep on hand and usually less expensive than fresh.
      • Milk: For a non-dairy milk smoothie use unsweetened almond milk, hemp milk, cashew milk, oat milk, organic soy milk, or use dairy milk if preferred. All will add their own little flavor differences.
      • Sweetener: I use monk fruit for no added sugar, but mild honey or simple syrup work as well. Try this monk fruit simple syrup for no sugar added, maple syrup or monk fruit no-sugar maple syrup. Sweetener is optional, just enjoy it with the natural sweetness.
      • Banana: Use frozen banana for a frostier smoothie or fresh banana. Half of a banana will do. A barely yellow banana has less sugar. An overripe banana is higher in sugar and have a stronger taste that can overpower the flavor of the raspberry.
      • Protein powder: Add a scoop of protein powder (or mored depending on your brand and how much protein you need). This is what we use for whey protein, or for plant-based, try this almond protein powder or this for a good vegan protein blend. Use either plain or vanilla protein powder.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For healthy fats, add a tablespoon of MCT oil, coconut butter, peanut butter, or nut butter, or use a few tablespoons of full-fat coconut milk.
      • Add a little vanilla extract.
      • Use a raspberry fruit blend with other berries.
      • Don't want to use protein powder? Try plain Greek yogurt, vanilla Greek yogurt, or even plain cottage cheese.
      • Alternate raspberries with another fresh fruit such as blackberries, blueberries, strawberries, plums or peaches.
      • Make a raspberry coconut smoothie using homemade coconut milk. It's creamy and delicious.
      • Use a power add-in such as pomegranate powder or tart cherry powder for an extra nutritional boost.

      How to Make a Raspberry Smoothie

      Use a high-powered blender for the best results and the creamiest texture.

      A bright pink raspberry smoothie in the blender.

      Add the milk to the blender first, then add the rest of your ingredients and blend until smooth.

      Chef's smoothie tip: This is a pretty thick smoothie. If you want it thinner, add more milk. If you want to make smoothie bowls, try using less milk for an even thicker smoothie.

      A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.

      Serving Suggestions

      Serve raspberry smoothie right out of the blender or make it ahead, place it in an airtight container with a tight fitting lid and refrigerate. Great for grab-and-go mornings.

      For another terrific, fruity pink smoothie make this cherry smoothie with fresh or frozen cherries.

      Chef's tip on temperature: If you want it colder for warm summer days, add a few ice cubes to the blender for a frosty texture. If you want it not so cold for a wintery day, use fresh raspberries or thawed frozen raspberries and fresh banana.

      More Healthy Smoothie Recipes

      Smoothies are easy to make in so many delicious and healthy ways. Try one of these other smoothie recipes to mix up your morning or check out the smoothie recipe index where I am adding more smoothie recipes.

      • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
        Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
      • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
        Chocolate Banana Smoothie
      • coconut mango smoothie
        Spiced Mango Coconut Smoothie

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this raspberry smoothie, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.

      Raspberry Smoothie

      Sally Cameron
      Sweet, creamy, and a terrific healthy way to start your day. Make it in a minute!
      5 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 0 minutes mins
      Total Time 5 minutes mins
      Course Beverage, Breakfast, smoothie
      Cuisine American
      Servings 1 16 ounce or 2 8-ounce
      Calories 278 kcal

      Equipment

      • blender

      Ingredients
        

      • 10 ounces almond milk or milk of choice
      • 5 ounces frozen raspberries ½ a 10-ounce package
      • ½ small banana fresh or frozen
      • 1 scoop protein powder or as needed
      • 1 teaspoon granulated monk fruit or honey

      Would you like to save this recipe?

      Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

      Instructions
       

      • Add the milk to the blender first, then add the rest of the ingredients and blend until smooth.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 278kcalCarbohydrates: 41gProtein: 29gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 415mgPotassium: 485mgFiber: 11gSugar: 15gVitamin A: 159IUVitamin C: 42mgCalcium: 476mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
      • « Previous Page
      • 1
      • …
      • 3
      • 4
      • 5
      • 6
      • 7
      • …
      • 10
      • Next Page »
      Chef Sally Cameron of aFoodcentricLife.com in her kitchen.

      Welcome! I'm Sally, a professionally trained chef, former personal chef and caterer, lover of fresh healthy food, and sharing it with others.

      More about me →

      Grill & Smoker Recipes

      • Sliced of golden pound cake with strawberries and a small bowl of whipped cream.
        Gluten Free Pound Cake with Cream Cheese
      • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
        Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
      • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
        Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)
      • A bowl of slow cooker pinto beans topped with jalapeno slices, cilantro, and chopped white onion.
        Crock Pot Pinto Beans

      More Recipe Ideas

      • Grilled chicken kabobs glazed with hoisin sauce on a baking sheet.
        Grilled Hoisin Chicken Skewers
      • Broccoli bacon salad
        Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
      • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
        Lemony Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
      • Sliced flank steak on a cutting board with flank steak marinade in a small bowl.
        Carne Asada Marinade (for Grilled Steak)

      Memorial Day Recipes Page -->

      Footer

      as seen on

      Logos of Featured Publications

      About

      • Privacy Policy
      • Disclaimer
      • Terms & Conditions
      • Accessibility policy

      Newsletter

      • Sign Up! for emails and recipes.

      Menu

      • Home
      • About
      • Contact
      • Facebook
      • Instagram
      • Pinterest

      As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

      Copyright © 2026 aFoodcentricLife.com

      Rate This Recipe

      Your vote:




      A rating is required
      A name is required
      An email is required